JP7040553B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the gaming board, the success or failure of the game is determined, and an effect for suggesting and notifying the player of the determination result is executed. However, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, there is a case where a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game as a production for suggesting the result of the pass / fail judgment.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is specified as a determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and the display means thereof. When the identification information for showing the determination result of the above is displayed, it has a privilege giving means that gives a privilege advantageous to the player, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed in a predetermined operation pattern. It is possible to execute a dynamic display means, a variable means that can be changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state, and variable control for changing the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern. The gaming machine has the variable control means, and the game machine has the operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means as an effect pattern for showing the determination result of the determination means. An effect pattern including the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means can be determined based on at least the determination result of 1 of the determination means, and the variable means is in the first state. In the case of the second state, it is possible to make the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means more difficult to see than in a certain case, and the variable control means can make the identification information difficult to see. The variable means can be changed in a variable manner included in the effect pattern even when the variable means is not dynamically displayed . The variable means is composed of a plurality of variable members, and at least one variable member is the first variable member. When at least one of the other variable members can be changed to the second state in the state of being changed to one state, and the gaming machine is the specific determination result. In addition, it is easier to determine the effect pattern in which the variable means is variable than in the case where the determination result is other than the specific determination result .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a determination means capable of performing a determination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result specific to the display means. A privilege giving means that gives a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for showing is displayed, and a dynamic display means that can dynamically display the identification information in a predetermined operation pattern. , A variable means that can be changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state, and a variable control means that can execute variable control for changing the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern. The gaming machine has the operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the variable control means as an effect pattern for showing the determination result of the determination means. The effect pattern including the variable pattern of the variable means to be executed can be determined based on at least the determination result of 1 of the determination means, and the variable means can be determined as compared with the case where the variable means is in the first state. In the second state, it is possible to make the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means difficult to see, and the variable control means dynamically displays the identification information. The variable means can be changed in a variable manner included in the effect pattern even when the effect is not provided, the variable means is composed of a plurality of variable members, and at least one variable member is changed to the first state. In this state, at least one of the other variable members can be changed to the second state, and the gaming machine can make the specific determination when it is the specific determination result. It is easier to determine the effect pattern in which the variable means is variable than in the case of other than the result .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. It is a perspective front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a base member and a 1st electric accessory. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (A) and (b) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in line XVII-XVII of FIG. 10 (a). (A) and (b) are front views of the winning opening unit. (A) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the line XXa-XXa of FIG. 18A, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the line XXb-XXb of FIG. 18B. be. (A) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (A) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in the range XXIIa of FIG. 21 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in the range XXIIb of FIG. 21 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the left wing member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 24 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of a winning opening unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a winning opening unit. (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning opening unit in the range XXVIII of FIG. 27 (b). It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the range XXIX of FIG. (A) is a front view of the decorative symbol display device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device in the line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). It is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative pattern display device. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a decorative pattern display device. (A) is a front view in which the inner reel is unfolded, and (b) is a front view in which the outer reel is unfolded. FIG. 30 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device in the line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 30 (a). It is a partially enlarged view of the decorative symbol display device in the range XXXV of FIG. 34. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member in the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). It is a front view of the segment display device. It is an exploded view of a segment display device. (A) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the second seg unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second seg unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the 2nd segment unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the 2nd segment unit. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd segment unit in the XLV-XLV line of FIG. 42 (a). It is a side view of a base member. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd segment unit in the XLVII-XLVII line of FIG. 42 (a). It is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of the displacement member, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of a displacement member. It is sectional drawing of the displacement member in line LIII-LIII of FIG. 51 (a). It is a front view of the displacement member. It is a front view of the segment display device and the decorative pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram of the segment display device and the decorative pattern display device. (A) to (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57 (a). (A) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57 (a). (A) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit in the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57 (a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rotating member in the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 66 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member in line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the annulus member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annulus member in the line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member in the line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit in the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 73 (a). (A) is a front view of the rotating member in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member. (A) to (c) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (A) to (c) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit in 8th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a winning opening unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit in 9th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a winning opening unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the displacement member in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of a displacement member. It is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit in the range XCI of FIG. 90. It is a schematic diagram of the vertical displacement unit in eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the XCVIb-XCVIb line of FIG. 96 (a). (A) is a perspective front view of the left wing member in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a perspective front view of the right wing member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a left wing member in line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 98 (a), and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 98 (b). It is sectional drawing of the right wing member in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the XCIXb-XCIXb line of FIG. 99. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the Cb-Cb line of FIG. 100 (a). (A) is a front view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a cross section of FIG. 101 (a) the first electric accessory and the drive unit 8530 in the CIb-CIb line. FIG. 3C is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit in the CIc-CIc line of FIG. 101 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit in the 17th embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a winning opening unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of a winning opening unit. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rotating member in the CVb-CVb line of FIG. 105 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the decorative symbol display device in 18th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a front view which developed the inner reel. It is a front view which developed the outer reel. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a reel display in a normal time in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during a time reduction. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery result during a time reduction in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents indicating the number of remaining time reductions. It is a figure which showed the display content during the production of the special reach 1 in the 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing the display content of the reel display during the production of the special reach 2 in the first control example, and (b) is the display content of the reel display when a big hit is established from the special reach 2. It is a figure shown. (A) is a diagram showing the display contents when the condition of the special reach 3 in the first control example is satisfied, and (b) shows the display contents of the reel stop display of the first variation of the special reach 3. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed the display content of the reel display of the 2nd variation of a special reach 3. It is a timing chart which showed the operation contents of various devices at the time of pseudo-continuous production in 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the various counters, the special symbol holding ball storage area, the special symbol holding ball execution area, and the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the set 1st hit type selection table, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the 2nd hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram set in the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the figure which showed the variation pattern table for a jackpot schematically, (c) is the figure which showed the variation pattern table for deviation (normal) schematically, and (d) is the variation pattern for deviation (probability variation). It is a figure which showed the table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example, and (b) shows the contents of RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram set in the fluctuation pattern selection table. , Is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for long variation. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a symbol operation table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a special effect scenario table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a symbol group storage area set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the reel operation confirmation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the state setting process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number display process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation control processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the outer reel control processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the inner reel control processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the displacement member control process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the normal stop symbol setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving stop symbol setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the audio output device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram of the electric structure of the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing various images created based on a drawing list. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the variable display layer 1 in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the variable display layer 2. It is a timing chart which showed the relationship between the BGM corresponding to the variation pattern A in the 2nd control example, and the stop sound. It is a timing chart which showed the relationship between the BGM corresponding to the variation pattern B in the 2nd control example, and the stop sound. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram set in the variation pattern selection table. , It is a figure which shows schematically the deviation pattern 2 table for deviation (probability variation). (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, and (b) shows the contents of RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the BGM type selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a figure which shows typically the contents of the stop sound selection table set in the ROM of. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio output device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio output device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the voice setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the display image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the second control example, and (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the interrupt process. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the BGM correction processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the audio setting process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the voice setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice output device in another example of 2nd control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIGS. 1 to 6
With reference to 3, as a first embodiment, the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply "pachinko machine").
An embodiment when applied to 10) will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. In the inner frame 4, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a are mounted on the game board 1.
A launch rail (not shown) or the like that guides the vehicle to the front region of 3 is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof.
And are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, the frame button 2
2 is provided. The frame button 22 is used, for example, when changing the mode of the effect displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 (see FIG. 2), or changing the effect content of the super reach. Manipulated by a person.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2)
The certificate stamp or the like attached to the pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 10
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the banknote, the ball is lent out according to the operation. Will be.
Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium).
As long as there is a balance on the card or the like, the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17. Return button 43
Is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period.
It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change of electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is formed on a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills for ball guidance, rails 76, 77, general winning openings 63, 1st
The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Will be. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.
The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape on the front surface of the game board 13.
Is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 77, similarly to the outer rail 77. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged, which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails.
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 76 (Fig. 2)
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the game board 13 to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. 1st
The symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. In addition, a plurality of L
The ED is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. The jackpot type determined here is the 15R probability variation jackpot,
4R probability variation jackpot and 15R normal jackpot are available. 1st symbol display device 37A, 3
In 7B, not only whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit is shown as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.
It is a big hit that shifts to a low-probability state and shortens the time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased and the second winning opening 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game that is neither probable nor shortened (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol has increased).

During probabilistic change or shortening of time, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning opening 14
The time for opening the first electric accessory 520 accompanying 0 is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is compared with the case where the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state (closed state).
It becomes easy for the ball to win a prize. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times that the first electric accessory 520 is opened is increased more than in the normal state. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change during the probability change or the time reduction, and the second winning opening 1
At least one of the time when the first electric accessory 520 attached to the 40 is opened and the number of times when the first electric accessory 520 is opened per time may be changed. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, or 1
The number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened at each hit may not be changed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than during normal times.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first winning opening 64 and a second winning opening 64.
The first symbol display device 37A, triggered by any winning (starting winning) of the winning opening 140,
The segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 that display the variation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in 37B, and the LED that displays the variation of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 of the present embodiment are the main control device 1.
While the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of 10 (see FIG. 4), the decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. And the displacement operation is performed. Instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, for example, a liquid crystal display may be used to display the game state.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 (second symbol (second symbol).
(Not shown)), a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined time. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. In addition, if the result of the winning lottery is not correct, the second symbol display device will display the change of the third symbol and then "
The symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is a first electric accessory 52 attached to the second winning opening 140 when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯”).
It is configured so that 0 is in the operating state (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 520 of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the first one for each hit that increases the hit probability.
If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the shortening of the time by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 520, the variation display of the second symbol is displayed. The time may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 520 may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second through gate 66
A lottery will be held to win the design. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and
If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.
If the result of the winning lottery is wrong, the symbol "x" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
37B, a part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In this embodiment, the first
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same, but the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out in the case of a prize is different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64. To 3 pieces
The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins a prize in the second prize opening 140 may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 520 is attached to the second winning opening 140. This first electric accessory 520
Is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, the first through gate 6
When the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through No. 6, the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state). Then, the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period.
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol of is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 520 is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 520 as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed").
), It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of a big hit lottery by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 and aim to become a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. The first electric accessory 520 is opened and the second winning opening 140 is won.
It is advantageous for the player to aim for the R probability variation jackpot.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). How to do "
It can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
When the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a jackpot, the first winning symbol is set so that the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 6 which is normally closed
5a is released for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis.
And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is the first out opening 7.
It is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through 1. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 1.
16 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100 ~
The 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). again,
A sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker,
It is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11 is provided.
No. 2 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3 are used by the MPU 201.
7A, 37B, display setting in the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, lottery of display results in the second symbol display device, and other main processes of the pachinko machine 10 are executed.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
It has a work area). The RAM 203 retains data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (backup).
All the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, and first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.
A solenoid consisting of a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory. 209 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 and a power supply device 1 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the like.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 has signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erasure signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is M, similarly to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. have. RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
Even after the power supply is cut off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) the data, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also has a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is configured to be input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the payout prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 is a ball launch unit 112 so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off ().
The firing solenoid is excited according to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that it is not operated), and the ball is launched with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. ..

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). Display control device 114 such as display) and notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 performed in the above. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 2
A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to 25, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines and determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110. The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800.
To change the mode displayed in, or to change the production content at the time of super reach,
Instruct the display control device 114. When the displayed mode is changed, the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 include information on the displayed mode after the change so that the decoration corresponding to the displayed mode can be displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The rear image change command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is a segment display device 60 from the display control device 114.
0 and a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 800 are received.
The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice corresponding to the display contents from the voice output device 226 according to the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 based on the display command received from the display control device 114. In addition, the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600, and the decorative symbol display device 800, and in the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113. It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby displaying the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 and the voice from the voice output device 226. It can be combined with the output.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (FIG. 3).
It has a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with (see). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
Various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20 that take in a voltage of 4 volts.
Generates 12 volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motor, etc., 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are generated. The required voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 uses the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
This is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the 201 and the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Power supply unit 2
In 51, even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is returned to the normal value for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interruption process. It is configured to maintain. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 shows the game board 1.
3 is an exploded perspective front view of 3. Note that FIG. 13 shows a state in which the winning opening unit 500 is disassembled from the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning opening unit 500 is formed by being partitioned by two rails 76 and 77 planted on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. It is inserted and arranged from the front side into the opening 13a formed below the region. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 500 will be described later.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9.
FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operating unit 300. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit 300. 8 and 9 are front views of the operating unit 300.

In FIG. 8, the displacement members 670 arranged in pairs on the upper and lower sides of the segment display device 600 are retracted on both the upper and lower sides. The state in which the displacement member 670 to be installed is projected to the upper and lower center positions is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 is a back case 40 formed in a box shape.
0 is provided, and the decorative symbol display device 800, the segment display device 600, and the decorative unit 700 are housed in the internal space of the back case 400.

The rear case 400 includes a bottom wall portion 401 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 402 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 401 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 401a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 401, and the segment display device 6 is formed through the opening 401a.
00 is arranged from the back side of the back case 400.

Three decorative design display devices 800 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the opening 401a of the bottom wall portion 401 of the back case 400. The decorative symbol display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that are rotationally displaced in the vertical direction, and is decorated on the outer peripheral surfaces of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the mode in which the symbol fluctuates (rotates). A detailed description of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described later.

The segment display device 600 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400, and is also arranged.
It is an embodiment in which the decorative pattern display device 800 is laid down. A predetermined gap is formed between the base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative symbol display device 800, and the decorative symbol display device 800 is arranged between the gaps from the player side. , The decorative pattern display device 800 is made visible.

Further, the segment display device 600 is provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) capable of being displaced in front of the gap between the facings of the base member 660 described above, and the displacement member 670 is used as a decorative symbol display device 800. By displacing it forward, it is possible to form an effect form in which the decorative symbol display device 800 is invisible from the player side. A detailed description of the segment display device 600 will be described later.

The decorative unit 700 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular box in front view, and is a segment display device 600.
A pair is arranged above and below. The decorative unit 700 is formed of a transparent resin material, and its shape is formed to imitate the logo, title, or the like of the pachinko machine 10. Further, an LED substrate that irradiates light is disposed inside the decorative unit 700, and is formed so that the player can irradiate the light.

Next, the winning opening unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29. First, the configuration of the winning opening unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13.

10 (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 10 (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500.
FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 13 shows the base member 510.
It is an exploded perspective view of the first electric accessory 520.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the winning opening unit 500 is arranged on the front surface of the game board 13 (
(See FIG. 5), a base member 510, a first electric accessory 520 rotatably supported inside the base member 510, and a drive for applying a driving force to the first electric accessory 520. It is mainly provided with a unit 530 and is formed.

The base member 510 includes a front base 511 arranged on the front side and the front base 511 thereof.
And the back base 512 which are arranged at a predetermined interval are fastened and formed.

The front base 511 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and is also formed of a transparent resin material. The front base 511 has a first projecting portion 511a projecting from the upper end portion of the central portion in the left-right direction toward the back surface, and a second projecting portion 5 projecting from the lower end portion toward the back surface side in the central portion in the left-right direction.
A third projecting from 11b and its second projecting portion 511b at a position separated by a predetermined gap in the left-right direction.
It is mainly provided with a protrusion 511c.

Also. The front surface of the front base 511 is arranged at a position where the player can see it, and a pattern is formed on the front surface side by unevenness.

In the first protruding portion 511a, the first electric accessory 520, which will be described later, is in a closed state (wing members 520L, 5).
A plate member for preventing the game ball from being thrown to the second winning opening 140 formed in the back base 512 when the tip of the 20R is located above the rotation axis (shaft member JB1). Is.

That is, the first protruding portion 511a is formed on the upper portion between the facing portions of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric accessory 520 and the first protruding portion 511a is the diameter of the game ball. Is set smaller than.

Further, the first protruding portion 511a is formed so that its upper surface is inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward both left and right end portions. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper portion of the first protrusion 511a can be rolled on the upper surface thereof and dropped (flowed down) downward.

The second protruding portion 511b is formed so as to project in a horizontally long rectangular shape from the back side of the front base 511, and the vertical position of the upper end surface thereof is below the bottom surface of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. Set. Further, the second protruding portion 511b includes a standing portion 511b1 standing in front of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 512, an engaging portion 511b2 protruding from the left and right ends of the standing portion 511b1, and a bottom surface portion. It is mainly provided with a recessed portion 511b3 which is recessed in the above.

Further, the second protruding portion 511b is provided with a base member 511f provided with an LED that irradiates light on the lower side of the standing portion 511b1. The LED of the base member 511f is arranged so as to irradiate light upward. Therefore, the LED can emit light around the second winning opening 140.

The standing portion 511b1 is formed so as to stand upward from the upper end of the second protruding portion 511b, and two standing portions are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the standing tips thereof are connected to each other. Further, the vertical portion 511b1 is formed so that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the second winning opening 140 (back side), and the vertical position of the end portion on the second winning opening 140 side is the second winning opening 140. It is set to the height that matches the bottom of. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 can be rolled to the second winning opening 140 side. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 is the second winning opening 1.
You can enter 40.

Further, the connecting portion of the standing portions 511b1 to be juxtaposed is formed in a shape in which the central position in the circumferential direction is recessed downward. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the standing part 511b1 is moved to the standing part 511.
It can be easily stayed at the center position in the left-right direction of b1. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning opening 140 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 from colliding with the game ball thrown later and being pushed out to the outside, and it is easy to insert the game ball into the second winning opening 140. can.

The engaging portion 511b2 is a portion that engages with the left and right wing members 520L and 520R described later, and is formed so as to project from both the left and right sides of the base end portion of the standing portion 511b1 toward the center of the shaft support portion 511d described later.

The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512. As a result, the recessed portion 511b3
A screw can be inserted into a through hole 511b4 formed through the side surface on the back surface side of the above.

The third protrusion 511c is a plate member for rolling a game ball on the first out opening 71 formed on the back base 512, and is formed at two positions on the back base 512 with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. 1 Out port 71 is formed adjacent to both outer sides in the left-right direction. In other words, the third protruding portion 511c is formed at a position separated in the left-right direction by the dimensions of the second protruding portion 511b and the first out port 71 in the left-right direction.

The bottom surface of the third protrusion 511c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the adjacent first out port 71 side (toward the center side in the left-right direction (FIG. 10 (a) left-right direction) of the front base 511). The lowermost position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first out port 71. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the third protrusion 511c can be rolled toward the first out port 71 and entered into the first out port 71.

The shaft support portion 511d is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the back surface side of the front base 511, and two shaft support portions 511d are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10A) with the standing portion 511b1 interposed therebetween. .. The inner diameter of the shaft support portion 511d is formed to be larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1 described later.
Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted inside the shaft support portion 511d.

The back base 512 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body having a larger front view shape than the front base 511 in front view. Therefore, the player can directly see the front surface of the back surface base 512 which does not overlap the front surface base 511 in the front-rear direction.

Also, since the front base 511 is formed of a transparent material, the front base 511 is forward.
In the portion where the two are overlapped, the rear base 512 can be visually recognized via the front base 511. Further, the player can visually recognize the game ball thrown between the rear base 512 and the front base 511 via the front base 511.

The rear base 512 is formed on both sides of the first winning opening 64 formed at the upper end portion on the front side, the second winning opening 140 formed below the first winning opening 64, and the second winning opening 140. The first out opening 71 to be formed and the general winning opening 63 formed above the first out opening 71 on the right side of the front view.
It is formed mainly with and.

The first winning opening 64 is recessed downward from the upper end of the front base 511 in the left-right direction (FIG. 10 (a) left-right direction) at a substantially central position, and protrudes in both front and rear directions along the recessed edge. It is formed. Further, the protruding tip on the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 10A) is closed by the plate member.

The concave shape of the first winning opening 64 is formed in a size that allows a game ball to be inserted inside, and is also formed.
Its bottom surface (inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side. As a result, the game ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13.

The second winning opening 140 is formed through the first winning opening 64 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 10A). The second winning opening 140 is formed through a square shape having a size larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front view. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 through the second winning opening 140. Further, the second winning opening 140 includes recesses 140a recessed on the left and right inner side surfaces.

The recess 140a is curved around the axis of the shaft hole 512a and is recessed. As a result, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, can be accommodated inside the protrusions 523L and 523R. That is, the inside of the second winning opening 140 is in a state where the game ball can pass through and the protrusions 523L and 523R are inserted.

The shaft holes 512a are recessed from the front to the back on both the left and right sides of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. The shaft hole 512a is a groove for inserting the shaft member JB1 described later into the inside.
It is formed in a circular shape having a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

The first out opening 71 is formed through the left and right sides of the second winning opening 140. 1st out port 7
Reference numeral 1 denotes a hole for collecting the game ball flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13, which is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view and whose width dimension in the vertical direction (short direction) is the game ball. Is set larger than the diameter of. Further, the bottom surface (inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) of the first out port 71 is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first out port 71 is used as the game board 1.
The ball can be thrown to the back side of 3.

The first out port 71 is formed with a guide wall 512b that is connected to the bottom surface and projects to the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area on its upper surface and throwing it to the first out port 71, and the upper surface thereof is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side.

Further, on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b, a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged side by side. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall 512b from being damaged when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b.

The front base 511 and the back base 512 are fastened by the above-mentioned through hole 511b4 and the fastening hole 512c formed through the back base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, with the front base 511 and the back base 512 combined in the front-rear direction, a screwdriver is inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, and the screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c via the through hole 511b4. Can be done by

The first electric accessory 520 is a left wing member 520L arranged on the left side of the front view of the second winning opening 140.
And the right wing member 520R arranged on the right side in the front view are formed as one unit.

The left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R have bulging portions 524L and 524R, which will be described later.
The left wing member 520L is only explained except for the bulging portions 524L and 524R, because the other members are formed symmetrically with the second winning opening 140 in between. A detailed description of the member 520R will be omitted.

Further, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are in the first state (closed state) in which the corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is located above in the direction of gravity by the driving of the solenoid 531 of the drive unit 530 described later. The corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L can be displaced in the second state (open state) in which the corner portion is displaced outward in the left-right direction of the second winning opening 140, and the first state is specified unless otherwise specified. It shall be explained. Further, in the first state, the opposite side surfaces of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R will be described with reference numerals of the side surfaces 526L and 526R.

The left wing member 520L is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view, and is formed in a size larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the gravity direction, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a recess from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back surface. A protrusion 523L projecting to the side and a through hole 5
A recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the 21L side, and a side surface 526L.
It is mainly provided with a bulging portion 524L protruding from the bulge and a shaft member JB1 inserted into the through hole 521L. A detailed description of the bulging portion 524L will be described later.

The shaft member JB1 is a columnar rod member formed of a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, respectively, and has a through hole 521L.
It is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of.

Further, the shaft member JB1 is formed so that the length in the axial direction is substantially the same as or slightly shorter than the separation distance from the concave tip surface of the shaft hole 512a to the back surface side of the front base 511. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, one end of the shaft member JB1 (rear base 51).
The shaft member JB1 is inserted into the front base 511 and the back base by inserting the other side (the end on the front base 511 side) inside the shaft support portion 511d while inserting the end portion on the second side into the inside of the shaft hole 512a. It can be held between 512.

The left wing member 520L has dimensions in the front-rear direction of the front base 511 and the back base 512.
It is set smaller than the distance dimension between facing and. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, the wing member 520L can be rotatably held between the front base 511 and the back base 512 by inserting the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L. ..

The recess 522L is formed by being recessed from the front side around the axis of the through hole 521L, and the recessing dimension is set to be smaller than the protrusion distance of the shaft support portion 511d. Further, the distance dimension from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner peripheral surface is set larger than the radial dimension of the outer peripheral surface from the axis of the shaft support portion 511d.

Therefore, when the wing member 520L is arranged between the front base 511 and the back base 512, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the wing member 520L and the back surface of the front base 511 from touching each other, and the wing member 520L and the front surface. The grounding portion with the base 511 is divided into the recess 522L and the shaft support portion 5.
It can be 11d. Therefore, the wing member 520L and the front base 511 can be partially grounded. As a result, when the wing member 520L is rotated by the drive of the solenoid 531 described later, the resistance acting on the wing member 520L can be reduced to facilitate the rotation of the wing member 520L.

Further, since the shaft support portion 511d can be accommodated inside the recess 522L, the front base 5 can be accommodated.
The distance dimension between the facing 11 and the back base 512 can be reduced. As a result, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the winning opening unit 500 can be reduced.

Here, conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which the shaft member JB1 is internally fitted in the through hole 521L of the wing member 520L.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to fit the shaft member JB1 in the through hole 521L,
When the wing member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing the parts. Therefore, there is a problem that the parts cost becomes high.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shaft member JB1 has a through hole 5 formed in the wing member 520L.
It is only inserted inside the 21L, and the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 can be arranged separately in the winning opening unit 500. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, the wing member 520L can be the only replacement part. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in component cost.

Further, as described above, the front base 511 can be fastened to the back base 512 from the front side of the front base 511. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, the rear base 512 to the front base 5 are attached to the game board 13 with the winning opening unit 500 attached.
11 can be removed. As a result, the parts of the wing member 520L can be easily replaced.

That is, when the front base 511 is removed from the back side of the back base 512, the game board 1
Where it is necessary to remove the front base 511 from the back base 512 after removing the winning opening unit 500 from 3, the front base 511 is formed to be removable from the front side, so that the front base 511 can be easily removed. be able to. As a result, the parts of the wing member 520L can be easily replaced.

Here, if the front base 511 is made removable from the front side of the back base 512, the heads of the screws and the like for fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be visually recognized from the player side (front side), and the player can see them. By visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512, the player's interest may be impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front base 511 and the back base 512 are fastened using the space of the recessed portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511. That is, by inserting the driver diagonally into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, the through hole 5 is inserted.
A screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c via 11b4. Therefore, through hole 511
Even when the front base 511 is located on the front side of the b4, the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be fastened by inserting the driver diagonally into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the heads of the screws and the like that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be made difficult to see from the player side (front side). As a result, the player has a front base 511 and a back base 512.
By visually recognizing the head of the screw that fastens the screw, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Further, normally, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600 that can be visually recognized through the opening formed in the central portion of the game board 13 are set at the height of the player's line of sight. Therefore, the winning opening unit 500 is arranged below the line-of-sight height of the player. As a result, the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be made difficult to see from the player side, and the player can visually recognize the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512. Can be suppressed from being impaired.

Since the front base 511 is formed of a transparent resin material, the head of the screw can be visually recognized via the front base 511, but as described above, the front base 511 also has irregularities on the front side. Since the pattern is formed, light can be emitted in other directions depending on the thickness of the plate. This makes it possible to blur the head of the screw that is visible through the front base 511. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Next, the drive unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. Figure 1
4 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. 15 (a) and 15 (b) are shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b).
It is a side view of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. 16 (a) and 16 (FIG. 16 (a)
b) is a front view of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520.

15 (a) and 16 (a) show a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, and FIGS. 15 (b) and 16 (b) show the first electric motor. The state in which the accessory 520 is located in the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531 and a solenoid 5 thereof.
The first case member 534 in which the sliding member 532 connected to 31 and the rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, and the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are arranged in a displaceable state inside. And a second case member 536 attached to the back surface side of the first case member 534 are mainly provided.

The solenoid 531 has a main body portion 531a having an electric wire inside and generating an electromagnetic force when electric power is passed through the electric wire, a movable body 531b slidably arranged inside the main body portion, and the movable body thereof. It is mainly provided with an engaging portion 531c attached to the tip portion of the above.

The main body portion 531a is formed in a prismatic shape that is long in the front-rear direction, and an electric wire is arranged inside. A recess is formed on the front side of the main body 531a to be recessed on the back side, and a movable body 531b formed in a columnar shape is disposed inside the recess.

The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can slide on the back surface side (inside of the main body portion 531a) by applying electric power to the electric wire of the main body portion 531a to generate an electromagnetic force.

The engaging portion 531c is attached to the end portion of the movable body 531b opposite to the main body portion 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed in a disk shape having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b, and its axis is arranged so as to be substantially in line with the axis of the movable body 531b.

The engaging portion 531c is inserted into the engaging groove 532a2 of the sliding member 532, which will be described later. As a result, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 15A) with the displacement of the movable body 531b.

The sliding member 532 is formed in a substantially E-shape when viewed from above, and is a connecting portion 5 extending in the left-right direction.
Two first protrusions 532 projecting from the left and right ends of 32a and its connecting portion 532a to the front side.
It is formed mainly including b and a second protrusion 532c which is located between the two first protrusions 532b and is projected on the front side.

The sliding member 532 is formed so that the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension between facing each other in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral surface of the first case member 534, which will be described later. This will result in
The sliding member 532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534.

The connecting portion 532a is formed on both sides of the base end of the second protrusion 532c, the recess 532a1 recessed on the back surface side, the engaging groove 532a2 connected to the front side of the recess 532a1 and recessed from the upper surface side. It is mainly provided with a notch portion 532a3 to be formed.

As described above, the recess 532a1 has the engaging portion 5 of the solenoid 531 in the engaging groove 532a2.
It is a recess that prevents the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a when the 31c is inserted. That is, the concave portion 532a1 is formed in an arc shape whose concave surface is larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. As a result, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531
Can be prevented from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a.

The engaging groove 532a2 is formed by being connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the recessing depth in the gravity direction from the upper surface side is set to be larger than the diameter of the engaging portion 531c. Further, in the engaging groove 532a2, the width dimension in the left-right direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the engaging portion 531c, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as or engaged with the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the engaging portion 531c. The portion 531c is formed to be larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the engagement groove 532a
The engaging portion 531c can be inserted inside 2.

The cut portion 532a3 is a cut for making it easy for the sliding member 532 to be elastically deformed when the first protrusion 532b described later is connected to the rotating member 533, and the second protrusion 53 is as described above.
It is formed on both the left and right sides of the base end of 2c, and is notched toward the back surface side.

The first protrusion 532b includes an engagement hole 532d formed through the first protrusion 532b in the left-right direction. Engagement hole 53
The 2d is formed in a long hole shape long in the front-rear direction, and is recessed downward in the gravity direction from the first opening 532d1 recessed downward in the gravity direction from the end portion on the front side and the end portion on the back surface side. 2nd opening 53
It is formed mainly with 2d2. A detailed description of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be described later.

The engagement hole 532d is set so that the vertical width dimension in the central portion in the front-rear direction (the portion other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is larger than the vertical width dimension of the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 described later. Will be done. As a result, the protrusion 5 is formed inside the engagement hole 532d.
33b can be placed.

As described above, the second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b and is formed so as to project from the front side. Further, the second projection 532c includes an erection wall 532c1 that is erected downward on the tip end side opposite to the connecting portion 532a. The standing wall 532c1
Will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 533 is a plate-shaped body formed in a substantially L-shape in the side view, and is separated by a predetermined width in the left-right direction.
The two are arranged side by side, and the facing portions on one end side are connected by the connecting portion 533a. The gap between the two plates of the rotating member 533 facing each other is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the facing surfaces of the outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between the facing surfaces inside the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. To. As a result, the rotating member 533 can be arranged between the facing portions of the first projection 532b of the sliding member 532.

The rotating member 533 has a rotating shaft 533 that protrudes from the bent portion having a substantially L-shaped side view to both sides in the left-right direction.
Mainly c, a protrusion 533b protruding from the end on one end side of the side view substantially L-shape to both sides in the left-right direction, and a drive portion 533d formed by being recessed at the tip on the other end side of the side view substantially L-shape. Formed in preparation for.

The rotary shaft 533c is formed so as to project on both the left and right outer sides of the rotary member 533, and the distance dimension of the projecting tip surfaces separated from each other is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Further, the protruding dimension of the rotating shaft 533c is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Therefore, by accepting the rotary shaft 533c inside the recess 534a of the first case member 534, which will be described later, and assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534, the rotary member 533 can be attached to the first case member 534 and the first case member 534. 2 Can be held in a rotatable state with respect to the case member 535.

The protrusions 533b are formed so as to project on both the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance dimension between the protruding tip surfaces thereof is the distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. It is set to be almost the same as the dimensions. Further, the protruding dimension of the protrusion 533b is set to be larger than the width dimension of the first protrusion 532b in the left-right direction. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 533b into the engagement hole 532d of the first protrusion 532b, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected to each other.

The connection between the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be performed by elastically deforming the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the space between the two first protrusions 532b. can. In this case, as described above, since the notch portion 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, it is possible to easily widen the space between the two first protrusions 532b facing each other. As a result, it is possible to easily connect the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532.

Further, the distance dimension between the facing surfaces of the inner side surfaces of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction is the first.
Approximately the same as the distance dimension between the outer surfaces of the protrusions 532b facing each other, or the first protrusion 532
It is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension between the outer surfaces of b facing each other. As a result, when the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are arranged inside the first case member 534, it is possible to prevent the first protrusion 532b from elastically deforming outward in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 from being disconnected from each other.

The drive unit 533d is formed so as to be recessed from the front side to the back side. Drive unit 533d
Can accommodate the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing member 520L inside. That is, the drive unit 533
d is set to a dimension larger in the vertical direction than the protrusions 523L and 523R. Drive unit 533
By accommodating the protrusions 523L and 523R in d, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced in the first state and the second state according to the displacement of the drive unit 533d. The first electric accessory 52
A detailed description of the displacement of 0 will be described later.

The first case member 534 is formed in a substantially square front view with an open interior, and is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction. The lower side of the back surface side of the first case member 534 is formed with a notch, and the second case member 535 can be arranged in the notch portion.

The first case member 534 is mainly provided with a recess 534a recessed on the front side in a notch portion on the back surface side and an erection portion 534b erected on the bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

As described above, the recess 534a is a recess for accommodating the rotary shaft 533c of the rotary member 533, and is recessed in a shape larger than the diameter of the rotary shaft 533c. Therefore, the rotation axis 53
By assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 with the 3c housed inside, the rotating member 533 can be arranged inside the first case member 534.

The upright portion 534b is formed so that the lower inner peripheral surface of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512 and the upright tip surface thereof are set to the same height, and are extended to the back side and inclined downward. Will be done.
As a result, in a state where the drive unit 530 is arranged on the back surface of the rear base 512, the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 is rolled on the upper surface of the upright portion 534b, and the second case member 5
You can throw the ball to 35.

The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view and has a predetermined thickness on the back surface side. The second case member 535 has a through hole 535a formed through the second case member 535 in the vertical direction.
To prepare for.

The through hole 535a has an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball, and as described above, the through hole 5 allows the game ball thrown into the second case member 535 by rolling with the upper part of the upright portion 534b.
The ball can be thrown downward via 35a. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the game area and entered the second winning opening 140 can be collected.

Next, the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 16A, in the state where the first electric accessory 520 is positioned in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is arranged around the movable body 531b. At the same time, it is projected to the front side (left side in FIG. 15A) by the urging force of the urging spring (not shown) interposed between the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a.

In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is on the back side (second opening 53) of the engaging hole 532d.
It is located on the 2d2 side). Further, in the rotating member 533, the position of the center of gravity in the side view is positioned between the driving unit 533d and the rotating shaft 533c. That is, the rotating member 533 has a rotating shaft 53.
It is assumed that a rotational force in the direction of pushing down the drive unit 533d is always applied around the axis of 3c.

Therefore, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is on the back side (second opening 533) of the engaging hole 532d.
Even in the state of being positioned on the d2 side), the second opening 533d2 can be stagnant at the upper part without being guided to the inside (lower side of the engagement hole 532d (lower side in FIG. 15A)).

Further, since the drive unit 533d is pushed down, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R housed inside the drive unit 533d are pushed down. As a result, the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are in a state where the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are located above the through holes 521L and 521R (first state (see FIG. 16A)). To.

As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16B, when electric power is applied to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531 the movable body 531b becomes the main body 53 due to the electromagnetic force generated in the main body 531a.
It is drawn inside 1a.

Therefore, with the displacement of the movable body 531b, the sliding member 532 connected to the tip end side of the movable body 531b is slid and displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 15B). As described above, the rotating member 533 is in a state in which a rotational force in the direction of pushing down the drive unit 533d is always applied around the axis of the rotating shaft 533c. Therefore, the engaging hole 532d of the sliding member 532d. The protrusion 533b housed inside the second opening 533d2 is slid inside the protrusion 533b without being caught in the base end portion of the second opening 533d2.

The protrusion 533b sliding inside the second opening 533d2 abuts on the front end (first opening 532d1 side) of the engagement hole 532d at the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, and abuts on the back side (FIG. 15). (B) Displaced to the right). In this case, since the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the axis of the rotation shaft 533c, the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

Further, since the rotating member 533 rotates around the axis of the rotating shaft 533c, the drive unit 533d can be displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 15B). As a result, the wing member 520L has a through hole 521L,
It is rotated around the axis of 521R, and the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are displaced outward to the left and right (second state (see FIG. 16B)).

On the other hand, the displacement from the second state to the first state is performed by cutting off the supply of electric power to the main body portion 531a of the solenoid 531. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body portion 531a disappears, so that the electromagnetic force is arranged around the movable body 531b, and the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a are arranged.
Due to the urging force of the urging spring (not shown) interposed between the movable body 531b, the movable body 531b is on the front side (FIG. 1).
5 (a) Overhangs on the left side). As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the position of the first state.

As described above, since the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b, the recessing depth of the first opening 532d1 toward the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 15B) is large. It is formed deeply toward the back side (right side in FIG. 15B).

As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 is made to collide with the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b is displaced in the direction of gravity. Can be easily displaced to.

Next, the operation of the second protrusion 532c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 (a)
And FIG. 17 (b) shows the winning opening unit 50 in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. 10 (a).
It is sectional drawing of 0. In addition, in FIG. 17A, the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is positioned in the first state, and in FIG. 17B, the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is positioned in the second state is shown. ..

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the first state, the distant corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are the first protruding portions 511a. Placed in the vicinity. As a result, in the first state of the first electric accessory 520, the left and right wing members 5
It is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down between the 20L and 520R facing each other.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is a movable body 531 from the inside of the main body portion 531a.
It is assumed that b is in an overhanging state. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 17A). That is, the erection wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is arranged in the vicinity of the second winning opening 140.

In this case, the erection tip of the erection wall 532c1 (the end of the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17A)).
The distance dimension L1 from to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, even if the first electric accessory 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is in a state of protruding forward, the game ball can flow in between the left and right wing members 520L and 520R. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning opening 140 and rolling. That is, the sliding member 5 is a game ball that rolls on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534.
The rolling of the game ball can be stopped by colliding with the vertical wall 532c1 of 32. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the store side is disadvantaged even if the player continues to play the game.

In the present embodiment, the sensor device SE1 for detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the flow path of the game ball of the second case member 535. Therefore, in order to detect that the game ball has passed through the inside of the second winning opening 140, it is necessary to roll the game ball to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the game ball inside the first case member 534, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 140.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state, the distant corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are from the first state. Is also separated from the first protrusion 511a, and the separated distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball.
As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area can be moved to the side surfaces 52 of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R.
It can be received by 6L, 526R and transferred to the second winning opening 140. That is, the first
When the electric accessory 520 is put into the second state, it is possible to easily insert the game ball into the second winning opening 140.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 has a movable body 531b inside the main body portion 531a.
Is in a retracted state. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 17B). That is, the erection wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is arranged at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

In this case, the erection tip of the erection wall 532c1 (the end of the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17B)).
The distance dimension L2 from to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is
It is set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the left and right wing members 520L,
By displacing the 520R, it is possible to easily enter the game ball flowing down the game area into the second winning opening 140, and the game ball entered into the second winning opening 140 is formed in the first case member 534. The displacement 534b can be rolled and thrown to the second case member 535.

Further, since the displacement direction of the erection wall 532c1 can slide and displace the erection wall 532c1 in a direction substantially coincide with the rolling direction of the game ball entering the second winning opening 140, the wing member 520L, When the 520R is damaged (or by fraudulent activity) and opened, the erection wall 53
It is possible to prevent the game ball that has been stopped by colliding with 2c1 from being pushed out to the side opposite to the rolling direction due to the displacement of the erection wall 532c1. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is changed to the solenoid 53.
It is possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged at the second winning opening 140 when the game ball is opened by the drive of 1 and the game ball can be entered into the second winning opening 140. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the inside of the second winning opening.

Then, referring to FIGS. 18 and 19, the first electric accessory 520 is caused by a player's fraudulent act.
The case of being displaced from the first state to the second state will be described. 18 (a) and 18 (b) are front views of the winning opening unit 500. 19 (a) and 19 (b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.

In addition, in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the front base 51 is used for easy understanding.
1 is shown transparently. Further, FIG. 19 (a) illustrates the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state, and FIG. 19 (b) shows the case where only the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state. The state of is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state only by the player's fraudulent act (goto act). The protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are the second openings 53 of the engagement hole 532d.
Displaced inside 2d2. That is, since a space is formed in which the protrusions 523L and 523R can be displaced, it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from being damaged when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly displaced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 20 (a) and 11 (b), the displacement of the erection portion 523c1 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced due to the fraudulent act of the player will be described. FIG. 20 (a)
18A is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in the line XXa-XXa of FIG. 18A, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in the line XXb-XXb of FIG. 18B. ..

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the urging action of the player, the solenoid of the drive unit 530 is used. 531
And the position of the sliding member 532 is not displaced, and only the first electric accessory 520 and the rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

As described above, when the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, the erection wall 532c
The distance dimension L1 from the vertical tip of 1 (the end of the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20A)) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is the game ball. It is set smaller than the diameter.

Here, conventionally, a second winning opening 140 formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members 520L, 520R arranged sandwiching the second winning opening 140, and a pair of wing members thereof. 5
Driving means (solenoid 531) that applies driving force to 20L and 520R to open or close
) And the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), a pair of wing members 520L, 520.
When R is opened, it is arranged at an allowable position that allows the ball to enter the second winning opening 140, and when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531). A gaming machine provided with a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning opening 140 is known.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so that the displacement is not regulated.
For example, since the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be forcibly released from the outside and then the regulating means can be displaced from the regulated position to the allowable position, the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning opening 140. There was a problem that the effect of regulating was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the erection wall 532 is in a state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are open from the outside.
Since the arrangement of c1 is formed so as to be sustainable at the restricted position, it is possible to prevent the erection wall 532c1 from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning opening 140.

That is, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or the pair of wing members 520L.
, 520R is open from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to operate the erection wall 532c.
The distance dimension L3 from the standing tip of 1 (the end of the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20B)) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is the game ball. It is set smaller than the diameter. Therefore, the first electric accessory 520 is the second winning opening 140 due to the fraudulent act of the player.
Even if the game ball can be thrown to the inside, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning opening 140 and rolling. Therefore, the game ball that rolls the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the upright wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532 to stop the rolling of the game ball. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (the game ball can be thrown to the second winning opening 140) due to the fraudulent act of the player, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning opening 140. It can be easier to regulate the entry of balls.

Further, in this case, since the standing wall 532c1 that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the second one. No separate member is required to prevent unauthorized entry into the winning opening 140.
Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to the fraudulent act of the player, the case where the second protrusion 532c is further pushed toward the back side will be described. .. 21 (a) and 21 (b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 22 (a) shows the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIa of FIG. 21 (a).
22 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIb of FIG. 21 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the front side (FIG. 22 (a)) is inside the second opening 532d2.
) A protrusion 532d3 protruding from the inner surface of the left side) is formed. Further, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is formed with a notch 533b1 formed by cutting an outer peripheral surface in a side view.

The protrusion 532d3 and the notch 533b1 are formed so that their outer diameters correspond to each other. That is, the protruding shape of the protrusion 532d3 in the side view and the cut shape of the cutout portion 533b1 are substantially the same.

Therefore, the erection wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed toward the back side from the state where only the first electric accessory 520 shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 22 (a) is in the second state due to fraudulent activity. Then, the protrusion 532d3 is housed inside the notch 533b1, and the displacement to the back surface side of the erection wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is restricted. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to the fraudulent act of the player, the game ball is entered into the second winning opening 140, and the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534b. It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown by rolling.

Further, in the present embodiment, one surface of the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the back surface (see FIG. 22A). As a result, the protrusion 532d3 becomes the notch 5
When inserted inside the 33b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be prevented from coming out of the notch 533b1.

That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the back side, the upright wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further placed on the back side in a state where the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the notch portion 532b1. The direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the protrusion 532d3 and the notch portion 532b1 when the force for pushing into the protrusion 532d3 can be set to the direction in which the protrusion 532d3 enters the inside of the notch portion 532b1. Therefore, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be prevented from coming out of the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to the fraudulent act of the player, the game ball becomes the second state.
It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the winning opening 140 and rolling the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 to be thrown.

In other words, the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) is applied to the pair of wing members 520L, 52.
A transmission mechanism for transmitting to 0R is provided, and the transmission mechanism has an open slide position (position shown in FIG. 17 (b)) and a closed slide position (position shown in FIG. 17 (a)) by the driving force of the driving means (displacement 531). A pair of wing members 520L, 5 that are rotated to the open rotation position due to the slide displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position of the sliding member 532 that is slid and displaced between the two.
The erection wall 532c1 is provided with a rotating member 533 that opens the 20R and is rotated to the closed rotation position by the slide displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closed slide position to close the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. Arranged in 532, when the sliding member 532 is slid and displaced to the open slide position, the erection wall 532c1 is arranged in the allowable position, and when the sliding member 532 is slid and displaced to the closed slide position, the erection wall is placed. When the rotating member 533 is arranged in the open rotating position while the 532c1 is arranged in the regulated position and the sliding member 532 is arranged in the closed slide position, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged with each other. As a result, the slide displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is restricted, so that the game ball is the second winning opening 14.
It is possible to easily regulate the illegal entry of a ball to 0.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members 520L and 520R are illegally forcibly released from the outside, the rotating member 533 rotates to the open rotating position with the sliding member 532 arranged at the closed slide position. Will be done. In such a state, the sliding member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged with each other, so that the slide displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is restricted.
The regulatory means can be maintained in the regulated position (the regulatory means can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly released from the outside and the game ball is passed between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R.
It is possible to regulate the entry of such a game ball into the second winning opening 140 by a regulatory means.

Further, an engaging hole 532d is extended to one of the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533, a protrusion 533b is projected from the other, and the protrusion 533b is slid along the engaging hole 532d to slide. The slide displacement of the member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engaging hole 532d to restrict the slide displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to lift the regulation while trying to reduce the size.

That is, a means for regulating the slide displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position by using the engaging hole 532d and the protrusion 533b for transmitting the slide displacement of the sliding member 532 to the rotating member 533 and rotating the sliding member 532. Since it can be formed and it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by adopting a structure in which the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engaging hole 532d, unauthorized access to the engaging portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the regulation (engagement) is released by that amount. It can be difficult.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portions 52 of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R.
4L and 524R will be described in detail. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and FIG. 23B is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. 24 (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 24 (b) is XXIVb-XXI of FIG. 24 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 500 in Vb line.

In addition, in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), the left-right direction when viewed is reversed between FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). Further, in FIG. 24A, the front base 511 is shown transparently. Further, in FIG. 24 (b), the transparent front base 511 in FIG. 24 (a) is shown as opaque. Further, in FIG. 24 (b), the side surfaces 526L and 526R
The rolling direction of the game ball that rolls is shown by a two-dot chain line together with the reference numeral of the virtual line KS1. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end portion on the through hole 521L side and is formed on the front side (arrow F in FIG. 24B).
It is formed in a row on the end face of the side). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed at the end portion on the through hole 521R side and on the back surface side (FIG. 24 (b)).
It is formed continuously on the end face of the arrow B side).

That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 24B).

Further, on the side surfaces 526L and 526R, a first region continuous from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R is formed, and the size is such that the game ball guided through the first region is not abutted. The bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed, and the side surfaces 526L and 5 of one of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) are formed.
The first region of 26R and the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other wing member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. Arranged in different positions in the direction.

Further, in the bulging portion 524L, the end portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is on the front side (FIG. 24 (b)).
It is formed so as to be inclined toward the through hole 521L side from the lower side) to the back side (upper side in FIG. 24B). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R is formed so that the end portion on the far side from the through hole 521R is inclined toward the through hole 521R side from the back surface side to the front side.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, the side surfaces 526 of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R.
The case where the game ball is thrown to L, 526R will be described. 25 (a) and 25 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. 26 (a) and 26 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

25 (a), 25 (b), 26 (a) and 26 (b) are shown in FIG. 24 (b).
Corresponds to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in. In addition, FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b).
), The transition state of the game ball when the game ball is thrown from both sides of the first electric accessory 520 is shown in order. In FIGS. 26A and 26B, the transition state of the game ball when the game ball is thrown only to the left wing member 520L is shown in order.

As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), when the game balls are thrown on both sides of the first electric accessory 520, the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are rolled. The game ball can be rolled into different positions in the front-rear direction by the bulging portions 524L and 524R.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed by being connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is rolled to the back side by rolling the side surface 526L while in contact with the bulging portion 524L.

In this case, the bulging portion 524L has an end portion on the far side from the through hole 521L on the front side (FIG. 25 (FIG. 25).
b) Since it is formed so as to be inclined toward the through hole 521L side from the lower side) to the back side side (upper side in FIG. 25B), when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulging portion 524L. It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to an increase in resistance in the rolling direction.

On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is formed by being connected to the end face on the back surface side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is rolled to the front side by rolling the side surface 526R while in contact with the bulging portion 524R.

In this case, the bulging portion 524R has an end portion on the far side from the through hole 521R on the back surface side (FIG. 25 (FIG. 25).
b) Since it is formed so as to be inclined toward the through hole 521R side from the upper side) to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25B), when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R comes into contact with the bulging portion 524R. It is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to an increase in resistance in the rolling direction.

Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the left wing member 520L side can be moved toward the back side, while the game ball that rolls on the right wing member 520R side can be moved toward the front side. As a result, when the game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on.

Here, conventionally, a ball entry port (second winning opening 140) formed so that the game ball can enter, and a guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) for guiding the game ball are provided and displaced at the entry port. A gaming machine equipped with a guide member (first electric accessory 520) formed so as to be possible is known. As the guide member, for example, a pair of wing members (wing members 520L, 520R) having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entry port, arranged with the ball entry port in between, and rotatably supported on the base end side. ) Is exemplified.

Further, a first groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L or 520R), and the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) of the other wing member is provided. Disclosed is a technique for providing a second groove on the entire surface of the above. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions from each other, the guide surface (side surface 526L, 52) on one of the wing members (either of the wing members 520L and 520R)
Even when the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) of the 6R) and one of the wing members (either of the wing members 520L and 520R), the game balls are different from each other. It can be biased in the direction (one is on the glass plate side and the other is on the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140.

However, the above-mentioned conventional technique has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. Further, the game ball that has entered from one side of the guide member (either one of the wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surface 526L and 526R) and passes through the other side of the guide member (the other side of the guide member (side surface 526L, 526R).
It may pass through either the wing member 520L or 520R), in this case.
Since the game ball is not entered into the entrance (second prize opening 140), there is a problem that the interest of the player is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is a pair of bulging portions that are projected from the side surfaces 526L and 526R and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball that rolls on the side surfaces 526L and 526R. 524L, 524R are provided, and a pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R are provided on the side surface 526L.
, 526 Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the 526R, the game balls guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L and 526R are bulged 524L and 524.
By bringing it into contact with R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entry port.

Further, the pair of bulging portions 524L and 524R are arranged at different positions along the side surfaces 526L and 526R in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided, whereby the pair of wing members 52.
A game ball that has entered from one side of 0L, 520R can be brought into contact with the bulging portion 524L, 524R. Therefore, one side of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (wing members 520L, 520R)
A game ball that has entered from either of the two) has a pair of wing members 520L and 520R (wing members 52).
It is possible to suppress passing through (either 0L or 520R). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by allowing the game ball to enter the entrance.

Further, the first electric accessory 520 is formed as a pair of wing members 520L and 520R arranged so as to sandwich the second winning opening 140 and whose base end side is rotatably supported by a shaft, and the pair of bulging portions 524L.
The 524R is projected from the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, respectively, and the bulging portions 524L and 524R and the other wing in one of the wing members 520L and 520R of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. The bulging portion 52 in the members 520L and 520R
Since the 4L and 524R are arranged at different positions along the side surfaces 526L and 526R in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided, the game ball guided (rolled) on the side surface 526L and 526R can be used. By contacting the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably deflected. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140, and the ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, the bulging portions 524L and 524R of one wing member 520L and 520R and the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the other wing member 520L and 520R are side surfaces 526L and 526.
One of the wing members 520L is arranged at a different position in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along R (the direction from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R).
, The game ball that has entered the side surface 526L, 526R in 520R is the other wing member 520L,
When the side surfaces 5.26L and 526R of the 520R are reached, the game ball can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the other wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L and 526R of one wing member 520L and 520R from passing through the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other wing member.
As a result, the game ball can be entered into the second winning opening 140 to improve the interest of the player.

In other words, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction on the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, the game balls rolled from the left and right are rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction. Can be moved. Therefore, when the game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on. As a result, it is possible to suppress the time required for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140.

That is, by setting the collision positions of the game balls to different positions in the front-rear direction on the left and right, FIG. 25 (b).
), The game ball on the left side moved to the back side is on the back side due to the collision (FIG. 25 (FIG. 25).
b) It becomes easy to bounce to the upper side). On the other hand, the game ball on the right side brought closer to the front side tends to bounce back to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25B) due to the collision.

Therefore, one of the game balls (in the present embodiment, which rolls the left wing member 520L) can be easily entered into the second winning opening 140, and the other game ball is bounced back to the front side to cause a collision. At that time, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being too far from the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to accelerate the entry of the second game ball into the second winning opening 140, which is to enter the second winning opening 140 later. As a result, when the game balls are thrown on both the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 520, the time required for the game balls on both sides to enter the second winning opening 140 can be shortened, and the progress of the game can be smoothed. You can proceed.

Further, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are projected from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at a position closer to the base end side (through hole 521 side) than the tip end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L and 526R. It is possible to secure a rollable area before the game ball to be rolled comes into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball by that amount and smoothly enter the second winning opening 140.

Further, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are projected from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, so that the bulging portions 524L and 5
It is possible to prevent the course of the game ball that has been deflected in contact with the 24R from returning to the path before the deviation until it reaches the front of the entrance (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the side surfaces 526L and 526R to the ball entry port while the game ball is in a deviated state.

Further, as described above, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed with a first region continuous from the tip end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, and do not abut on the game ball guided through the first region. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed with such a size, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed.
When the game ball that has entered the first area rolls in the first region, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140.

In this case, one of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (wing member 520L,
The first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R on either side of 520R) and the other wing member (
Since the first region of the side surface 526L, 526R on the wing member 520L, 520R, whichever is the other) is arranged at a different position along the side surface 526L, 526R in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided. , One wing member (either wing member 520L or 520R)
First region of the side surface 526L, 526R and the other wing member (wing member 520L, 52)
Even when the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) in the first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R on either of the 0Rs), the game balls can be biased in different directions. 2 The ball can be smoothly entered into the winning opening 140.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the left and right wing members 520L and 520R
When the game ball is thrown to either one, the other left and right wing members 520L, 520R
By bringing the game ball into contact with the bulging portion 524L or the bulging portion 524R, the game ball is prevented from rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other left and right wing members 520L and 520R and falling from the tip thereof. can.

More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed by being connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is rolled to the back side by rolling the side surface 526L while in contact with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be brought closer to the bulging portion 524R side formed on the right wing member 520R.

In other words, the bulging portions 524L, 524 formed on the left and right wing members 520L, 520R.
Since R is formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520
A game ball that rolls either one of R toward the second winning opening side is a left wing member 520L or a right wing member 5.
It can be rolled (closed) to a position that coincides with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on either one of the 20Rs in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled (closed) to the back side and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. It can be a position. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball is rolled (closed) to the front side and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. It can be a position.

As a result, when the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on either the side surface 526L or the side surface 526R is high, the game ball is the side surface 52 of the other left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R.
It is possible to suppress riding on 6L and 526R.

Here, the conventional winning opening unit 500 is the side surface 526L, 526 of the first electric accessory 520.
Since R is formed on a smooth surface, a game ball thrown from one of the first electric accessory 520 rides on the other wing member 520L, 520R, and flows down from the tip of the other wing member 520L, 520R. There was a problem that the ball was thrown to.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction in the first electric accessory 520, the game ball rolled from one of the wing members is formed. It can be rolled to a position that substantially coincides with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the other wing member in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by colliding the game ball rolling on one wing member 520L, 520R with the bulging portion 524L, 524R of the other wing member 520L, 520R, the game ball collides with the side surface 526L of the other wing member 520L, 520R. Riding on 526R, wing member 520L, 5
It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown from the tip of the 20R to the game area.

Next, the recessed portion 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. 27 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27 (a). 28 (a) and 28 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 27 (b). In addition, in FIG. 28A, the first electric accessory 520
Is the first state, and in FIG. 28 (b), the states in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portions 511b2 formed on the second protruding portion 511b of the front base 511 are recessed portions 525L and 52 of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, respectively.
It is placed inside the 5R.

Further, in the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portions 525L and 525R have bulging portions 524L.
, 524R (side surface 526L, 526R) side end is in contact (see FIG. 28A), and in the second state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portion 525L, 525R bulge. 524
It is assumed that the L, 524R (side surface 526L, 526R) side and the opposite end are in contact with each other.

That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 is brought into contact with the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R. By doing so, the amount of displacement can be regulated.

Further, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through holes 521L and 521R causes the corners of the wing members 520L and 520R far from the through holes 521L and 521R to move to the second winning opening 140 side due to their own weight. It is considered to be the direction of rotation. Therefore, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portion 525L
, 525R's bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side ends are brought into contact with each other, so that the wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed from rotating by their own weight, and the wing members 520L, 520R can be formed. It can be held in the first state.

Further, in the first state, the recessed portion 525L and the swelling portion 524L of the engaging portion 511b2 are provided.
, 524R (side surface 526L, 526R) side end abuts, so wing member 520L, 5
The side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the 20R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Therefore, since the rigidity of the abutting portion can be increased by the amount of the bulging portions 524L and 524R being formed, it is possible to prevent the wing members 520L and 520R from being damaged by abutting with the engaging portion 511b2.

That is, in the present embodiment, the base member 5 that rotatably supports the wing members 520L and 520R.
The base member 510 includes an engaging portion 511b2 that regulates the rotation of the wing member 520L and 520R by abutting on the wing member 520L and 520R, and the base member 5 thereof.
Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the wing members 520L and 520R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of 10, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. That is, the bulging portion 524L, 5
Since the 24R is a portion projecting from the wing members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R), the portion of the wing members 520L and 520R where the rigidity is relatively high is the base member 51.
Since it can be used as a stopper for contacting the engaging portion 511b2 of 0, the wing member 52 is correspondingly increased.
Damage to 0L and 520R can be suppressed.

Further, the side surface of the bulging portion 524L, 524R is formed substantially flush with the side surface on the proximal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, and in the closed state, the lateral surface is substantially flush with the side surface on the proximal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R. The side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed in one are at least the base member 510.
Since it is in contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the portion (side surface of the bulging portion 524L, 524R) far from the rotation shaft (through hole 521L, 521R) is the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510.
The reaction force input from the engaging portion 511b2 to the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced by the amount that can be brought into contact with the blade member 511b2. Therefore, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. Further, for example, the protruding tip surface of the bulging portions 524L and 524R is engaged with the engaging portion 511 of the base member 510.
Compared with the case where the base member 510 is brought into contact with b2, the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is placed in the second winning opening 1.
It can be separated from 40, and a space serving as a flow path to the second winning opening 140 can be secured. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the side surfaces of the wing members 520L and 520R on the proximal end side may also be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced to further suppress damage to the blade members 520L and 520R.

In the state where the wing members 520L and 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are arranged below the standing portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (below FIG. 28A).
In other words, the upright portion 511b1 is arranged between the bulging portions 524L and 524R facing each other.

Here, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are arranged at positions where the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the bulging portions 524L and 524R are projected from the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the bulging portion 52 is prevented from sandwiching the game ball between the bulging portions 524L and 524R.
It becomes necessary to arrange the pair of wing members 520L and 520R further apart by the height of the protrusions of 4L and 524R, and the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L and 520R increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the erected portion 511b1 located between the bulging portions 524L and 524R in the closed state is provided, and the pair of wing members 520L and 520R have the bulging portion 524L in the direction of rotation axis. , The facing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the region where 524R is not formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the bulging portions 524L and 524R is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

That is, even if the pair of wing members 520L and 520R start to close (even if the transition to the closed state is started) while the game ball is guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the bulging portion 524
By locating the upright portion 511b1 between the facing portions of L and 524R, the game ball can be expanded to the bulging portion 524L,
It is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the bulging portions 524L and 524R by discharging from the opposite space of the 524R. The game ball discharged from the facing space of the bulging portions 524L and 524R by the standing portion 511b1 has side surfaces 526L and 5 in the region where the bulging portions 524L and 524R are not formed.
When the 26R is located between the facing spaces, the facing distance at such a position is larger than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball is not pinched (see FIG. 27 (a)). As a result, the facing distance between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for the arrangement of the conventional product in which the bulging portions 524L and 524R are not projected on the side surfaces 526L and 526R.

On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 521L 521R is such that the corner portion of the wing members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R rotates downward in the direction of gravity due to its own weight. Will be done. Therefore, the engaging portion 511b2 and the recessed portions 525L and 525R
By abutting the bulging portion 524L, 524R (side surface 526L, 526R) side and the opposite end portion, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the wing members 520L, 520R by its own weight, and the wing members 520L, 520R. Can be held in the second state.

Therefore, the drive unit 533d and the protrusion 5 described above for restricting the displacement of the wing members 520L and 520R.
Since it can be performed at a location other than 23L and 523R, the drive unit 533d and the protrusion 523L
, 523R can be prevented from being damaged. Therefore, the rotating member 533 can be downsized because it is not necessary to form a large part in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533. As a result, the drive unit 530 can be miniaturized.

Further, in the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is located below the lower end of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the gravity direction and is located above the lower end of the second winning opening 140 in the gravity direction. The game ball guided by the 526R can be thrown to the upper surface of the upright portion 511b1 and can be entered into the second winning opening 140 by rolling the upper surface of the upright portion 511b1 (FIG. 28 (b). )reference).

Further, as described above, the second projecting portion 511b is on the wing member 520L, 520R side (second).
A base member 511f provided with an LED that irradiates light is arranged on the winning opening 140 side). FIG. 28
As shown in (a), in the first state, the recessed portions 525L and 525R are located on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 511f is used as the wing members 520L and 520R.
It can be easily incident on the inside of.

That is, by irradiating the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R with the light of the LED, the wing member 5
It is possible to suppress the reflection of the LED light on the outer surface of the 20L and 520R. As a result, light can be easily incident on the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, the wing member 520L, 52
It is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the inside of 0R to the player side. As a result, the wing members 520L and 520R can be easily visually recognized by the player even through the front base 511 formed from the amount of the transparent material.

Further, when the wing members 520L and 520R are in the second state shown in FIG. 28B, the recessed portions 525L and 525R are positioned substantially the same in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R. .. Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning opening 140 by the LED of the base member 511f.

That is, the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are positioned at substantially the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R, so that the gap between the facing portions of the first electric accessory 520 can be increased. .. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning opening is used as the base member 511.
The LED of f makes it easier to irradiate. As a result, the player can easily see the game ball entered in the second winning opening 140 even through the front base 511 formed of the transparent material.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, an arrangement mode of the winning opening unit 500 on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the range XXIX of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, the winning opening unit 500 is arranged with a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76.

Inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76, a first out port 71 for collecting a game ball flowing down a conventional game area is formed. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 is curved with a curvature larger than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to facilitate the gathering of game balls.
6a is formed.

Therefore, the winning opening unit 500 and the inner rail 76 are connected to the lower end portion of the inner reel (curved portion 76).
The gap is increased in the portion where a is formed). As mentioned above, the winning opening unit 5
The front base 511 and the back base 512 of 00 are fastened by inserting a screwdriver or the like diagonally into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511.

The through hole 511b4 is formed in the second protruding portion 511b formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the front base 511. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 is above the curved portion 76a (upper part of FIG. 29).
Can be located in. Therefore, when a driver or the like is diagonally inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511, the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved portion 76a
Since the gap between the two can be used, the front base 511 and the back base 51 can be used from the front side of the game board 13.
It can be easily attached and detached from 2.

Further, since the inside of the recessed portion 511b3 can be made difficult to see from the player by the inner rail 76, the player can visually recognize the screw or the like for fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Next, the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36.

First, the configuration of the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. 30 (a) is a front view of the decorative symbol display device 800, and FIG. 30 (b) is FIG. 30.
It is sectional drawing of the decorative symbol display apparatus 800 in the line XXXXb-XXXb of (a). FIG. 31
Is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative symbol display device 800, and FIG. 32 is a decorative symbol display device 80.
It is an exploded perspective rear view of 0. FIG. 33A is a front view of the inner reel 811 unfolded.
FIG. 33B is a front view of the outer reel 821 unfolded.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative symbol display device 800 includes a rotatably configured inner reel unit 810, an outer reel unit 820 that houses a part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. And the accommodation unit 880 that internally accommodates the outer reel unit 820, the drive motor KM1 that is attached to the accommodation unit 880 and rotationally drives the inner reel unit 810, and the outer reel unit 82 that is attached to the accommodation unit 880.
It is mainly provided with a drive motor KM2 for rotationally driving 0 and a backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel unit 810.

The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 arranged on one end side (left side in FIG. 30A) of the opening of the inner reel 811, and an inner reel 811. It is formed with an annular member 813 disposed on the other end side of the opening (right side in FIG. 30A).

The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a strip-shaped sheet made of a transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33A, the inner reel 811 has decorative symbols arranged at equal intervals with the longitudinal direction oriented vertically. It should be noted that each of the three inner reels 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 arranged side by side has a different arrangement of decorative symbols.

The rotating member 812 connects the hub 812a formed in a substantially disk shape, the rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape having a diameter larger than that of the hub 812a, and the outer peripheral surface of the hub 812a and the inner peripheral surface of the rim 812b. It is mainly provided with spokes 812c to be formed.

The hub 812a and the rim 812b have their respective axes formed in the same linear shape and are arranged at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spokes 812c are formed so as to be inclined in the axial direction toward the radial outer side of the hub 812a.

The rim 812b is a portion to which one end side of the inner reel 811 is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner reel 811. In other words, the circumferential distance dimension of the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812b is set to be substantially the same as the longitudinal dimension of the unfolded inner reel 811. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be arranged (attached) on the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without a gap.

The hub 812a is arranged inside the inner reel 811. That is, the hub 812a and the rim 81.
The spokes 812c connecting the 2b and the spokes 812c are formed so as to be inclined toward the other end of the opening of the inner reel 811 (the annular member 813 described later) toward the inner side in the radial direction. This will result in
The hub 812a can be arranged inside the inner reel 811. Also, spokes 812c
Is formed of a plurality of rods extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a and comprises an inner opening 812c1 that opens between adjacent spokes 812c in the circumferential direction.

The position of the hub 812a in the axial direction is substantially the same as the center position in the left-right direction of the inner reel 811. As a result, it is possible to secure a space on the ring member 813 side of the hub 812a. A drive motor KM1 that applies a rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810 is connected to the hub 812a.

In the drive motor KM1, the thickness dimension of the inner reel 811 in the axial direction is substantially half of the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. As described above, the hub 812a has a position in the axial direction substantially the same as the center position in the left-right direction of the inner reel 811 and is located on the inner portion of the opening of the inner reel 811 on the other end (annular member 813) side. Since a space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be arranged inside the inner reel 811. As a result, the inner reel unit 81
The dimensions of 0 and the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

Further, in the drive motor KM1, a rotating shaft is arranged in a straight line coaxial with the shaft of the hub 812a.
That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As mentioned above
Since the shaft of the hub 812a and the shaft of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the drive motor K
By the rotation of M1, the inner reel 811 can be rotated about the axis of the inner reel 811. As a result, the pattern decorated on the inner reel 811 can be visually recognized by the player as a mode of being displaced in the vertical direction.

The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape having substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the rim 812b. The inner peripheral surface of the annular member 813 on the other end side (right side in FIG. 30A) of the opening of the inner reel 811 is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.

Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed from a transparent resin sheet as described above,
The rigidity is relatively low. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it may be deformed by the centrifugal force of the rotation, wind pressure, or the like, and the player may not be able to accurately recognize the pattern decorated around the reel unit 810.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inner reel 811 has a rim 81 of a rotating member 812 on one end side.
Since 2b is connected and the annular member 813 is connected to the other end side, when the inner reel unit 810 rotates, it is less likely to be displaced due to its centrifugal force or wind pressure. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, the player can accurately recognize the pattern decorated around the inner reel 811.

Further, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from the sheet, the inner reel 81 can be formed by that amount.
The load of 1 can be reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor KM1 when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally driven can be reduced. As a result, the rotation start of the inner reel unit 810 can be made smooth.

The outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape and an outer reel 82 thereof.
Spokes 82 that connect the hub 823 formed in a disk shape with a diameter smaller than 1 to the inner peripheral surface on one end side (left side in FIG. 30A) of the opening of the outer reel 821 and the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.
It is formed mainly with 2.

The outer reel 821 is formed so that the inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the inner reel 811 and the width dimension in the axial direction is larger than the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. Further, the inner reel 811 is formed of a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. A design is decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811, and a description of the decoration mode will be described later.

The axis of the hub 823 is arranged coaxially with the outer reel 821, and the outer reel 821 is arranged.
It is located approximately in the center of the axis. Further, a drive motor KM2 that applies a rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820 is connected to the hub 823.

The spoke 822 is formed so as to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the radial outer side of the hub 823, whereby one end side of the opening of the spoke 822 and the outer reel 821 (FIG. 3).
A space can be formed between 0 (a) and the left side). Further, the spoke 822 is the hub 8.
It is formed of a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from 23 to the edge 824, and includes an opening 822a that opens between the spokes 822 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction.

In the drive motor KM2, the thickness dimension of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction is substantially half of the axial dimension of the outer reel 821. As mentioned above, the hub 823 is positioned in the axial direction.
Since the position is substantially the same as the center of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction and a space is formed on one end (left in the left-right direction of FIG. 30A) of the opening of the outer reel 821, most of the drive motor KM2 is located on the outer reel 821. It can be arranged inside the reel. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the left-right direction (axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

The accommodating unit 880 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the front side, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be accommodated therein. The accommodation unit 880 has an upper wall portion 8 arranged at the edge between the pair of left and right side wall portions 881 and the facing portions of the pair of side wall portions 881.
It is mainly provided with 82, a lower wall portion 883 and a back wall portion 884.

The side wall portion 881 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular side view, is formed larger than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the vertical direction (FIG. 30 (a) vertical direction), and is formed in the front-rear direction (FIG. 30 (b)). It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the left-right direction).

On the side wall portion 881, a drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 is disposed on the right side (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 30A), and is arranged on the right side in front view (FIG. 30 (FIG. 30)).
a) A drive motor KM1 for driving the inner reel unit 810 is arranged on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the right side). That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are
It is rotationally displaced with respect to the side wall portion 881.

Further, the side wall portion 881 is provided with a bulging portion 881a that bulges in a curved shape corresponding to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 on the side surface on the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the backlight unit 830, which will be described later, from escaping from the left and right outside of the reel 811.

Further, the side wall portion 881 is formed of a metal material. As a result, the rigidity of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. Further, since it is generally formed of a metal material having higher thermal conductivity than a resin material, heat generated inside the accommodation unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the accommodation unit 880. As a result, heat accumulates inside the containment unit 880, which causes heat to accumulate.
It is possible to prevent the parts from breaking.

The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are plate members forming the upper and lower side surfaces of the accommodating unit 880, and the edge portion and the lower portion (FIG. 30 (b)) of the upper portion (upper portion of FIG. 30 (b)) of the side wall portion 881. It is arranged along the edge of the lower part).

The width dimension of the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion in the left-right direction (FIG. 30 (a) left-right direction) is formed smaller than the width dimension in the left-right direction (axial direction) of the outer reel 821. As a result, the distance dimension between the facing portions of the side wall portions 881 can be secured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be arranged between the facing portions.

Further, the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are formed with a plurality of through holes penetrating in the radial direction with respect to the axis of the outer reel 821. This makes it possible to increase the air flow between the inside and the outside of the accommodation unit 880. As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of heat inside the accommodating unit 880, and it is possible to suppress the damage of parts due to the heat of the accommodating unit 880.

The back wall portion 884 is a plate member forming a side surface on the back side of the accommodating unit 880, and is arranged along the edge portion on the back side (right side in FIG. 30B) of the side wall portion 881.

The back wall portion 884 has an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position intersecting the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30B), and both left and right end portions where the opening 884a is formed. It is formed with an upright portion 884b that is bent and erected on the front side.

The opening 884a is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 30 (a) left-right direction) is larger than the width dimension in the axial direction of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer reel 821 from colliding with the back wall portion 884 when it moves (sways) in the front-rear direction due to the inertial force or vibration of the rotational movement.

That is, when the outer reel 821 operates (sways) in the front-rear direction due to the inertial force or vibration of the rotational operation, a part of the rear side (right side of FIG. 30B) of the outer reel 821 is opened 884a. Can be inserted inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer reel 821 from colliding with the back wall portion 884.

Further, the opening 884a can increase the air flow between the inside and the outside of the accommodation unit 880. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from staying inside the accommodation unit 880, and it is possible to suppress damage to parts due to the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

Here, an opening 884 in the back wall portion 884 that is larger than the width of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction.
When a is formed, the rigidity of the back wall portions 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a is lowered. Therefore, there is a risk that the back wall portion 884 may bend.

Further, in this case, it is conceivable to increase the rigidity of the back wall portions 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a by increasing the facing distance between the side wall portions 881, but by increasing the facing distance, it is possible to increase the rigidity.
There is a problem that the unit itself of the decorative pattern display device 800 becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upright portions 884b are formed on both the left and right sides of the back wall portion 884 at the position where the opening 884a is formed. As a result, the rigidity of the back wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back wall portion 884 from bending.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back wall portion 884 is formed of a metal material, and the distance dimension from the left and right end portions of the opening 884a to the left and right end portions of the back wall portion 884 is sufficiently reduced. Therefore, the deformation rate of the plastic deformation when forming the left and right ends of the back wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, the rigidity can be increased.

The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from the inside of the inner reel 811 in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the design of the inner reel 811, and is arranged inside the front surface of the inner reel 811.

The backlight unit 830 is formed in a side view arc shape, and the axis of the arc is the inner reel 8.
It is arranged coaxially with the axis of 11. Further, the width dimension of the backlight unit 830 in the axial direction is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the inner reel 811 in the axial direction.

Further, the length dimension L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to be three lengths of the design to be decorated on the inner reel 811 described later.

Further, the backlight unit 830 has a recess 831 recessed inward in the radial direction on the outer peripheral surface.
Are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction. Therefore, a partition plate 832 is formed between the recesses 831 so as to stand on the radial outer side of the backlight unit 830.

A base member 833 including an LED that irradiates light is disposed on the inner side surface of each recess 831 in the radial direction, and the LED can irradiate light toward the outer side in the radial direction of the backlight unit 830.

Electric power can be independently supplied to each base member 833, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, since each base member 833 is arranged in a region surrounded by four sides (recessed portion 831), the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 is incident on the region in front of the other base member 833. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the inner reel 811 partially emit light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be described. FIG. 33 (a) is a front view of the inner reel 811 developed, and FIG. 33 (b) shows.
Is an unfolded front view of the outer reel 821.

As shown in FIG. 33A, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the inner reel 811 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). As described above, the dimension L5 in the circumferential direction of the symbol 1 is set to one-third of the length dimension L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 (L5 × 3 = L4).

Further, the inner reel 811 is made of a material capable of transmitting light as a whole. In particular, the light transmittance of the symbol portion (for example, the display of "7") is higher than that of the margin portion around the symbol portion. Therefore, the LED of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811
By irradiating the light from the inside reel 811, the light of the LED can be transmitted to make the part of the design stand out. Therefore, if the LED of the backlight unit 830 is set to emit light, the inner reel 811 does not have to be irradiated with the outer light (the light in the store or the light of another LED arranged in the pachinko machine 10). The design can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, 10 symbols of 5 types are continuously drawn in the circumferential direction, and the segment display device 600, which will be described later, makes it possible for the player to visually recognize at most 3 symbols. As described above, each decorative symbol display device 800 is decorated with symbols having different arrangements, so that the player can visually recognize a maximum of nine symbols.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3 x 3 symbols on the inner reel 811 to set a total of 5 effective lines for big hits, 3 in parallel in the horizontal direction and 2 in the diagonal direction. Will be done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three "7" symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines, it is possible to teach the player that a big hit state has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the outer reel 821 includes a non-decorative surface 821a that is not decorated and a non-transmissive surface 821b that is decorated so as not to transmit light.

The non-decorative surface 821a is made capable of transmitting light by not being decorated. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (in this embodiment, a transparent resin material), a non-decorative surface 821a that allows light to pass through is formed. The non-decorative surface 821a may be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and may be, for example, provided with a translucent decoration capable of transmitting light.

The decorative design display device 800 rotates the outer reel unit 820 to rotate the non-decorative surface 821a.
Is directed toward the player, so that the player can visually recognize the design of the inner reel 811 arranged inside the outer reel 821. That is, the player can visually recognize the design of the inner reel 811 through the non-decorative surface 821a of the outer reel 821.

The non-transmissive surface 821b is made non-transmissive by applying a black decoration to the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 33 (b)). Further, the non-transmissive surface 821b is formed so that the length in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33B) is equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display three symbols of the inner reel 811 on the player side. Therefore, the length of the non-transmissive surface 821b in the circumferential direction is set to be equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, so that the outer reel unit 820 is rotated to rotate the outer reel 82.
By arranging the non-transparent surface of No. 1 on the player side, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side.

The length of the non-transmissive surface 821b in the circumferential direction is the design 3 decorated on the inner reel 811.
It is not limited to one or more, and it is sufficient that a circumferential length is formed so that the decoration of the inner reel 811 cannot be visually recognized from the player side. That is, it is sufficient that the non-transmissive surface 821b is formed by the circumferential length of the inner reel 811 that can be visually recognized from the player side.

Further, the non-transmissive surface 821b includes a transmission region 821b1 capable of partially transmitting light, and a symbol 821b2 decorated with a symbol.

The transmission region 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 33) in the front view. The transmission region 821b1 is a portion for displaying 7 segments by being combined with the segment display device 600 described later, and the light transmitted through the inner reel 811 can be partially transmitted to the player side. As a result, a part of the 7-segment display described later can be formed.

The symbol 821b2 is formed to have three circumferential lengths of the symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811, and the outer reels so that the three symbols 821b2 of each decorative symbol display device 800 are aligned in parallel in the horizontal direction. By stopping the 821, it is possible to teach the player the occurrence of the jackpot state.

Further, as described above, since the periphery of the symbol 821b2 is opaque, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to stop the symbol of the inner reel 811 on the effective line while producing an effect in which three symbols of the symbol 821b2 are aligned. Therefore, the outer reel 8
The rotation effect of 21 allows the player to gaze at the outer reel 821 and then gaze at the inner reel 811 almost at the same time as the effect of the outer reel 821 ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Then, referring to FIGS. 34 to 36, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 8
20 will be described. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 in the line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 30 (a). FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative symbol display device 800 in the range XXXV of FIG. 34. 36 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and FIG. 36 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 812 in the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG. 36 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. Further, a predetermined space is provided between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge portion 824 protruding in the radial direction toward one end side (left side in FIG. 34) of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820. A gap is formed.

The hub 812a of the rotating member 812 is formed with a protrusion 812a1 projecting toward the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, they are formed on an extension of the spokes 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a chevron shape whose both sides are inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the protrusions 812a1.

Here, conventionally, the first reel (outer reel unit 820) that is rotatably formed and the first reel (outer reel unit 820)
It is provided with a second reel (inner reel unit 810) which is arranged substantially concentrically inside the first reel (outer reel unit 820) and is rotatably formed (that is, has a double reel structure). ) A game machine is known. Further, a technique is also known in which a rotating brush is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and the rotating member is driven by the rotation of the reel to remove dust adhering to the display surface of the reel for cleaning. There is.

However, the double reel structure has a problem that cleaning is difficult. That is,
In the double reel structure, a space for arranging the above-mentioned rotary brush is secured between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)). Therefore, it is not possible to clean the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel and the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel).

That is, since the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is narrowly formed, a decorative symbol is displayed in order to remove dust that has invaded and stuck to the facing space. It is difficult to clean because the device 800 needs to be disassembled.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 can push out air to generate wind when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated. The extruded air (wind) collides with the edge portion 824 of the outer reel 821 facing each other, and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In this case, the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other is narrower than the space on the inner peripheral side of the edge portion 824 and the hub 812a, so that the air is narrowed to the edge portion. 824
The space can be made to flow from the space on the inner peripheral side of the hub 812a to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the present embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 is formed in a cylindrical shape.
1 and an edge portion 824 protruding inward in the radial direction from one axial side of the outer reel 821 are provided.
The inner reel unit 810 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the inner reel 811 whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at predetermined intervals and the inner reel 811 are stretched radially inward from one side in the axial direction. It is provided with a hub 812a whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the edge portion 824 at a predetermined interval, and a protrusion 812a is provided from the outer surface of the hub 812a toward the inner surface of the edge portion 824.
Since 1 is erected, wind pressure is generated by the protrusion 812a1 being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 is used by using the wind pressure. Air can flow between the inner reel 811 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. As a result, dust can be removed by the flow of air, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

Here, if an opening is formed in at least one of the edge portion 824 or the hub 812a, or if a part in the circumferential direction is partially divided, the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a are separated from each other. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes from the opening portion and the divided portion, so that the wind pressure weakens and the air flows between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 by that amount. It becomes difficult to make it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the edge portion 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape in the axial direction and have a surface continuous in the circumferential direction, the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a are formed. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be easily flowed by that amount. As a result, a protrusion 81 is formed between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a.
The wind pressure generated by the displacement of 2a1 in the circumferential direction can be used to facilitate the flow of air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Further, the protrusion 812a1 partially narrows the distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820 in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811. Therefore, the protrusion 812a1 can easily change the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate wind by utilizing the change in atmospheric pressure, and the wind is allowed to flow between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 to flow the wind into the facing surface of the inner reel 811. Dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

To explain in detail, air has the property of flowing from a high pressure to a low pressure side, and the protrusion 812a
By narrowing the space between the protruding tip of 1 and the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820, the atmospheric pressure can be partially increased. Therefore, the inner reel 811 is less likely to change in atmospheric pressure.
The air pressure in the space between the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 facing each other is lower than the air pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As a result, air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, and dust is suppressed from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. can.

Further, since the atmospheric pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the opposite edge portion 824 can be increased, the protrusion 812a1 is displaced (wobbles) toward the edge portion 824 or the edge portion 824 is displaced toward the protrusion 812a1 side. It can be suppressed.

Further, the spokes 822 that support the edge portion 824 and the spokes 81 that support the hub 812a.
Since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in 2c, the air between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is sent to the outside through the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1. It can be exhausted (or air can be taken in from the outside between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a). That is, the flow resistance of the air can be reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be easily flowed (outflow or inflow) by that amount. As a result, the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 are brought together by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the vertical portion between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a in the circumferential direction. The air between them can be easily flowed.

Further, a protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a (the crotch is the edge 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820), and the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) are provided. Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed in the reel, the effect of reducing the flow resistance by sucking (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825 can be easily exerted. That is, when rotating one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 on which the protrusion 812a1 is erected, the other side on which the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 is formed is stopped. , The resistance of air flow (exhaust or intake) through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

The outer reel 821 is formed so as to be slightly inclined outward in the radial direction (diameter is expanded) from the edge portion 824 (one end) side to which the spoke 822 is connected toward the other end side. Therefore, it is possible to easily send the air flowing from one end side to the other end side between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped, and dust is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. Can be suppressed from sticking.

Further, the inclination angle θ1 from the axis of the inner reel 811 of the spoke 812c to the outside in the radial direction is made larger than the inclination angle θ2 from the axis of the outer reel 821 of the spoke 822 to the outside in the radial direction.
θ1> θ2). Therefore, the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 face outward in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 34) when they are rotationally displaced in a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) overlapping in the axial direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 34). The dimensions in between are increased.

Therefore, by rotationally displacement one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 are due to the difference in the distance between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 facing each other. It is possible to easily generate a wind toward the opposite side of the inner peripheral surface of the reel.

More specifically, the distance between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 facing each other is increased toward the radial outer side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to the positions where they overlap in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is higher between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the radial inner portion of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Be raised.

As mentioned above, air has the property of flowing from a high atmospheric pressure to a low atmospheric pressure side. Therefore, it is possible to form an air flow from the radial inner portion to the radial outer portion. That is, it is possible to form an air flow from the shaft side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the opposite side between the hub 812a and the edge portion 824. Therefore, air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Further, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed with light transmission, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. The player can visually recognize the fluctuation of the symbol due to the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 via the outer reel unit 820. In this case, the inner reel unit 810
The protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the above, that is, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 whose rotation speed is higher than that of the outer reel unit 820. In the effect of rotating the unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

The timing for cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 by rotating the inner reel unit 810 is not operated by the player (the game ball is not launched into the game area). , It is preferable to perform this when the pachinko machine 10 is put into a standby state. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at high speed in order to generate wind, the player's interest can be attracted by switching the design of the inner reel 811.

Further, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while the non-transmissive surface 821b of the outer reel 821 is rotationally displaced toward the player. In this case, since the inner reel 811 is invisible to the player, the cleaning can be performed without making the player visually recognize the cleaning state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. Further, since the game can be performed in the gaming state, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned even when the game is continuously performed for a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from accumulating on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 63.
First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L arranged on the left side of the front view, a vertical displacement unit 600R arranged on the right side of the front view, and the like.
Vertical displacement unit 600C arranged between the left and right vertical displacement units 600L and 600R
And are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and are formed by fastening and fixing the connecting member 601 from the back surface side.

Since the configurations of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R are almost the same, the vertical displacement units 600C, 600R will be described below by explaining only the vertical displacement unit 600L arranged on the left side of the front view. Detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.
39 (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39 (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

It should be noted that FIGS. 40 and 41 show an aspect in which the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable and a first segment unit 6 arranged on the left and right sides of the displacement unit 650.
10 and a second segment unit 620 are provided.

The first seg unit 610 is a unit capable of displaying one seg in the left-right direction, and the second seg unit 620 is a unit capable of displaying two segs in the left-right direction. be. Further, since the first segment unit 610 is formed only by halving the second segment unit 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below.
The reference numerals in the configuration of the second segment unit 620 are similarly assigned to the first segment unit 610.

Each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R is formed with different arrangements of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620, and the vertical displacement unit 61 is formed.
In 0C, the second segment unit 620 is arranged only on the right side when viewed from the front, and the vertical displacement unit 610 is provided.
In R, the second segment unit 620 is arranged in the view on the right side of the front view.

Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one seg display on the left side of the front view and two seg displays on the right side of the front view. Further, the vertical displacement unit 600C is
Two segs can be displayed only on the right side of the front view. Further, the vertical displacement unit 600
L can display one segment only on the right side of the front view. That is, one segment can be formed on both the left and right sides of each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R.

Next, the second segment unit 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG. 42 (
a) is a front view of the second seg unit 620, and FIG. 42 (b) is a second seg unit 6
It is a rear view of 20. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, FIG. 4
4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmitting member 621 arranged on the front side, a partition member 622 arranged on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, and a partition member 622. Mainly includes a plurality of diffusion members 623 disposed on the back surface of the above, a base member 624 disposed between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and reflection members 625 disposed on both sides of the base member 624. Is formed.

The light transmitting member 621 is formed of a translucent light transmitting resin material that allows light to pass through the inside. The light transmitting member 621 is mainly provided with a light transmitting portion 621a formed in the shape of a plate of an arc convex on the front side, and a flat surface portion 621b formed in a row above and below the light transmitting portion 621a. To.

The light transmitting portion 621a has an erection wall 621a1 erected on the back side from the left and right ends, a fastening portion 621a2 protruding from the upper and lower ends in an annular shape to the back side, and a vertical direction at the center position on the front side. It is mainly provided with a decorative portion 621a3 which is continuously recessed on the back surface side.

The upright wall 621a1 is formed so as to stand upright from the left and right ends of the light transmitting portion 621a to the back surface side. The dimension between the vertical walls 621a1 facing each other is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the partition member 622 described later in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back surface side of the light transmitting portion 621a, it is possible to restrict the partition member 622 from moving left and right.

The fastening portion 621a2 is a protrusion that forms a hole for fastening the reflective member 625, which will be described later, with a screw, and is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the back surface side of the light transmitting portion 621a. Therefore, the fastening portion 621a2
The reflective member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of the screw to the inner edge portion of the above.

As described above, the decorative portion 621a3 is continuously recessed in the vertical direction at the center position on the left and right of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light transmitted through the left side of the front view from reflecting inside the decorative portion 621a3 and being emitted from the right side of the front view. A detailed description of the light transmitted through the decorative portion 621a3 will be described later.

The flat surface portion 621b is a plate member for fastening to the base member 660 of the displacement unit 650 described later. The flat surface portion 621b is formed in a plate-like body having substantially the same front view shape as the base member 660, and the displacement unit 650 and the second segment unit 620 are fastened by fastening screws via the flat surface portion 621b. can do.

Further, an elastic piece 621b1 projecting to the opposite side is formed on the flat surface portion 621b. The elastic pieces 621b1 are formed so as to project from the opposite side surfaces of the flat surface portions 621b formed in pairs of upper and lower surfaces, and also project in a curved shape that is convex toward the front side. Further, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape having a radius smaller than that of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the protruding tip thereof is the displacement unit 65.
It is an embodiment that abuts on the upper wall portion 882 or the lower wall portion 883 of the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the zero. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative symbol display device 800 from vibrating when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven.

The partition member 622 is formed of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is formed in a curved plate state in a side view. In the partition member 622, the radius of the curved outer peripheral surface is the light transmitting portion 6.
It is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of 21a, and the width in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42) is set to be smaller than the width in the vertical direction of the light transmitting portion 621a. Therefore, the partition member 622 can be arranged in a state where the outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a.

Further, the partition member 622 is recessed toward the center from the left and right (left and right in FIG. 42) both end faces and the first recessed portion 622a recessed toward the center and the upper and lower (upper and lower in FIG. 42) end faces toward the center. It is mainly provided with a second recessed portion 622b to be provided and a protruding portion 622c protruding from the left and right center positions on the back surface side.

Two first recessed portions 622a are formed side by side in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides. That is, the first recessed portion 622a is formed at four locations on the partition member 622.

The second recessed portion 622b is formed by recessing from both upper and lower ends. The dimension between the facing portions of the second recessed portion 622b at the recessed tip is set to be substantially the same as the vertical separation distance of the fastening portion 621a2 formed on the light transmitting member 621. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back surface side of the light transmitting member 621, the fastening portion 621a2 is inserted inside the second recessed portion 622b.
It is possible to prevent the partition member 622 from moving in the vertical direction.

The projecting portion 622c is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction at the left and right center positions of the partition member 622. Further, the projecting portion 622c includes a recess 622c1 recessed in the projecting tip surface. The recess 622c1 is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the thickness dimension of the base member 624 described later. Therefore, when arranging the base member 624 in the partition member 622, the recess 62
The tip end side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside 2c1. As a result, when arranging the base member 624, the base member 624 can be positioned and the base member 624 can be suppressed from moving in the left-right direction.

The diffusing member 623 is formed of a cloudy-colored resin material and can diffuse the light that penetrates into the inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed in a curved plate shape in a side view, and the outer peripheral portion thereof (
The radius on the front side) is set to be substantially the same as the radius on the inner peripheral portion (back side) of the partition member 622.
Therefore, the diffusion member 623 can be arranged in a state of being grounded to the back surface side of the partition member 622.

Further, two diffusion members 623 are arranged side by side in the upper and lower sides, and two diffusion members 623 are arranged side by side at a predetermined distance on the left and right sides. That is, four diffusion members 623 are arranged on the back surface side of the partition member 622.

The width dimension of the diffusion member 623 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the dimension between the standing wall 621a1 of the light transmitting member 621 and the projecting portion 622c of the partition member 622. As a result, when the diffusion member 623 is arranged on the back surface side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the diffusion member 623 from moving left and right.

Further, the diffusion member 623 is formed to include a protruding portion 623a projecting to the front side and a recessed portion 623b recessed to the back surface side of the projecting portion 623a.

The protruding portion 623a is formed so as to project at a position corresponding to the first recessed portion 622a of the partition member 622 arranged on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is arranged in a state of being inserted inside the first recessed portion 622a. Will be set up. As a result, when the diffusion member 623 is arranged on the back surface side of the partition member 622, it is possible to prevent the partition member 622 from shifting in the left-right and vertical directions.

Further, the protruding distance of the protruding portion 623a is set to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622. That is, it is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion 623a and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

The recessed portion 623b has a protruding portion 62 on the side opposite to the protruding portion 623a (the back side of the diffusion member 623).
It is formed by being recessed into a shape slightly smaller than the front view shape of 3a. Is formed. As a result, the thickness of the plate of the diffusion member 623 can be made substantially constant, and distortion when the diffusion member 623 is molded can be suppressed. Further, the recessed portion 623b is formed in a shape slightly smaller than the protruding portion 623a, so that the area on the back surface side of the end portion of the protruding portion 623a can be increased. Therefore, the amount of light incident on the diffusion member 623 from the LED 624a, which will be described later, can be increased at the end of the protrusion 623a. As a result, the mode of the light visually recognized by the player through the diffusion member 623 can be made clear (clear), and the player's interest can be suppressed from being lowered.

The base member 624 is formed of a crescent-shaped plate-like body whose front side is curved, and includes an LED 624a that irradiates light on its side surface. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the concave tip surface of the recess 622c1 formed in the partition member 622. Therefore, the base member 62
When disposing 4 on the back surface of the partition member 622, the base member 624 is placed in the recess 6 of the partition member 622.
By inserting it inside the 22c1, it is possible to prevent the base member 624 from being displaced in the left-right direction.

A plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged on the left and right side surfaces of the base member 624, and the irradiation direction thereof is determined.
It is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624. That is, the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 624a is
It is considered to be in the left-right direction. A detailed description of the irradiation of the light of the LED 624a will be described later.

One reflective member 625 is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624. Reflective member 6
Reference numeral 25 is formed of a white resin material and is formed in an arc shape convex on the front surface side. Further, the radius of the arc of the reflective member 625 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the diffusion member 623. As a result, when the reflective member 625 is arranged on the back surface side of the diffuser member 623, the reflective member 625 and the diffuser member 623 can be in a grounded state.

The reflective member 625 is formed in a plate-like body that is separated from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the back side to the front side, and has an inclined portion 625a inclined from the back side toward the front side and an inclined portion 625a thereof. A plurality of recesses 625b formed vertically side by side on the front side of the above, and a wall portion 62 formed so as to project toward the front side at the upper end, the lower end and the middle of the recesses 625b.
It is formed mainly with 5c.

The front side of the inclined portion 625a is a reflective surface 625a1 that reflects the light of the LED 624a of the base member 624 to the front side, and is formed so as to be inclined by approximately 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624.
As described above, the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 624a is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624. Therefore, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the side surface of the base member 624, so that the LED 624a is formed. The light emitted from can be reflected to the front side. In addition, L
The mode in which the light of the ED624a advances will be described later.

The concave portion 625b is formed by being recessed in a convex curved shape on the back surface side. Further, the recess 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, whereby the amount of light of the LED 624a to be visually recognized by the player via the diffusion member 623 can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the progress of the light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 in the XLV-XLV line of FIG. 42 (a). In FIG. 45, a part of the mode of the light emitted from the LED 624a is shown by a two-dot chain line. Further, the outer shape of the decorative symbol display device 800 arranged on the left and right back surfaces of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 45, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed so as to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflective surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle). The reflection direction of can be set to the outside. In this case, since the reflective member 625 is formed of a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the opposite side of the reflective surface 625a1 (the back side of the reflective member 625).
Space can be increased. As a result, the end portion of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be arranged on the back side of the second segment unit 620.

Here, a rotation (decorative symbol display device 800) that is rotatably formed and a plurality of them are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals, and at least one that is arranged along between the plurality of rotating cylinders. A decorative member (light transmitting member 621) having a light transmitting portion and a substrate (base member 624) on which a plurality of light emitting means (LED 624a) are mounted and arranged on the back side of the decorative member are provided to emit light. There is known a gaming machine in which a substrate is arranged in a posture in which a surface on which the means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of a decorative member. According to this gaming machine, not only the space between the rotating cylinders can be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern is formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light of the light emitting means transmitted through the decorative member. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the design of the decorative member integrally with the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the substrate is arranged in such a posture that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently applied to the back surface of the decorative member. The pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means cannot be sufficiently enlarged. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of production is insufficient. On the other hand, if the decorative member (region excluding the symbol) is enlarged while the symbol formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means is small, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating cylinder is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 624a is transmitted through the light transmitting member 62.
Since the reflection member 625 that reflects to the back surface of 1 is provided, even when the base member 624 is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the light transmission member 621.
The irradiation range of the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 by the light emitted from the LED 624a can be widened. Therefore, the design formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be enlarged by that amount, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the area excluding the symbol can be made smaller by the amount that the symbol formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be made larger, the light transmitting member 621 can be made smaller.
And the decorative pattern display device 800 can form a sense of unity.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800, and has an outer edge up to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 in front view. Since it is formed by extending it, the axial end surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player. Further, since the design of the light transmitting member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be brought closer to each other, the light transmitting member 621 can be brought closer to each other. It is possible to easily form a sense of unity between the light and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Further, the reflective member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 to form a region of the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and a design of the light transmitting member 621. Since the back surface of the reflective member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 toward the base member 624 from the light transmitting member 621, the light emitted from the LED 624a is emitted. While ensuring the size of the symbol formed (displayed) by, the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800, and the decorative symbol display device 800 is placed on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. It can be inserted into the back side (the decorative symbol display device 800 is brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player, and the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player.
It is possible to easily form a sense of unity with.

Further, since the LED 624a is mounted on both one side surface and the other side surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on one side surface and the light emitted from the other side surface are mounted on the other side surface. The light transmitting member 62 has a different pattern depending on the light emitted from the LED 624a.
It can be formed (displayed) independently of 1.

In this case, the base member 624 arranged between the decorative design display devices 800 arranged side by side.
The number of sheets can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the base member 624 can be suppressed, the decorative design display device 800 is inserted into the back side of the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 by that amount (
The decorative design display device 800 can be brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player, and a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily formed.

Further, as described above, the reflecting surface 625a1 is formed so as to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflecting surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle). The reflection direction of can be set to the outside. As a result, (reflecting surface 625a1
The reflective member 625 can be made smaller (than when tilted at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the substrate member 624). Therefore, it is possible to secure a space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 by that amount. As a result, since the second segment unit 620 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be arranged close to each other, it is possible to easily form a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800.

Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a side view of the base member 624. FIG. 47 is the XL of FIG. 42 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the 2nd segment unit 620 in VII-XLVII line.

As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed in a side view square shape, and can irradiate light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged at intervals of an inclination angle θ1 in the circumferential direction about an axis substantially the same as the curved axis on the front side of the base member 624. As a result, LED624
The heat stored in the base member 624 due to the irradiation of a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base member 624 from being partially heated and the LED 624a from being damaged.

In this embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are distributed and arranged in the circumferential direction. Also, LE
The D624a is arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface formed in a square is oriented along the tangential direction in the curved shape of the base member 624.

Here, a substrate (base member 62) on which a plurality of light emitting means (LED624a) are conventionally mounted.
4) and a transmitting member (light transmitting member 621) that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are provided, and the transmitting member (light transmitting portion 621a of the light transmitting member 621) is formed in a curved shape and has a plurality of pieces. There is known a gaming machine in which light emitting means are arranged along the curvature of a transmissive member. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged so as to be evenly spaced in the front view of the transmissive member. That is, they are evenly spaced along the direction of the line segment (chord) connecting both ends of the curved line (arc) formed by the plurality of light emitting means. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means is biased because the distance between the light emitting means and the adjacent light emitting means is narrowed in a part of the plurality of light emitting means. Therefore, heat is concentrated on some of the light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the LEDs 624a are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between each LED 624a and the adjacent LED 624a can be made constant, and the LED 62
The distribution of heat generated by 4a can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to suppress the concentration of heat on some of the LEDs 624a and improve the life of each LED 624a.

As shown in FIG. 47, one recess 625b is formed on the back side (right side of FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. Further, the separation distance X1 from one end side (lower end portion) to the other end side (upper end portion) of the recess 625b in the vertical direction is set to be the same.

Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals at an angle of inclination θ1 in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the vertical spacing of each LED 624a is narrower on the central side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) than on the outer side in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light reflected by the reflective member 625 and radiated to the player side increases toward the center side in the vertical direction (the center side in the vertical direction becomes darker), and the light is uniformly visible to the player. There was a problem that it could not be done.

In other words, when a plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curve of the light transmitting portion 621a, the plurality of LEDs 624a are unequally spaced in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a. Will be arranged in. That is, in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a, a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is narrow and a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is wide is formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the reflection member 625 for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmitting portion 621a is provided, and the reflection member 625 has a plurality of recesses 625b partitioned corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. 62, the light transmitting portion 62 of the plurality of recesses 625b
Since the partition widths of 1a in the front view are set to be substantially the same, the amount of light in each recess 625b visually recognized in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a can be set to be substantially the same. As a result, multiple LEDs 624
The distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of a can be made uniform.

That is, since the separation distance X1 from one end side (lower end portion) to the other end side (upper end portion) of the recess 625b in the vertical direction is set to be the same, the player can be irradiated by the LED 624a of 1. The regions of light emitted to the side can be substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light emitted to the player side from increasing toward the center side in the vertical direction. As a result, the light can be uniformly visually recognized by the player.

Further, since the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular shape (square) when viewed from the front, for example,
Since the diffusivity of light can be ensured (light can be emitted at a wider angle) as compared with the case where the light emitting surface has a circular shape, the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in the recess 625b of 1.

The light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encloses the LED chip. Therefore, the front view rectangular shape of the light emitting surface means that the front view shape of the encapsulating resin (the front view shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin) is rectangular.

Further, at least a part of the plurality of LEDs 624a has a light transmitting portion 621a on one side of the light emitting surface.
Since it is arranged in the direction along the tangential direction in the curved shape of the above, the light emitted from the LED 624a can be easily diffused uniformly along the curve of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

Further, the recess 625b is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a and is recessed on the side away from the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is the light transmitting portion 6.
Since it faces the opposite space between the 21a and the recess 625b, the base member 624 with respect to the light transmitting portion 621a.
Can be arranged in an orthogonal posture. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the unit including the light transmitting portion 621a, the base member 624, and the reflecting member 625. In this case, LED624
Since the recess 625b is arranged so as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of a from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the recess 625b is uniformly distributed to the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. Can be incident. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

Next, the mode of the light emitted by the LED 624a will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In addition, in FIG. 48, LED6
The light irradiated by the 24a is shown by a two-dot chain line and is shown with a reference numeral of the irradiation region SR1.

As shown in FIG. 48, the first segment unit 61 is emitted by emitting light from the LED 624a.
0 is irradiated with light from two irradiation regions SR1 arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). Further, the second segment unit 620 is irradiated with light from the irradiation region SR1 arranged in 2 × 2 vertically and horizontally. The irradiation region SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light transmitting member 621.

Therefore, the left and right sides of the numbers in the 7-segment display can be displayed by the irradiation region SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation region SR1 of the second segment unit 620. The top, bottom, and center of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.
FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Note that FIGS. 49 and 50 show a disassembled state of the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 is arranged on a pair of left and right base members 660, a displacement member 670 pivotally supported by the base member 660 and rotationally displaced, and a base member 660. It is mainly provided with a drive means 680 for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.

The base member 660 is formed of a pair of left and right plate members having a shape having a space larger than that of the decorative symbol display device 800 described above in the center. Further, the base member 660 on the left side of the front view is provided with the first seg unit 610 on the front side, and the base member 660 on the right side of the front view is provided with the second seg unit 620 on the front side. The base member 660 is arranged upside down, left and right, and left and right. In this embodiment, only the base member 660 on the left side of the front view will be described, and the description of the base member 660 on the left side of the front view will be omitted.

The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction in the side view, and includes a protruding portion 661 that is convexly curved and protrudes from the front side surface to the front side. In addition, the base member 66
0 inserts a through hole 662 for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM3 arranged at one end (upper end) in the vertical direction and a connecting rod 681 arranged at both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction. Insertion hole 66
3. The recess 664 in which the displacement member 670 described later is pivotally supported, the sliding groove 665 formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the recess 664, and the engagement protruding above and below the recess 664 to the venue. It is mainly provided with a portion 666 and is formed.

The radius of the protruding tip of the protruding portion 661 is set to be smaller than the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the reflecting member 625 described above, and the curved axis thereof is set to be substantially the same as the curved axis of the reflective member 625. Therefore, when the first seg unit 610 and the second seg unit 620 are arranged on the base member 660, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 661 from coming into contact with the reflective member 625, and the heat of the base member 624 is opposed to each other. It is possible to suppress the invasion between the facing base members 660. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 8 disposed inside the facing base member 660.
It is possible to prevent the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that rotationally drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 from being damaged due to an increase in the temperature of 00.

The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and the gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. Set. Therefore, the drive motor KM3 can be arranged on the base member 660 with the gear 682 connected to the drive motor KM3. The drive motor KM3
Is attached to the base member 660 from the opposite side of the base member 660 arranged to face each other.

The through hole 662 is a hole for inserting the connecting rod 681 of the drive means 680 described later, is formed larger than the outer shape of the connecting rod 681, and is formed at both upper and lower ends of the base member 660.

The recess 664 is formed by being recessed in a circular shape from the facing side of the base member 660 toward the outside. The recess 664 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connecting projection 671b of the displacement member 670 described later. As a result, the connecting protrusion 671b can be inserted and arranged inside the recess 664.

The sliding groove 665 is a displacement member 67 by inserting a connecting projection 671b of the displacement member 670.
0 and the drive means 680 arranged outside the pair of base members 660 can be connected. again,
By inserting the connecting protrusion 671b into the sliding groove 665, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided. Therefore, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposite side of the base member 660 with a gap whose tip is larger than the diameter of the opposite side surface of the base member 660 and one end of the torsion spring SP1 described later.
As a result, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engaging portion 666.

The displacement members 670 are arranged in a pair of upper and lower parts in opposite directions. The displacement member 670 is formed of an extension member 671 whose one end is pivotally supported by the base member 660 and a decorative unit 672 connected to the other end side of the extension member 671.

The extending members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape, and are arranged in pairs in opposite directions. The extension member 671 has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating to one end on the longitudinal side in the left-right direction, a connecting projection 671b projecting to the left and right outward at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction on the longitudinal side, and a shaft support hole 6 from the side surface on the longitudinal side.
A protrusion 671d protruding in the circumferential direction of the 71a and an elastic member 671f made of an elastic material and arranged on the side surface of the extending member 671 are mainly formed.

The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. Therefore, the collar C is inserted into the shaft support hole 671a, and the collar C is inserted.
Is fastened and fixed to the inside of the recess 664 of the base member 660 with a screw, so that the displacement member 670 can be connected to the base member 660 in a rotatable state.

Further, the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 are coaxially arranged, and the collar C is inserted into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastened and fixed to the base member 660 to be fastened and fixed. The displacement member 670 is rotatably arranged coaxially.

Further, the left and right extending members 671 are formed with a bulging portion 671a1 that bulges outward in the left-right direction around one of the shaft support holes 671a. The outer diameter of the bulging portion 671a1 is the base member 660.
It is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 664 of. Further, the bulging portion 671a1 is arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the shaft support hole 671a on the right side of the displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side, the shaft support hole 67 on the right side of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side is formed.
It is assumed that 1a is arranged inside the bulging portion 671a1. On the other hand, the left shaft support hole 671
In a, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side, the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side is the bulging portion. 67
It is in a state of being arranged inside 1a1 (see FIG. 49).

Thereby, when the displacement member 670 is arranged in the base member 660 by the collar C, the bulging portion 671a1 can be inserted inside the recess 664. As a result, the shaft support hole 6 of the displacement member 670
When a force is applied in the radial direction of the shaft of the 71a, the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner peripheral surface of the recess 664 come into contact with each other, so that the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be prevented from being damaged.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the displacement members 670 arranged in pairs are coaxially arranged on the base member 660, the axial length of the collar C is lengthened by that amount. Therefore, the displacement member 6
When a force is applied in the radial direction to the rotating shaft of 70, a large force is likely to be applied to the rotating shaft. Therefore, where the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is easily damaged, the bulging portion 67
When 1a1 and the recess 664 come into contact with each other, it is possible to maintain a force acting in the radial direction with respect to the rotation axis of the displacement member 670. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C from being damaged.

The protrusion 671d is formed with a through hole 671d1 penetrating in the longitudinal direction on the longitudinal side of the extension member 671. The through hole 671d1 is a hole through which the torsion springs SP1 and SP2, which will be described later, are inserted into the inside, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

The elastic member 671f is arranged on the side surface of the extension member 671 on the side of the displacement members 670 arranged in pairs of upper and lower parts, which will be described later, on the side close to each other. Further, when the upper and lower extending members 671 are arranged at positions close to each other, the size is set so that the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f come into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to absorb the impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to close positions.

The drive means 680 is a means for transmitting the power of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.
The drive means 680 includes a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, a large diameter gear 683 meshing with the gear 682, and a rod-shaped body having one end connected to the side surface of the large diameter gear 683.
A first link member 684 whose other end is connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 that transmits power to the opposite side via a base member 660 in between, and a cam member 685 that is connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotates. And a second link member 686 formed in a rod-like body, one end of which is rotatably connected to the cam member 685 and the other end of which is connected to the displacement member 670.

The gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3 as described above, and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

The large-diameter gear 683 is formed in a circular shape in a side view, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface that meshes with the gear 682, and a protrusion 683b that projects in an annular shape on the side surface in the direction of the rotation axis. Is formed. Since the gear surface 683a of the large diameter gear 683 is meshed with the gear 682,
It is rotated by rotating the gear 682. That is, the drive motor KM3 is rotationally driven to rotate.

The protrusion 683b is formed so as to project in an annular shape, and its shaft is arranged at a position different from the rotation shaft of the large diameter gear 683. Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle about its axis of rotation.

The first link member 684 is formed in a rod shape, and insertion holes 684a and 684b are formed at both ends thereof so as to penetrate in the left-right direction.

The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683 is inserted, and the protrusion 683 is a hole into which the protrusion 683b is inserted.
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of b. The protrusion 683b is inserted into the insertion hole 684a, and the tip of the protrusion 683b is fastened with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a, so that the first link member 684 can be rotated to the large diameter gear 683. Can be connected in a state.

The insertion hole 684b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The connecting protrusion 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 684b, and the tip of the connecting protrusion 671b is fastened with a screw whose head outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, so that the first link member 684 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. Can be connected in the same state.

Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the protrusion 683b is rotationally displaced around the rotation axis of the large-diameter gear 683 with the rotational displacement of the large-diameter gear 683, and the protrusion 683b is displaced. The first link member 684 to which one end is connected is displaced, and the first link member 684
The displacement member 670 connected to the other end of the is displaced.

One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted into the insertion hole 663 of the base member 660 arranged on the left side in the front view, and is internally fitted into the rotating shaft portion of the large diameter gear 683. On the other hand, the other end of the connecting rod 681 is connected to the cam member 685. Therefore, by the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3, the connecting rod 681 is rotated and the cam member 685 is rotated.

The cam member 685 is formed in a circular shape in a side view, and the connecting rod 681 is internally fitted in the shaft portion thereof. Further, the cam member 685 has a protrusion 685a that projects outward in an annular shape from the side surface in the axial direction thereof.
To prepare for. The protrusion 685a is formed so as to project in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the cam member 685. Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced on a circle about its axis of rotation.

The second link member 686 is formed to have the same shape as the first link member 684, which is horizontally inverted. The second link member 686 is provided with insertion holes 686a and 686b at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof.

The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the protrusion 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted, and the protrusion 685a.
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of a. A protrusion 685a is inserted into the insertion hole 686a, and the tip of the protrusion 685a is fastened with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a so that the second link member 686 can be rotated to the cam member 685. Can be connected with.

The insertion hole 686b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The connecting protrusion 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 686b, and the tip of the connecting protrusion 671b is fastened with a screw whose head outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, so that the second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. Can be connected in the same state.

Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced around the rotation axis of the cam member 685 with the rotational displacement of the cam member 685, and one end of the protrusion 685a is displaced. The second link member 686 to be connected is displaced, and the second link member 68
The displacement member 670 connected to the other end of 6 is displaced.

That is, the displacement member 670, the first link member 684, and the second link member 686 are displaced. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, it is possible to suppress tilting of the displacement member 670 when it is displaced. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

Next, the displacement member 670 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. 51 (
a) is a front view of the displacement member 670, and FIG. 51 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 53 shows the LII of 51 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the displacement member 670 in line I-LIII.

As described above, the displacement member 670 is formed by including an extension member 671 rotatably supported by the base member 660 and a decorative unit 672 connected to the extension member 671.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extension member 671 includes a connecting portion 671c formed in a plate shape on the short side (connecting side of the decorative unit 672). Extension members 67 arranged in pairs on the left and right
Stepped portion 671c1 that partially protrudes in a stepped manner on the surface of 1 to which the connecting portions 671c face each other.
Is formed. The stepped portions 671c1 are formed alternately on the left and right sides, and the stepped portions 671c1 are in a state of being meshed with each other with a predetermined gap. This makes it possible to absorb dimensional errors when the extension member 671 is molded.

The decorative unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that irradiates light inside and irradiates the player side with light. The decorative unit 672 includes a back cover 673 arranged on the back side, and a front cover 676 which covers the back cover 673 and is arranged on the front side of the back cover 673.
It is mainly provided with a base member 674 arranged between the back cover 673 and the front cover 676 facing each other, and a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 arranged between the base member 674 and the front cover 676. Will be done.

The back cover 673 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and the connecting portion 671c of the extending member 671 is fastened to the back side. As a result, the decorative unit 672 and the extension member 671 can be fastened.

Further, the back cover 673 is formed of a resin material that is difficult (impermeable) to transmit light.
The back cover 673 includes a reflecting portion 673a formed by being recessed on the back side at a position facing the diffusion member 675 described later.

The reflective portion 673a is formed on the lower edge portion of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and the inner surface thereof is coated with a white coating having high light reflectance. As a result, the light emitted to the inside of the reflecting portion 673a can be reflected inside the reflecting portion 673a and irradiated to the diffusion member 675 side.

The front cover 676 is arranged so that the front view shape is substantially the same as the shape of the back cover 673 and covers the front side of the back cover 673. Further, the front cover 676 is formed of a resin material capable of transmitting light, and can emit light emitted from the first LED 674a and the second LED, which will be described later, to the front side (player side).

The base member 674 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body smaller than the back cover 673 in the front view. On the front side of the base member 674, the first LED 674a, which is arranged side by side on the lower edge portion in the left-right direction and irradiates the diffuser member 675 side with light, and the first LED 674a, which is arranged above the first LED 674a, emits light to the lens member 677. It is mainly provided with a second LED 674b for irradiating the light.

The first LED 674a is arranged at a position facing the upper end portion of the diffusion member 675, and is also arranged.
The base member 674 is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light downward. As a result, the first LED 674a
It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the lens member 677 from being incident on the lens member 677, which will be described later. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side via the diffusion member 675 and the light emitted to the front side via the lens member 677, and the interest of the player is impaired. Can be suppressed.

The second LED 674b is arranged on the upper part of the first LED 674a. Therefore, the diffusion member 6
The light of the second LED 674b can be incident on the lens member 677 disposed on the upper part of the 75.

The diffusion member 675 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and is arranged at the lower end portion on the back surface side of the front cover 676. The diffusing member 675 is made of a cloudy-colored resin material capable of diffusing the light incident inside. As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 674a and incident on the diffusing member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform throughout and emitted to the front side (player side).

The lens member 677 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and is arranged at the upper end portion on the back surface side of the front cover 676. The lens member 677 is formed of a transparent resin material, and a plurality of protrusions are formed on the back surface side (not shown). As a result, the light emitted from the second LED 674b can be easily incident on the inside by the protrusion on the back surface side. As a result, the second LED67
Even if the amount of light emitted from 4b is reduced, the light can be incident on the lens member 677, and the light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, an aspect of the light emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 by the first LED 674a will be described. FIG. 54 is a front view of the displacement member 670. In FIG. 54, the region of light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is 2.
It is shown by a dotted line and is shown with a reference numeral of the irradiation region SR2.

As shown in FIG. 54, the region of light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is
The lower end of the decorative unit 672 (front cover 676) has a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction. Since the displacement member 670 is arranged at both upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, the displacement member 67
With 0, the irradiation region SR2 is formed at a position separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Therefore,
The irradiation area SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 can display the numbers above and below by the 7-segment display.

Next, the 7-segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative design display device 800. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and the decorative design display device 800. In addition, in FIGS. 55 and 56, the state in which the transmission region 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated toward the player side is shown, and the state is shown.
The irradiation region SR1, the irradiation region SR2, and the transmission region 821b1 are illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 55, the irradiation regions SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are formed side by side in the vertical direction and six in the horizontal direction. It is said to be in a state of being.

The irradiation area SR1 is formed as a set of four elements having a decorative pattern display device 800 sandwiched between them, and three sets thereof are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The irradiation regions SR2 are arranged above and below between the set of irradiation regions SR1, and the transmission region 821b1 is arranged at the upper and lower intermediate positions. Therefore, 7
The irradiation areas SR1 and SR2 and the transmission area 821b1 of the book can display numbers in a 7-segment display.

As described above, since the four sets of the irradiation region SR1 are arranged side by side in three sets in the left-right direction, a seven-segment display is formed in each set. That is, the 7-segment display is in a state where three are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

Therefore, the 7-segment display arranged side by side in the left-right direction can be displayed as a valid line for the jackpot lottery of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, all 7-segment displays are displayed with "7" segments. As a result, not only the jackpot display by the decorative symbol display device 800 described above but also the jackpot display by the 7-segment display can be performed. As a result, since the player can visually recognize the plurality of display forms, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Here, the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 6 of the segment display device 600
Since the light transmitting portion 621a of 20 is formed by being curved in a convex shape toward the front side, when the player is made to visually recognize the display of the 7 segments, the display of the central portion in the vertical direction close to the player becomes large. The display at both ends in the vertical direction far from the player becomes smaller. Therefore, there is a problem that the display of the numbers by the 7-segment cannot be clearly visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the width dimension in the left-right direction is sequentially formed to be larger as the 7-segment display is directed from the upper and lower center positions toward the upper and lower ends. As a result, the display of the seven segments at the upper and lower edges and the upper and lower center positions can be made uniform as a whole. As a result, the display of the numbers by the 7 segments can be clearly visually recognized by the player.

Further, the display of the 7 segments formed on both the left and right sides is formed so that the central portion in the vertical direction is inclined toward the central side in the horizontal direction. As a result, the player can clearly see the display of the 7 segments formed on both the left and right sides.

That is, the viewpoint of the player is usually located at the center position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. again,
The segment display device 600 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is located in front of the 7 segments displayed in the center. Therefore, as the distance from the player's viewpoint increases to the left and right, the curved shape of the light transmitting portion 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 causes the player to visually recognize the 7-segment display in a curved manner. Since the central portion in the vertical direction of the 7-segment display is formed so as to be inclined toward the central side in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to visually recognize the 7-segment display in a curved manner from the viewpoint of the player. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment display.

Next, the displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60.
57 (a) to G01 (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. FIG. 58 (
a), FIGS. 59 (a) and 60 (a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIGS. 58 (b), 59 (a) and 60 (b) are FIGS. 57 (a). LVIIIb-LVII
It is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit 600L in line Ib.

In addition, in FIGS. 57 (a), 58 (a), and 58 (b), the state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged in the retracted state is shown, and FIGS. 57 (b), 59 (a), and 59 are shown. In (b), the state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged in the intermediate state is illustrated, and FIGS. 57 (c), 60 (a), and 60 (b).
In b), the state in which the displacement member 670 is arranged in the overhanging state is illustrated.

Further, the retracted state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair of upper and lower parts are separated from each other in the upper and lower outer directions, and the overhanging state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the displacement members 670 are arranged in a pair of upper and lower parts. The member 670 is in contact with the upper and lower intermediate positions, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is
The displacement member 670 is arranged between the retracted state and the overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 58, at the position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state,
The displacement member 670 arranged above the pair of upper and lower parts (upper part in FIG. 57) has a shaft support hole 671a that rotates on the shaft support hole 671a because the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are located above. The decorative unit 672 is positioned above.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged above.
In P1, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1).
It is said to be the base end of. Therefore, the urging force exerted by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the decorative unit 672 is arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity on the displacement member 670.

On the other hand, in the displacement member 670 arranged in the lower pair (lower part of FIG. 57), the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are located below, so that the shaft support hole 6 is provided.
The decorative unit 672 is positioned downward with 71a as the rotation axis.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged below.
In P2, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1).
It is said to be the base end of. Therefore, the urging force exerted by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, the decorative unit 672 can be easily displaced upward in the direction of gravity to the displacement member 670.

In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 facing each other, and the decorative symbol display device 800 arranged inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, the player can display three symbols to be decorated on the reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 in the vertical direction.

From the states shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 58, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM3, the large diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. As a result, the first link member 6
The 84 and the second link member 686 are displaced to a substantially central position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Therefore, the insertion holes 684b, 6 of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686.
The displacement member 670 connected to the 86b is rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 671a, and FIG. 57 (b)
) And the state shown in FIG. 59, and are displaced to the state shown in FIG. 57 (c) and FIG. 60.

As shown in FIGS. 57B and 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the position in the intermediate state, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged above.
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is set to an intermediate position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deforming the torsion spring SP1, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the retracted state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side.
Similar to the P2 torsion spring SP1, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is on the other end side (through hole 67).
It is an intermediate position on the side inserted into 1d1). Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be reduced by the amount of changing the engagement position.

In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than that in the retracted state is formed between the facing of the decorative unit 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative symbol display device 800 arranged inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. .. In this case, one symbol to be decorated on the reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side.

Therefore, from the retracted state in which three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 are displayed in the vertical direction.
Displacement member 670 in the intermediate state to display one on the drawing side decorated on the inner reel 811 in the vertical direction.
By displacing the above, it is possible to form a plurality of the production modes and improve the interest of the player. Further, by displaying one of the drawing sides decorated on the inner reel 811 in the vertical direction, one symbol can be attracted to the player. Therefore, since the part to be noticed can be clarified, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

As shown in FIGS. 57 (c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged above.
The engagement position of P1 with the through hole 671d1 is set to the tip position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by deforming the torsion spring SP1, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by changing the engagement position.

Further, the torsion spring S inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side.
Similar to the torsion spring SP1, P2 also has the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 on the other end side (through hole 6).
It is the tip position of the side to be inserted into 71d1). Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased by the amount of deforming the torsion spring SP2, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by the amount of changing the engagement position.

That is, the urging force of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear with the displacement of the displacement member 670. As a result, the required urging force is applied to the torsion spring SP1 by the displacement position of the displacement member 670.
, Can be easily assigned from SP2. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

In the overhanging state, the decorative unit 672 of the pair of vertical displacement members 670 is brought into contact with the vertical displacement unit 600L at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. In this case, the decorative unit 672 is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 800, and the decorative symbol display device 8 is arranged from the player side (front side).
The display of 00 can be made invisible.

Therefore, with the displacement member 670 in the overhanging state, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced, and then the displacement member 670 is displaced to the intermediate state or the retracted state, so that the player can align the symbols ( It can be made easier to have a sense of expectation (the lottery of the jackpot was done). As a result, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the displacement members 670 arranged in the upper and lower pairs are displaced by the same amount has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the two drive motors KM3 is rotationally driven. It is also possible to displace the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair of upper and lower parts to the position of the intermediate state or the overhanging state only on one side.

Further, the maximum displacement amount of the displacement members 670 arranged in the upper and lower pairs is not set at the intermediate position, and can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. 60. That is, the pair of displacement members 6
It can be displaced up and down with the 70 in contact.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. 61 to 63 are schematic views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In addition, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the transition state of the displacement member 670 is shown in order.

In FIGS. 61 to 63, a U is added to the end of the code of the displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670.
A reference numeral D will be added to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670, which are arranged below the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 61, the vertical displacement unit 600L is an extension member 671 of the displacement member 670.
Are arranged on both the left and right sides. The pair of extension members 671 has a driven side in which the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted via the connecting rod 681 and a driving side in which the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted by the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683. Each is connected to either.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the vertically arranged displacement members 670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, the decorative units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction while the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are in contact with each other. ..

Here, the first displacement member (decorative unit 672U) and the first displacement member (decorative unit 672U), which are arranged facing each other and are displaceable in the directions of proximity or separation, and are displaceable in the same direction with the facing sides in contact with each other. A gaming machine equipped with a two-displacement member (decorative unit 672D) is known. According to such a gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to each other to a position where the facing sides abut, an object (for example, an object located on the back surface side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member). , The liquid crystal display device and the effect member) are shielded, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in a direction away from each other, so that the shield is released according to the displacement and the object can be visually recognized. It is possible to perform the production to be done. Further, by displacementing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) with the facing sides in contact with each other, the shielding of the object is maintained. , It is also possible to perform an effect before releasing the shield (an effect that focuses on the operation of releasing the shield).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to bring the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other due to the dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members, and between the facing sides. There was a problem that a gap might be formed in the. When a gap is formed between the opposite sides, the player can see the object on the back side through the gap, and the effect of the effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base member 660 and the drive means 6 that support the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D on the base member 660 in a displaceable manner, respectively.
80U and drive means 680D are provided, and the support mode of the drive means 680U is a decorative unit 67.
To one side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672D, which is biased to one side of the facing side of the 2U and is in contact with one side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672U, which is opposite to the other side of the facing side of the decoration unit 672D. Since the support mode of the drive means 680D is biased, the support mode of the drive means 680U and the support mode of the drive means 680D are opposite to each other in a state where the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other. It can be deviated to the side rotated by 180 ° with the center of one side and the center of the other side as the center of rotation). As a result, the decoration unit 67
The facing sides of the 2U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed (see FIG. 63).

In this embodiment, since the number of constituent members is different between one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction),
The driving force transmitted to the left and right of the decorative unit 672 is different, and the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D may face their high rigidity side (low side) toward the other's low rigidity side (high side). can. Therefore, in a state where the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other on the high rigidity side and pushes the other side (advances), and the low rigidity side. Then, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retreating) the other party. As a result, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 6
The facing sides of the 72D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

The drive means 680U includes a drive motor KM3U that generates a driving force and a decorative unit 672U.
The driving force of the drive motor KM3U is transmitted to the pair of extending members 671U and the pair of extending members 671U, which are connected to the base member, and the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U are configured differently from each other. The drive means 680D is provided with a drive motor KM3D for generating a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U for connecting the decorative unit 672D to the base member 660, and a drive motor KM3U driven by the pair of extension members 671U. The second link member 686D and the first link member 686D, which transmit forces and have different configurations from each other.
Since it is provided with the link member 684D, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D
It is possible to easily bring the facing sides into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the facing sides.

That is, in a state where the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D is, for example, on the side where the driving force is large or on the side where the transmission timing of the driving force is earlier. Along with pushing the opponent (advancing), it is possible to form a state in which the opponent is accepted (backward) on the side where the driving force is small or on the side where the transmission timing of the driving force is later. As a result, the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

Further, the extension member 671U and the extension member 671D are formed to have substantially the same length as each other, one end side is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D, and the other end side rotates coaxially with the base member 660. Decorative unit 672U because it is possible to support the axis
And when the decorative unit 672D is reciprocated in the same direction while abutting the facing sides thereof, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the facing sides are in contact with each other even when the deviation of the support mode is used.

Further, the extension member 671U or the extension member 671D is provided with an elastic member 671f formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and is elastic when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other. Since the body is interposed between the extension member 671U and the extension member 671D in an elastically compressed state, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D reciprocate in the same direction while abutting their opposite sides. Even when the deviation of the support mode is used, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the facing sides are in contact with each other.

Further, as described above, the drive means 680U is driven by the drive motor KM3U that generates the driving force and the drive motor KM3U, and also has the decorative unit 672U as the base member 6.
A pair of extension members 671U connected to 60 and two torsion springs SP1 that apply different urging forces to the pair of extension members 671U are provided, and the drive means 680D includes a drive motor KM3D that generates a drive force. , A pair of extension members 671D driven by the drive motor KM3D and connecting the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660, and two torsion springs SP2 that apply different urging forces to the pair of extension members 671D. Therefore, it is possible to easily bring the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the facing sides.

That is, in a state where the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D is attached together with pushing (advancing) the other, for example, on the side having a large urging force. On the side with less power, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 6
The facing sides of the 72D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

The two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration as each other. That is, the positions on which the urging forces are applied may be different from each other, or the amount of elastic deformation may be different from each other, so that the urging forces applied to the pair of extending members 671U may be different from each other. The same applies to the two torsion springs SP2.

Further, the drive means 680U includes a drive motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that are driven by the drive motor KM3U and connect the decorative unit 672U to the base member 660, and a pair of extension members thereof. The drive means 680D includes a first urging member that applies an urging force to one of the 671U, and the driving means 680D is a driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force.
A second urging force is applied to one of the pair of extending members 671D, which is driven by the drive motor KM3D and connects the decorative unit 672D to the base member 660, and the pair of extending members 671D. Since the member is provided, the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the facing sides.

That is, in a state where the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other on the side where the urging force is applied, for example. On the side where the urging force is not applied, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

As described above, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671U and the other leg is connected to the base member 660, and the decorative unit 672U is connected to the decorative unit 6.
Since the torsion spring SP1 that applies a urging force in the direction close to the 72D is provided, when the decorative unit 672U is displaced in the direction close to the decorative unit 672D, the extension member 67 is provided.
The driving force of the driving motor KM3U required to rotate 1U can be assisted by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1. Therefore, for example, when the decorative unit 672U is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position separated from the decorative unit 672D to the contact position in contact with the decorative unit 672D, the displacement can be smoothly started.

In this case, as the extension member 671U is rotated in the direction of bringing the decoration unit 672U closer to the decoration unit 672D, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U or the other leg of the torsion spring SP1. Since at least one of the connecting positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the decorative unit 672U is attached in a direction closer to the decorative unit 672D by the amount that the distance from the winding portion to the action position of the force becomes longer. You can weaken your power. Therefore, for example, when the decorative unit 672U brought close to the decorative unit 672D is stopped, the displacement can be reliably stopped, so that damage due to a collision can be suppressed. Further, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the facing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement is increased. It is possible to improve the effect of production.

On the one hand, a torsion that is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the extension member 671D and the other leg is connected to the base member to give an urging force in a direction that brings the decorative unit 672D closer to the decorative unit 672U. The connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other of the torsion spring SP2 as the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction of providing the spring SP2 and bringing the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U. Since at least one of the connecting positions between the leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the torsion spring SP
The torsion spring SP2 has the same effect as 1. In particular, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the facing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed in both cases, which is particularly effective. Further, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are arranged at the same height (arranged at the position in the direction of gravity), and the position where they abut is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity and the position where they are separated from each other. When the (retracted position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity, the configurations of the torsion spring SP1 and the torsion spring SP2 are particularly effective.

Since the decoration unit 672U is closer to the decoration unit 672D due to the displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the decoration unit 6 is located lower in the direction of gravity as the decoration unit 672U is located below.
The urging force in the direction of displacing the 72U upward in the direction of gravity can be increased (that is, the decorative unit 6).
The more the 72U is located above the gravitational direction, the weaker the urging force in the direction of displacing the decorative unit 672U upward in the gravitational direction).

Therefore, when the decorative unit 672U is displaced (ascended) from the stopped state toward the upper side in the direction of gravity, the displacement (ascending) can be smoothly started, and when the ascended decorative unit 672U is stopped. Can reliably stop the displacement not only by the action of gravity but also by the weakening of the urging force. As a result, damage due to collision with the decorative unit 672D can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the decorative unit 672U displaced downward in the direction of gravity is stopped, the urging force is strengthened to counteract the action of gravity that tries to continue the descent. Can be done. As a result, the decoration unit 672U can be reliably stopped.

A torsion spring SP2 formed as a torsion spring, one leg connected to an extension member 671D and the other leg connected to a base member 660 to provide a urging force in a direction to separate the decorative unit 672D from the decorative unit 672U. Since the decorative unit 672D is separated from the decorative unit 672U by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, when the decorative unit 672D is displaced in the direction away from the decorative unit 672U, that is, the decorative unit 672D is displaced in the direction of gravity. Extension member 671 when it is necessary to displace (raise) against
The driving force of the driving motor KM3D required to rotate the U can be assisted by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the displacement can be smoothly performed.

In this case, as the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is brought closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 Since at least one of the connecting positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the direction in which the decorative unit 672D is separated from the decorative unit 672U by the length of the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied (gravity direction). It is possible to weaken the urging force in the upward direction). Therefore, for example, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the facing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed. Can be enhanced, and the effect of production can be improved.

Next, the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a chevron shape inclined on both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a has been described, but the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment has been described. The protrusion 2812a to be formed is formed into a curved hemisphere. The same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 in the second embodiment, and is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 64.
(B) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 2812 in the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). Note that FIG. 64 (a) corresponds to FIG. 36 (a).

As shown in FIG. 64, the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812 has an outer reel unit 820.
A protrusion 2812a1 is formed so as to project toward the edge portion 824 of the. The protrusion 2812a1 is a hub 8
It is formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of 12a.

The protrusion 2812a1 is formed by being curved in a bowl shape. As a result, the inner reel unit 8
When 10 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the extruded air (wind) collides with the edge portion 824 of the outer reel 821 facing the outer reel 821, so that the air (wind) flows into the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the facing space between the outer reel and the outer reel 811. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Further, since the protrusion 2812a1 of the second embodiment is formed by being curved in a bowl shape, its rigidity can be made higher than that of the protrusion 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, the inner reel unit 81
It is possible to prevent the protrusion 2812a from being damaged when the tip of the protrusion 2812a1 comes into contact with the spoke 822 of the outer reel unit 820 due to wobbling when the zero or the outer reel unit 820 is rotationally driven.

Next, the outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812 has been described, but in the second embodiment, the protrusion 3824a is formed on the edge portion 824. note that,
The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the third embodiment, and is shown in FIG. 66 (a).
) Is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66 (b) is an L of FIG. 66 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit 820 in the XVIb-LXVIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the edge portion 824 on the extension line of the spoke 3822 of the outer reel unit 820 has a protrusion 382 protruding toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810.
4a is formed. The protrusion 3824a is on the outside of each spoke 3822 (outer reel 821 side).
Formed at the ends.

The protrusions 3824a are formed so as to be inclined on both sides along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.
Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the extruded air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the facing inner reel unit 810 and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, the inner reel 811
It is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is the hub 81.
Although the case where both sides are formed in a mountain shape inclined along the circumferential direction of 2a has been described, the protrusion 4812a formed on the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a. It is formed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fourth embodiment, and is shown in FIG. 68 (a).
) Is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 4812, and FIG. 68 (b) is an LXVI of FIG. 68 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the rotating member 4812 in line IIb-LXVIIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a protrusion 4812a1 projecting toward the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape in the side view, and the protrusion 4812a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction thereof and the hub 812a.
It is formed so as to intersect with the radial direction of. That is, the protrusion 4812a1 is formed so as to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radial outer end portion of the hub 812a toward the radial inner end portion. again,
The inclination direction is formed so as to be inclined toward the normal rotation direction side of the inner reel unit 810.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the extruded air (wind) is 824 at the edge of the opposite outer reel 821.
By colliding with, the reels flow into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821.
As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Further, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed so as to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radial outer end portion of the hub 812a toward the radial inner end portion, and the inclination direction is the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810. Since it is on the directional side, it is possible to easily generate wind by rotating the inner reel unit 810. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed with light transmission, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. The player can visually recognize the fluctuation of the symbol due to the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 via the outer reel unit 820. In this case, the inner reel unit 810
The protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the above, that is, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 whose rotation speed is higher than that of the outer reel unit 820. In the effect of rotating the unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Next, the inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. In the first embodiment, the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are
The case where the reel unit 820 is formed so as to be inclined toward the edge portion 824 side toward the outer side in the radial direction has been described. However, in the fifth embodiment, the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are directed toward the outer side in the radial direction. Therefore, the outer reel unit 820 is formed so as to be inclined to the opposite side to the edge portion 824. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 (a)
) Is a partially enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70 (b) is the LXXb- of FIG. 70 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the annulus member 813 in the LXXb line. In the decorative pattern display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment, the backlight unit 830 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the inner reel unit 5810 according to the fifth embodiment is
The spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 are formed so as to be inclined toward the side opposite to the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820 toward the outer side in the radial direction. Therefore, the outer reel unit 820
The tilting direction of the spokes 822 and the tilting direction of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetrical.

Further, the edge 8 of the outer reel unit 820 of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810.
A protrusion 5813a is formed on the surface facing the 24 (see FIG. 70). Protrusion 5813
A plurality of a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813.

The protrusion 5813a is formed in a chevron shape inclined on both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the extruded air (wind) is collected from the edge 8 of the opposite outer reel 821.
By colliding with 24, it flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, the inner reel 8
It is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of 11 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800, they are opposed to each other (the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820). Since air cannot be sufficiently sent to the space between them), the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 cannot be sufficiently cooled, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 fail. I was afraid.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the protrusion 5813a can generate a flow of air flowing in between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel, so that the air flow can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to easily take in air from both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800.
Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, so that the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be prevented from failing.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 is formed only on the inner reel unit 810 has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 681
2a1,6824a are formed in the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 72 (a)
) Is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG. 72 (b) is an LXXI of FIG. 72 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the rotating member 6812 in line Ib-LXXIIb. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73 (b) is an LXXIII of FIG. 73 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit 820 in line b-LXXIIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed with a protrusion 6812a1 projecting toward the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820. Protrusion 2812a1
Are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Further, the protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a chevron shape whose both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

A protrusion 6824a projecting toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed on the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Further, the protrusion 6824a is formed in a chevron shape whose both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.

The protrusion 6812a1 is formed on the radial inside of the rotating member 6812 with respect to the protrusion 6824a. This makes it possible to prevent the protrusion 6812a1 from colliding with the protrusion 6824a when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the protrusion 6
Wind can be generated by the 812a1 and the protrusion 6824a. That is, wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820.

Further, in this case, the air extruded to either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can be made to collide with either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the air flow can be further regulated. Therefore, the flow of air flowing in between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel can be increased. This will result in
Dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the protrusions 8624a and the protrusions 6812a are erected on the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a at different positions in the radial direction, so that the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is erected. Edge 824 regardless of which one is rotated
The protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a can be displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the hub 812a and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 in the effect of rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810.

An inclined surface is formed on the surfaces of the protrusions 6812a1 and the protrusions 6824a facing each other in the radial direction. This makes it possible to reduce the air resistance when air flows in the radial direction. As a result, dust (dust) sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be easily blown off.

Further, the arrangement interval of the protrusion 6812a1 in the circumferential direction and the arrangement interval of the protrusion 6824a in the circumferential direction are formed at different intervals. As a result, the positions where the protrusions 6812a1 and the protrusions 6824a overlap in the radial direction can be shifted. Therefore, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824
By overlapping a with the radial direction, it is possible to disperse the positions where the air is compressed into a plurality of positions. As a result, the protrusions 6812a1 and the protrusions 6824a overlap in the radial direction to compress the air, so that it is possible to prevent the rotation speeds of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 from being slowed down.

Next, the rotating member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. In the first embodiment, the case where the first electric accessory 520 is driven symmetrically in the same manner has been described, but in the seventh embodiment, the drive of the first electric accessory 520 is driven differently on the left and right. To. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, a detailed description of the rotating member 7533 according to the seventh embodiment will be given. FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 7533 according to the seventh embodiment, and is shown in FIG. 74 (a).
b) is a side view of the rotating member 7533.

As shown in FIG. 74, in the rotating member 7533, two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape in the side view are arranged side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and the facing portion on one end side is connected to the connecting portion 533a. It is formed by being connected by. Further, the plate-shaped bodies arranged on the left and right ends are substantially L in the side view shape thereof.
The bending angles bent into a character are arranged differently on the left and right. In the seventh embodiment, the L-shaped bending angle of the plate-shaped body formed on the left side of the front view is set to be larger than the L-shaped bending angle of the plate-shaped body formed on the right side of the front view.

Therefore, the drive unit 7533d recessed on the other end side of the rotating member 7533 (left side in FIG. 74B) is formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right sides. Further, the drive unit 7533d is
The recessed width (vertical width on the left side of FIG. 74B) is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 523 formed on the first electric accessory 520, and the protrusion 523 can slide inside the drive portion 7533d. Is formed in.

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 7533 in the left-right direction in the front view (the dimension between the facing surfaces of the outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is smaller than the dimension between the facing surfaces inside the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. Set. As a result, the rotating member 533 can be arranged between the facing portions of the first projection 532b of the sliding member 532.

Further, in the front view, the size of the rotating member 7533 between the left and right plate members facing each other is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 7533 (between the two plate members facing each other).

The rotating member 7533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes from the bent portion having a substantially L-shaped side view to both sides in the left-right direction.
Mainly 3c, a protrusion 533b protruding from the end on one end side of the side view substantially L-shape to both sides in the left-right direction, and a drive portion 7533d formed by being recessed at the tip on the other end side of the side view substantially L-shape. Formed in preparation for.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 76, a driving mode of the first electric accessory 520 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. 75 (a) to 75 (c) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. 76 (a) to 76 (c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520.

In addition, in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (a), the first state of the first electric accessory 520 is shown in FIG. 75 (c).
) And FIG. 76 (c) show that the second state of the first electric accessory 520 is shown in FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b).
The state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located between the first state and the second state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 75 and 76, a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparently shown is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (a), the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 has a movable body 531b.
In the state of protruding from the inside of the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is pushed to the front side (left side in FIG. 75A) so that the driving portion 7533d is positioned downward.
As a result, the protrusion 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed downward to be in the first state.

In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the right drive unit 7533d and the upper side of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R (upper side in FIG. 75A). This drives the protrusion 523R to the drive unit 753.
While pushing down to a certain position by 3d to put the right wing member 520R in the first state, the center of gravity of the right wing member 520R is switched to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521R) in the front view, and the right wing member 5
It is formed by rotating 20R to the first state by its own weight.

Further, the inside of the drive unit 7533d on the left side and the lower side of the protrusion 523L of the left wing member 520L (FIG. 7).
A gap is formed between the 5 (a) and the lower side).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b), the movable body 53 of the solenoid 531
When the 1b is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is pulled toward the back surface side (right side in FIG. 75 (b)), and the drive portion 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by pushing the protrusion 523 upward.

In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive unit 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side in FIG. 75A). When the rotating member 533 is rotated (the drive unit 533d is lifted), the engagement between the drive unit 7533d on the left side and the protrusion 523L is delayed by the amount of the gap. Therefore, the right wing member 520
The start of the displacement of R to the second state is faster.

Next, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further pulled into the main body portion 531a through the states shown in FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b), the rotating member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the drive unit 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward, and the driving unit 7533d is lifted upward.
The first electric accessory 520 is in the second state shown in FIGS. 76 (c) and 76 (c).

In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the drive unit 7533d on the left side and the lower side (lower side of FIG. 75C) of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R. This drives the protrusion 523L to the drive unit 7.
While pushing up to a certain position by 533d to put the left wing member 520L in the second state, the center of gravity of the left wing member 520L is switched to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521L) in front view, and the left wing member 520L is moved by its own weight. It is formed by rotating to the first state.

Further, the inside of the drive unit 7533d on the right side and the lower side of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R (FIG. 7).
A gap is formed between the 5 (a) and the lower side).

Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 5
The start of the 20R can be started first, and the displacement of the left wing member 520L to the second state can be made later than the right wing member 520R.

The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75 (c) and 76 (c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (c) is the displacement from the first state to the second state described above. Since it is only the opposite of, the detailed explanation is omitted.

Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 5
The start of 20L can be preceded, and the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the first state can be preceded by the left wing member 520L.

Next, a case where the game ball enters the winning opening unit 500 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. 77 (a) and 77 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

77 (a) and 77 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 of FIG. 24 (b). Further, in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the first electric accessory 520 is the first from the second state.
When displaced to the state, the left wing member 520L is started first and the right wing member 52
The displacement of 0R to the first state is slower than that of the left wing member 520L.

That is, it is possible to instantaneously form a state in which only the right wing member 520R of the first electric accessory 520 is opened. At this time, when the game ball is inserted from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is on the front side (lower side in FIG. 77 (a)) by the bulging portion 524R. Will be guided to. Therefore, it is possible to easily collide the game ball with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

Since the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end portion on the front side, the bulging portion 524
It is easy to bounce the game ball that collided with L to the back side. Therefore, the game ball entered from the right wing member 520R can be easily entered into the second winning opening 140.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the first state, the bulging portion 5
By displacing the left wing member 520L on the side where 24L is formed on the front side and the right wing member 520R on the opposite side after the left wing member 520L, a game in which the ball is inserted during the displacement to the first state. The ball can be smoothly thrown to the second winning opening 140.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) is arranged at a position forming a closed state and the other wing member. Since the timing at which (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) is arranged at the position forming the closed state is different, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (side surface 526)
It is possible to make it difficult to pinch the game ball between L, 526R), and the pair of wing members 520L, 52 by that amount.
The facing interval of 0R can be narrowed. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

Next, the rotating member 8533 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82. In the first embodiment, the second protrusion 532 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the sliding member 532.
Although the case where c is formed has been described, in the eighth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball is formed on the rotating member 8533. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 8530 according to the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment includes the solenoid 531 and the solenoid 531.
A first case in which a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are arranged in a displaceable state inside. The member 534 is mainly provided with a second case member 536 attached to the back surface side of the first case member 534.

The sliding member 8532 is formed in a substantially E-shape when viewed from above, and has a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first portions protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a to the front side. Protrusion 53
It is mainly provided with 2b and a third protrusion 532e located between the two first protrusions 532b and projecting to the front side.

The sliding member 8532 has a dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction of the first case member 53.
It is formed smaller than the dimension between facing each other in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral surface of 4. As a result, the sliding member 8532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534.

The third projection 8532e is located above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, which will be described later, so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state can be regulated. That is, the lower end surface of the third protrusion 8532e is formed above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

The rotating member 8533 is formed by arranging two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape in the side view side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and connecting the facing portions on one end side by a connecting portion 533a. To. The gap between the two plates of the rotating member 8533 facing each other is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 8533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 8533 in the left-right direction (dimension between facing each other on the outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between facing each other inside the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. To. As a result, the rotating member 8533 can be arranged between the facing portions of the first projection 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 8533 has a rotating shaft 53 protruding from the bent portion having a substantially L-shaped side view to both sides in the left-right direction.
3c, a protrusion 533b protruding from the end on one end side of the substantially L-shaped side view to both sides in the left-right direction, and a drive unit 533d formed by being recessed at the tip on the other end side of the substantially L-shaped side view. It is mainly provided with a second protrusion 8533e projecting from the center position in the left-right direction of the portion 533a to the front side.

The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending to the front side, and is provided with an erection wall 8533e1 that is bent downward and erected at the tip of the protrusion. The erection wall 8533e1 is formed so as to be curved in a convex shape toward the front side in a side view, and the curved axis thereof is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533.

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81.
79 (a) and 79 (b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 80 (a) and 80 (b) show the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.
It is a front view of. 81 (a) and 81 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 79 and 80 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparently viewed. Further, in FIGS. 79 (a), 80 (a) and 81 (a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is set to the first state is shown in FIGS. 79 (b), 80 (b) and 81. ((
In b), the states in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state are illustrated. Further, FIG. 8
1 (a) and FIG. 81 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is the main body portion 531.
In the state of protruding from a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is on the front side (FIG. 79 (a)).
Pushed to the left side), the drive unit 533d is positioned downward. As a result, the first
The protrusion 523 of the electric accessory 520 is pushed downward to be in the first state.

Further, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward. In this case, the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82 (a)) from the tip of the erection wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the erection portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the erection wall 8
With 533e1, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b and being thrown to the second case member 535.

Further, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is operated to be displaced to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third protrusion 8532e.

In other words, the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) is applied to the pair of wing members 520L, 52.
A transmission mechanism for transmitting to 0R is provided, and the transmission mechanism has an open slide position (position shown in FIG. 79 (b)) and a closed slide position (position shown in FIG. 79 (a)) by the driving force of the driving means (displacement 531). A pair of wing members 520L that are rotated to the open rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 and the sliding member 8532 to the open slide position.
, 520R is opened and the sliding member 8532 is rotated to the closed rotation position by the slide displacement to the closed slide position, and the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are provided with a rotating member 8533 that can close at least the pair of wing members 8533, and the standing wall 8533e1. Is arranged on the rotating member 8533, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the open rotation position, the erection wall 8533e1 is arranged in the allowable position, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the closed rotation position, the erection wall 8533e1 Is placed in the regulated position, the sliding member 8532 is placed in the closed slide position, and the rotating member 853
In the state where 3 is arranged in the closed rotation position, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted by engaging the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, so that the game ball is second. It is possible to easily regulate the illegal entry of a ball into the winning opening.

That is, from a state in which the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed, for example, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are illegally forcibly released from the outside, or the rotating member 8533 is directly operated to obtain such a rotating member. Even if the 8533 is to be rotated to the open position, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted by the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, so that the erection wall 8533e1 is restricted. Can be maintained in position (ie, standing wall 8)
It is possible to prevent the 533e1 from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). as a result,
The erection wall 8533e1 can regulate the illegal entry of the game ball into the entrance.

Further, the third protrusion 8532 protruding from the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533).
The sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533) can be engaged with e and its third protrusion 8532e.
), And the third projection 8532e is projected along the direction of the slide displacement of the sliding member 8532. Therefore, the slide displacement of the sliding member 8532 is used.
Engagement and disengagement of the third projection 8532e and the connecting portion 533a can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

The engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533) to which the third protrusion 8532e can abut, and a hole or a recess (a hole or a recess into which the third protrusion 8532e can be inserted). It may be a hole drilled in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533 or a recess recessed). That is, it is sufficient that the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position can be restricted by the third projection 8532e coming into contact with the connecting portion 533a. In this case, it is preferable that the connecting portion 533a is a hole or a recess. The third protrusion 8532e is the connecting portion 5
As much as it is inserted into 33a, the space required for arranging the third protrusion 8532e can be suppressed to reduce the size, and by being inserted through the connecting portion 533a, the third protrusion 8532 can be inserted.
This is because e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third protrusion 8532e from the outside can be difficult.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pulled toward the back side (right side in FIG. 79 (b)), and the drive portion 533d is moved upward. Be displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 has a protrusion 533.
The second state is that b is pushed upward.

Further, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located on the back surface side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the restriction on the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is lifted. as a result,
The rotating member 8533 can be rotated to displace the first electric accessory 520.

Therefore, the drive unit 533d of the rotating member 8533 rotates toward the closed rotation position with the open side contact portion 8533d1 that abuts and opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when rotated toward the open rotation position. Since it is provided with a closing side contact portion 8533d2 that abuts and closes the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are used, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly released from the outside and rotate. Unauthorized access to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be difficult.

That is, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closed side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotating member 8533 is pressed by the wing members 520L and 520R, and the rotating member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. Try to rotate towards. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position can be regulated by the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. Displacement 8
It can be regulated by 533d2. That is, it is possible to regulate that the wing member is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly released from the outside, and it is possible to make it difficult for the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 to be illegally accessed from the outside.

When the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the rotating member 8533 is rotated to rotate the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1. The distance dimension L7 to (see FIG. 82 (b)) is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball entered in the second winning opening 140 is placed in the standing section 534.
The upper end surface of b can be rolled and thrown to the second case member 535.

Next, a case where the first electric accessory 520 is damaged will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82
(A) and FIG. 82 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. In addition, FIG. 82 (a)
And FIG. 82 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, FIG. 14 (a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 14 (b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. ..

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first electric accessory 520 are broken from the base end due to fraudulent acts, deterioration over time, etc., and the first electric accessory 520 is the first. When the state is changed to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is in a state of protruding from the main body portion 531a, so that the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward. To. Therefore, the erection wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the erection portion 534b and being thrown to the second case member 535.

Therefore, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or the pair of wing members 520.
Since the arrangement of the erection wall 8533e1 can be maintained at the restricted position when the L and 520R are open from the outside, it is possible to prevent the erection wall 8533e1 from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the second winning opening 140.

That is, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or the pair of wing members 520L.
, 520R is open from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated to operate the erection wall 853.
From the vertical tip of 3e1 (the end of the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20B)), the first case member 53
The distance dimension L6 to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in 4 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the first electric accessory 520 is the second winning opening 1 due to the fraudulent act of the player.
Even if the game ball can be thrown to 40, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning opening 140 and rolling. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 can be made to collide with the upright wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532 to stop the rolling of the game ball. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (the game ball can be thrown to the second winning opening 140) due to the fraudulent act of the player, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning opening 140. It can be easier to regulate the entry of balls.

Further, in this case, since the standing wall 8533e1 that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the second one. No separate member is required to prevent unauthorized entry into the winning opening 140. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that regulates the entry of the game ball and the second projection 8533e thereof.
Since the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the protrusion is integrally formed with the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

Next, the drive unit 9530 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. In the eighth embodiment, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is the main body 531.
The case where the movement of the first electric accessory 520 is restricted when the first electric accessory 520 is overhanging from a has been described.
In the ninth embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is movable when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 9530 according to the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment includes the solenoid 531 and the solenoid 531.
A first case in which a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 are arranged in a displaceable state inside. The member 534 is mainly provided with a second case member 536 attached to the back surface side of the first case member 534.

The rotating member 9533 is formed by arranging two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape in the side view side by side with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and connecting the facing portions on one end side by a connecting portion 533a. To. The gap between the two plates of the rotating member 9533 facing each other is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 9533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 9533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the facing surfaces of the outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between the facing surfaces inside the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. To. As a result, the rotating member 9533 can be arranged between the facing portions of the first projection 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 9533 has a rotating shaft 53 that protrudes from the bent portion having a substantially L-shaped side view to both sides in the left-right direction.
3c, a protrusion 533b protruding from the end on one end side of the side view substantially L-shape to both sides in the left-right direction, and a projecting portion 9533d protruding to the front side at the tip on the other end side of the side view substantially L-shape, and a connecting portion. It is mainly provided with a second protrusion 8533e projecting from the center position in the left-right direction of the 533a to the front side.

The projecting portion 9533d is formed so as to project from the end portion on the front side, and the upper portion thereof (FIG. 84 (FIG. 84).
a) The protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing members 520L and 520R are set to a length that allows contact with the side surface (upper part).

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86.
84 (a) and 84 (b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 85 (a) and 85 (b) show the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.
It is a front view of. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

In addition, in FIGS. 84 and 85, the state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are transparently shown is shown. Further, in FIGS. 84 (a), 85 (a) and 86 (a), the states in which the first electric accessory 520 is set to the first state are shown in FIGS. 84 (b), 85 (b) and 86. ((
In b), the states in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state are illustrated. Further, FIG. 8
6 (a) and FIG. 86 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is the main body portion 531.
In the state of protruding from a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is on the front side (FIG. 84 (a)).
Pushed by the left side), the projecting portion 9533f is positioned downward. As a result, the protrusion 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed downward to be in the first state.

In the ninth embodiment, an urging spring (not shown) is arranged on the rotating shaft of the first electric accessory 520, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the first electric accessory 520 to move to the first state side. The urging force that is rotationally displaced is always applied. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state by a force other than driving the solenoid 531 (for example, the shaking of the pachinko machine), it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from staying in the second state.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pulled toward the back side (right side in FIG. 79 (b)), and the projecting portion 9533f is moved upward. Is displaced to. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 has a protrusion 53.
The second state is that 3b is pushed upward.

In this case, the protrusion 523L and 523R of the first electric accessory 520 are always in contact with each other, so that the first electric accessory 520 can be maintained in the second state.

Further, by projecting the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from the main body portion 531a and displacing the projecting portion 9533f downward from the second state, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring. Displaced to one state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a case where the first electric accessory 520 is illegally operated will be described. 87 (a) and 87 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. Note that FIG. 8
7 (a) and FIG. 87 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 87 (a), the first
The state in which the electric accessory 520 is set to the first state is the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is the second state in FIG. 87 (b).
Each of the states is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b), the first electric accessory 520 is operated by a player's fraudulent act in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a. When the first state is changed to the second state, only the first electric accessory 520 is rotationally displaced.

Therefore, since the tip of the erection wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward, the game ball rolls on the upper end surface of the erection portion 534b by the erection wall 8533e1 and is second.
It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown to the case member 535.

This (in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a)
In this case, as described above, the third projection 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the operation of the standing wall 8533e1 from the player side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the store from being disadvantaged due to the fraudulent activity of the player.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that regulates the entry of the game ball and the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the second protrusion are the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8.
Since it is integrally formed with the 532, the number of parts of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from being destroyed by the fraudulent act of the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss on the store side due to the fraudulent act of the player.

That is, in the ninth embodiment, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are provided with an urging spring for urging the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction, and the rotating member 9533 is provided with the pair of wing members 5 when rotated toward the open rotation position.
A projecting portion 9533f that abuts on and opens the 20L and 520R is provided, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the closing rotation position, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the urging force of the urging spring. When the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are illegally forcibly released from the outside, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are not brought into contact with the rotating member 9533, and the external force due to the forced opening is applied to the rotating member 9533. Can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, the rotating member 9533, or the sliding member 8532 from being damaged.

As an urging means for constantly exerting an urging force that is rotationally displaced toward the first state side on the first electric accessory 520, a spring (torsion) that urges the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by an elastic recovery force. Not only springs and coil springs), but also magnets that urge a pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by an attractive force are exemplified.

Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. In the first embodiment, the case where the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is displaced small (or large) in a non-linear manner with the displacement of the displacement member 670 has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the rotating member 10678 is displaced. By making it change, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed.
The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 according to the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 10670.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment is the extension member 6.
71, an extension member 10671 arranged to face the extension member 671, a decorative unit 672 connected to the extension member 10671 and the extension member 671, and a state in which the extension member can rotate. It is mainly provided with a rotating member 10678 to be arranged.

The extension member 10671 is formed in a substantially L-shape in the front view, has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction in the front view at the end on the longitudinal side, and projects outward to the left and right at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction on the longitudinal side. It is mainly provided with a connecting protrusion 671b to be formed and a rotating shaft 10671e formed in a columnar shape on the shaft support hole 671a side of the connecting protrusion 671b.

The rotating member 10678 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a side view, and the extending member 10671 intersects the longitudinal direction of the extending member 10671 at a substantially right angle with the longitudinal direction of the extending member 10671 in the side view.
Is arranged in.

The rotating member 10678 has a shaft support hole 10678a penetrating in the left-right direction and a through hole 10678 formed through the shaft support hole 10671a of the extending member 10671 on one end side in the longitudinal direction.
It is mainly provided with b and an inclined surface 10678c formed by notching on the side surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction.

The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotation shaft 10671e of the extension member 10671 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft 10671e. Therefore, the rotation axis 1067
By inserting 1e into the shaft support hole 10677a and screwing it to the rotating shaft 10671e, the rotating member 10678 can be arranged in a rotatable state on the extending member 10671.

The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

Next, the operation of the rotating member 10678 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91.
FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91 (a) and 91 (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG. 90.

Note that FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 58 (b). In addition, FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (
In b), the state when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced is illustrated, and FIG. 91 (b) shows.
Then, a cross section in a state where the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are in contact with each other is shown.

As shown in FIG. 90, in the vertical displacement unit 600L in the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 670 is arranged on the upper side and the displacement member 10670 is arranged on the lower side, and the axes of the displacement members 670 and 10670 are arranged. The axes of the support holes 671a are arranged coaxially. That is, in the first embodiment, the lower displacement member 670 of the displacement members 670 arranged in pairs in the up-down direction is changed to the displacement member 10670. Since the driving means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decorative units 672 of the vertically arranged displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced in a direction approaching each other, the extending members 671, 10671 are brought closer to each other.

In the state where the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are in contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the inclined surface 10678c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extending member 671. This will result in
The rotating member 1067 so that the inclined surface 10678c is substantially parallel to the side surface of the extension member 671.
8 is rotated about the shaft support hole 10678a (in FIG. 91B, the rotating member 10678 is rotated counterclockwise about the shaft support hole 10678a).

Therefore, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 10678c and the shaft support hole 10678a is also rotated in the same manner. By displacing the position of the through hole 10678b, the position where the through hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side to the base end side of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the urging force acting on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are in contact with each other, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 arranged below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced while the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 from being separated from each other.

Further, since the extension member 10671 in which the rotation member 10678 is arranged is the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the drive means 680 for driving the displacement member 10670,
Where the driving force is smaller than the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683) when the driving force is transmitted from the driving motor KM3, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is caused by the displacement of the rotating member 10678. Can be increased to make up for the shortage of driving force. As a result, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 from coming apart from each other.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, the vertical displacement unit 11600 of the eleventh embodiment
L will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted from both the left and right sides of the displacement member 670 has been described, but in the eleventh embodiment, the driving force is transmitted from only one side of the displacement member 11670. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals.
The description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in FIGS. 92 to 94, the vertical displacement unit 600L is similarly shown in FIGS. 61 to 63.
A U is added to the end of the code of the displacement member 670 and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side of the displacement member 670, and the displacement member 670 is arranged on the lower side of the vertical displacement unit 600L.
And the reference numeral D is added to the end of the reference numeral of the driving means for driving the displacement member 670.

The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. 92 to 94 are schematic views of the vertical displacement unit 11600L according to the eleventh embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 92 to 94, the transition states of the displacement member 11670 are shown in order.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged only on one side. That is, in the first embodiment, the extension members 671 arranged symmetrically on the displacement member 670 are, in the eleventh embodiment,
It is assumed that the extension member 671 is arranged on only one of them.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive means 680 is on the drive side (the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683).
Only the side connected to) is formed, and the extension member 671 is connected to the drive means on the drive side. Therefore, the extension members 671 of the displacement members 11670, which are arranged in pairs in the vertical displacement unit 11600L, are arranged vertically and horizontally in the opposite direction.

As shown in FIG. 93, when the vertically arranged displacement members 11670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing both in the same direction from the state of FIG. 93, the decorative units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction while the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are in contact with each other.

In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, the drive of the decorative unit 672 on the opposite side to the drive side may be slowed down, and a gap may be formed between the two decorative units 672. However, since the extension member 671 is arranged on the left and right opposite sides in the vertical direction, the end portion of one decorative unit 672 on the opposite side to the drive side is placed on the other decorative unit 67.
It can be pushed at the end of the drive side of 2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672.

In this case, it is preferable to delay the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decorative unit 672. By delaying the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decorative unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672.

More specifically, by accelerating the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction side of the decorative unit 672, the decorative unit whose drive side end portion of the decorative unit 672 driven earlier is driven later. The end opposite to the drive side of the 672 can be pushed out. On the other hand, the end portion of the decorative unit 672 driven earlier on the opposite side to the drive side is brought into contact with the end portion of the decorative unit 672 driven later on the drive side with a stronger force. As a result, when the two displacement members 11670 are displaced with the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672.

Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is set to one side, the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) can be easily deformed. Therefore, by accelerating the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction side of the decorative unit 672, the displacement members 11670 (extended member 671) are deformed and the elastic force when the displacement returns. Can be used to prevent the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672.

Next, the winning opening unit 500 of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. In the first embodiment, the front base 511 and the back base 51 of the winning opening unit 500
Although the case where the thickness of 2 is formed to be substantially constant has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, the front base 51 has been described.
The thickness of 1 and the back base 512 is partially changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 according to the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 9A is a top view.
5 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). In FIG. 95 (a), the front base 511 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 95 (b), the front base 511 is shown opaquely. In addition, FIG. 95 (b)
), The rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is shown by a two-dot chain line together with the reference numeral of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. 24B. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed to have a partially different thickness in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95B) on the left and right sides with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. That is, the second
A front side bulging portion 12511f that bulges to the back side in the upper right side of the winning opening 140 is provided.

Further, the back surface base 512 is formed so as to have a partially different thickness in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95B) on the left and right sides of the second winning opening 140. That is, the back side bulging portion 12512d that bulges toward the back side at the upper left side of the second winning opening 140 is provided.

The front bulging portion 12511f and the back bulging portion 12512d have a pair of wing members 520L.
It is formed outside the displacement region of 520R. As a result, a pair of wing members 520L, 520R
Collision with the front bulging portion 12511f and the back bulging portion 12512d is suppressed.

Further, the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d are left and right in the left-right direction (FIG. 95B) from the upper surface of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the open state of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. Direction) Located on the outside. As a result, the game ball that may flow down from the upstream side of the first electric accessory 520 and be thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R is surely collided with the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d. Can be done.

The front side bulging portion 12511f is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R facing the forming position of the bulging portion 524R in the front-rear direction. In other words, the front side bulging portion 12511f is formed on the side surface of the bulging portion 524R located in the front-rear direction opposite to the forming position in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the back surface side bulging portion 12512d is formed on the side surface of the left wing member 520L facing the forming position of the bulging portion 524L in the front-rear direction. In other words, the back surface side bulging portion 12512d is formed on the side surface of the bulging portion 524L located in the front-rear direction opposite to the forming position in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is bulged on the front side 1251.
It can be guided to the back side by colliding with 1f. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be brought closer to the back side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R can be easily made to collide with the bulging portion 524R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down on the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can be made to collide with the rear side bulging portion 12512d and guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be brought closer to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can be easily collided with the bulging portion 524L.

Therefore, the bulging portion 52 of the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R).
By contacting the 4L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably deviated. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140, and the ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (either of the wing members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (either of the wing members 520L and 520R). The game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the other wing member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L and 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by allowing the game ball to enter the entrance.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the throwing speed can be slowed down by colliding the game ball thrown to the wing members 520L and 520R with the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the wing members 520L and 520R can be slowed down. As a result, the impact when colliding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be reduced, and damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

Next, the winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. The winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a protrusion protruding between the front base 511 and the back base 512 of the first embodiment. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 96A is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and is FIG. 9;
6 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in the XCVIb-XCVIb line of FIG. 96 (a). In FIG. 96A, the front base 511 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 96B, the front base 511 is shown opaquely. In addition, FIG. 96
In (b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is shown by a two-dot chain line together with the reference numeral of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. 24 (b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 has a rear base 51 on the left side of the second winning opening 140.
A protrusion 13511 g protruding to the 2 side is formed. Further, the rear base 512 is formed with a protrusion 13512e protruding toward the front base 511 on the right side of the second winning opening 140.

The protrusions 13511g and 13512e are formed on the outside of the displacement region of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. As a result, a pair of wing members 520L, 520R and a protrusion 13511
Collision between g and the protrusion 13512e is suppressed.

The protrusion 13511g is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R on the same side as the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 524R. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512e has a bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.
It is formed on the side surface facing the formation position in the front-back direction of.

As a result, the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can be made to collide with the protrusion 13511g and guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be brought closer to the front side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R, it can be prevented from colliding with the bulging portion 524R. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 520R from being damaged.

Further, the game ball thrown from the right side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526R of the wing member 520R does not collide with the protrusion 13511g formed above the wing member 520R, and the side surface 52
The ball will be thrown to 6R. The game ball in this case can be guided to the back side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13512e and be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be brought closer to the back side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L, it can be prevented from colliding with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 520L from being damaged.

Further, the game ball thrown from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526L of the wing member 520L does not collide with the protrusion 13512e formed above the wing member 520L, and the side surface 52
The ball will be thrown to 6L. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L when rolling the side surface 526L.

Therefore, the bulging portion 52 of the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R).
By contacting the 4L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably deviated. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140, and the ball clogging can be suppressed.

Further, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (either of the wing members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (either of the wing members 520L and 520R). The game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the other wing member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L and 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by allowing the game ball to enter the entrance.

Further, since the protrusions 13511g and the protrusions 13512e can reduce the number of game balls that collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the wing members 520L and 520R, the wing member 520 can be reduced.
The durability of L, 520R can be improved.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the wing members 14520L, 145 of the 14th embodiment
20R (first variable device 14520) will be described. Wing member 1452 of the 14th embodiment
The 0L and 14520R are formed so that the width dimensions of the bulging portions 524L and 524R in the front-rear direction are different from those of the first embodiment. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 97A is a perspective front view of the left wing member 520L according to the 14th embodiment, and FIG. 9A is a perspective view.
7 (b) is a perspective front view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 98 (a) shows the winning opening unit 5.
It is a cross-sectional view of 00, and FIG. 98 (b) is an XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 98 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the left wing member 520L in a line, and FIG. 98 (c) is XC of FIG. 98 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the right wing member 520R in the line VIIIc-XCVIIIc.

In addition, in FIG. 97 (a) and FIG. 97 (b), the perspective direction in the left-right direction is shown to be opposite to the left-right. Further, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 98 (a), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R is shown by a two-dot chain line together with the reference numeral of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. 24 (b). Furthermore, virtual line K
The front direction of S1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L is formed in a substantially triangular shape in the front view and has a size larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. Left wing member 14520
L is a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction and a through hole 521L thereof at the lower end portion in the gravity direction.
A recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the surface, a protrusion 523L projecting from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back side, and a concave portion in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the through hole 521L side. A pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R in a closed state with a recessed portion 525L to be formed.
14526L on the side surface facing each other and the bulging portion 14 protruding from the side surface 14526L.
It is formed mainly with 524L.

The side surface 14526L has an inclined surface 14526L1 formed so as to be inclined upward from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 1452 formed on the front side from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction.
It is equipped with 6L2.

The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the back surface side (left side in FIG. 98B) toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side. As a result, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256L, the game ball thrown to the inclined surface 14526L1 is tilted downward to the smooth surface 145.
It can be guided to the 2L2 side.

Further, the bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 98B) of the inclined surface 14526L1. The bulging portion 14524L has a width dimension in the front-rear direction of the wing member 1452.
It is formed to be smaller than half the width in the front-back direction of 0L. That is, the width in the front-rear direction of the bulge portion 15254L is smaller than the width in the front-rear direction of the bulge portion 14524L.

As described above, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L is rolled to the smooth surface 14526L2 side.
It is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526L collides with the bulging portion 14524L.

On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed into a substantially triangular shape in front view and has a size larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The right wing member 14520R has a through hole 521R penetrating in the lower end in the gravity direction in the front-rear direction, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521R, and a recess from the vicinity of the through hole 521R to the back side. Protrusion 523R protruding from
And the recessed portion 525R recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R on the end surface on the through hole 521R side.
Side surfaces 1452 of facing surfaces of a pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R in the closed state
6R and a bulging portion 14524R protruding from the side surface 14526R thereof are mainly provided.

The side surface 14526R has an inclined surface 14526R1 formed so as to be inclined upward from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 1452 formed on the front side from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction.
It is equipped with 6R2.

The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the back surface side (right side in FIG. 98C) toward the smooth surface 14526R2 side. As a result, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256R, the game ball thrown to the inclined surface 14526R1 is tilted downward to the smooth surface 145.
It can be guided to the 2R2 side.

Further, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 98B) of the inclined surface 14526R1. The bulging portion 14524L has a width dimension in the front-rear direction of the wing member 1452.
It is formed larger than half of the width in the front-rear direction of 0L. That is, the width in the front-rear direction of the inclined surface 14526R1 is larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 14524L. Therefore, the left wing member 1
The bulging portion 1 of the right wing member 14520R rather than the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 14524L of 4520L.
The width in the front-rear direction of 4524R is formed to be larger.

As described above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 is rolled to the smooth surface 14526R2 side.
It is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526R will collide with the bulging portion 14524R.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th embodiment is formed in such a form that a game ball flows down from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 and is easily thrown to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the open wing members 520L, 520R. To. More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a pair of wing members 520L,
The first through gate 66 with the 520R open is arranged on the left side of the center frame 86, and is configured to launch the game ball toward the left side of the center frame 86 during time reduction or probabilistic change. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game board 13 flows down the left side of the game board 13 as a whole, and is thrown from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (a pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R) to the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R. It will be easier.

Therefore, compared to the right wing member 14520R, the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L
There is a problem that a large number of game balls are thrown, the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L wears quickly, and the left wing member 14520L becomes fragile.

On the other hand, in the 14th embodiment, the inclined surfaces 1452 are on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R.
6L1,14526R1 is formed, and its inclined surface 14526L1,14526R1 is formed.
The bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are formed in the bulging portion 14 on the side where many game balls are thrown.
Since the 524L and 14524R are formed small in the front-rear direction, the wing member 1 on the side where a large number of balls are thrown
By reducing the probability that the game ball will collide with the bulging portion 14524L of 4520L, the bulging portion 1
It is possible to prevent the 4524L from being worn quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing members 14520L and 14520R on the side where many game balls are thrown from becoming fragile.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable winning device 150 according to the fifteenth embodiment.
65 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed on the pair of wing members 520L and 520R has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c are formed on the variable winning device 65. Will be done. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 99 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 99 (b).
) Is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the XCIXb-XCIXb line of FIG. 99. FIG. 100
(A) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13, and FIG. 100 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along the Cb-Cb line in FIG. 100 (a).

Note that FIGS. 99 (a) and 100 (a) correspond to the partially enlarged views of FIG. 29. Further, FIG. 99 shows a closed state of the variable winning device 15065, and FIG. 100 shows an open state of the variable winning device 15065. Further, in FIG. 100 (b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is shown by a two-dot chain line together with the reference numeral of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. 24 (b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

Further, the closed state of the variable winning device 15065 is the variable winning device 15 formed in a plate state.
The plane of 065 is positioned substantially parallel to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. On the other hand, in the open state of the variable winning device 15065, the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is positioned substantially orthogonal to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game ball flowing down the game area is a specific winning opening (large opening opening). ) It is in a state where the ball can enter 65a.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable winning device 15065 is formed in a long plate-like body on the left and right sides, and is rotatably arranged with respect to the game board 13 with one end on the back surface side as an axis. again,
The variable winning device 15065 is connected to a driving device (not shown) on the back side, and by applying a driving force to the driving device, the variable winning device 15065 can be displaced between the closed position and the open position. Will be done.

Further, in the variable winning device 15065, two bulging portions 15065b and 15065c are formed so as to protrude on the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side in the open state. In addition, the variable winning device 1506
The side surface 15065a of 5 is formed so as to be inclined downward from both the left and right sides toward the center side. As a result, the game ball thrown to the side surface 15065a can be rolled toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and entered into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side of the front view of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and is formed by being connected to the end surface on the front side in the open state (state of FIG. 100B). The bulging portion 15065c is located on the right side of the front view of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and is formed by being connected to the end surface on the back side in the alveolar state (state of FIG. 100B).

That is, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are designated winning openings (large opening openings) 65a.
It is formed on both the left and right sides with a gap in between, and is formed at different positions in the front-rear direction. As a result, when the game ball is thrown to the left and right sides of the variable winning device 15065 in the open state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding in front of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and bouncing back to the left and right sides. ..

More specifically, the game ball thrown to the left side of the front view of the side surface 15065a collides with the bulging portion 15065b when it is rolled to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a side, and is guided to the back side. To. On the other hand, the game ball thrown to the right side of the front view of the side surface 15065a collides with the bulging portion 15065c when it is rolled to the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a side, and is guided to the front side.

Therefore, the bulging portion 1 positions the game ball thrown from both the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a in the front-rear direction.
It can be displaced by the 5065b and the bulge 15065c. Therefore, the side surface 15
When the game balls are thrown on both the left and right sides of 065a and the left and right game balls collide in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the bounce (repulsion) direction can be set to the front-back direction. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

Further, when the game ball is thrown from one of the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a, the bulging portion 15065
By colliding the game ball with one of b or the bulging portion 15065c and displacing the position in the front-rear direction, when the game ball rolls on the front side of the side surface 15065a in the left-right direction, the bulging portion 150
It can collide with the other of 65b or the bulge 15065c. As a result, side 150
It is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from one side of the 65a from rolling in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and coming out to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

The side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to have a width equal to or wider than the width of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and a pair of bulging portions. The 15065b and 15065c are arranged at positions sandwiching the entrance in front view, and are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) on the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c, the game ball can be reliably deflected. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

Further, one bulging portion 15065b, 15065c and the other bulging portion 15065b, 150
The variable winning device 150 is arranged so that the 65c is arranged at a different position in a direction orthogonal to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a).
When a game ball enters the side surface 15065a of 65 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. Therefore, one side (or the other side) in the width direction toward the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065.
It is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered from the above, passing through the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065. As a result, the game ball can be entered into the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a to improve the interest of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the engagement between the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the 16th embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged with each other by the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third protrusion 8532e coming into contact with each other. Third protrusion 16532e in the recess of portion 533a
Is done by inserting. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 (a) shows the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 85 in the 16th embodiment.
30 is a front view, FIG. 101 (b) is FIG. 101 (a) the first in the CIb-CIb line.
It is sectional drawing of the electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530, and FIG. 101 (c) is FIG. 101.
It is sectional drawing of the 1st electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 in the CIc-CIc line of (b).

As shown in FIG. 101, the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the 16th embodiment is formed with a recessed portion 16533a1 recessed from the back surface side to the front side at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view.

Further, the third protrusion 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed so as to project at a position facing the recessed portion 16533a1 in the front-rear direction. The front view shape of the third protrusion 16532e is formed into a horizontally long rectangle slightly smaller than the recessed portion 16533a1, and the tip is formed into a tapered shape.

As a result, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed, the recess 16
The third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside the 533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged with each other.

Further, in this case, since the engaging portion is the recessed portion 16533a1, the third protrusion 16532e
Is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, so that the space required for arranging the third protrusion 16532e can be suppressed to reduce the size, and the third protrusion is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1. The protrusion 16532e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third protrusion 16532e from the outside can be difficult.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, the sliding member 1573 in the 17th embodiment.
2 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the erection wall 532c1 is located upstream of the sensor device SE1 arranged on the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 has been described. In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the erection wall 17532c1 is arranged on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the 17th embodiment. 103 (a) and 103 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

In FIG. 102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown transparently. Further, in FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a), the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, and in FIGS. 102 (b) and 102 (b), the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state. Each of these states is illustrated. Further, FIGS. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are shown in FIG. 17 (
Corresponds to the cross sections of a) and FIG. 17 (b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 according to the 17th embodiment is
The erection wall 17532c1 is formed so as to project from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (lower side in FIG. 102 (a)). The erection wall 17532c1 includes an erection wall 17532c1 whose tip is set at a position exceeding the lower end surface of the second case member 535 and whose tip is bent toward the front side.

The length of the standing wall 17532c1 to the front side is set below the sensor device SE1 whose upper and lower side surfaces are arranged on the second case member 535 when the first electric accessory 520 is closed. Set to the positioned length.

Further, the second case member 535 is formed with an opening 17535b that is formed through in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103 (a)). The second protrusion 17532c is arranged so as to be inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Further, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-rear direction is set to be larger than the slide width (driving width of the solenoid 531) of the sliding member 17532 that slides and displaces in the front-back direction. As a result, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction with the second protrusion 17532c inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the erection wall 17532c1 is located on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1 for gaming. You can regulate the insertion of the ball. On the other hand, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the standing wall 1
The 7532c1 is arranged on the back side of the opening (hole for detecting the passage of the game ball) of the sensor device SE1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the game ball can be inserted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a case where the first electric accessory is forcibly put into the second state due to a player's fraud will be described. 104 (a) and 104 (b) show the winning opening unit 500.
It is a cross-sectional view of. In addition, FIG. 104 (a) and FIG. 104 (b) are shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20.
Corresponds to each of the cross sections of (b). Further, FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state, and FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened by the player's fraudulent act. When the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the position of the sliding member 17532 in the front-rear direction is the same as that of the closed state, as in the first embodiment.

Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly opened, the erection wall 17532c1 is arranged on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game ball into which the game ball is inserted from the second winning opening 140 is stagnant on the upper surface of the erection wall 17532c1.

In this case, the separation distance from the sensor device SE1 to the upper surface of the erection wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension substantially matching the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball fastened to the upper surface of the erection wall 17532c1 is always detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, when the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric accessory 520 has been illegally released. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent activity of the player and notify the store operator of the fraudulent activity of the player.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment includes a sensor device SE1 for detecting a game ball entered in the second winning opening 140, and the erection wall 17532c1 has a restricted position downstream of the sensor device SE1. At the same time, the game ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, for example, when the wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened and the game ball is illegally flowed in from the ball entry port, the sensor device The state in which the SE1 has detected the game ball can be continued. Therefore, by determining whether the detection by the sensor device SE1 is continued for more than a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that the game ball has been illegally flowed in.

Next, the rotating member 18812 of the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 105. In the second embodiment, the protrusion 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812 is the hub 812.
Although the case where the protrusions are formed at a constant radial distance from the axis of a has been described, in the eighteenth embodiment, the protrusions 18812a1 are formed at different radial distances from the axis of the hub 812a.
The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 105 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 according to the eighteenth embodiment.
FIG. 105 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 18812 in the CVb-CVb line of FIG. 105 (a).

As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 according to the eighteenth embodiment is provided with a protrusion 18812a1 that hemispherically protrudes toward the edge portion 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 arranged so as to face each other. Have more than one.

The protrusions 18812a1 are formed with different radial distances from the axes of the adjacent protrusions 18812a and the hub 812a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow generated by the first (point located on the rotation side) protrusion 18812a1 is transferred to the second (rotation rear side of the previous protrusion 18812a1) protrusion 18812a1. It can be easily collided.
Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, it is possible to easily generate an air flow. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 facing each other to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, the relationship between the accommodation unit 880, the inner reel unit 810, and the outer reel unit 820 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. In the first embodiment,
Although the case where the side wall portion 881 of the accommodation unit 880 is formed in a plate-like body is described, the side wall portion 881 in the 19th embodiment is formed with a plurality of openings. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

106 (a) and 12 (b) show the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the 19th embodiment.
It is a cross-sectional view of. In addition, in FIG. 106 (a) and FIG. 106 (b), the outer reel unit 82
The state in which 0 is transitioned (rotational displacement) is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 106 (b), the opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 106 (a), a plurality of openings 19881d formed through in the left-right direction are formed in the side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30 (a)) arranged on the left side of the front view of the decorative design display device 800. Will be done.

The openings 19881d are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction about the rotation axes of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The formation angle of the adjacent openings 19881d is
Spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 and spokes 82 of the outer reel unit 820
It is set to be substantially the same as the formation angle of 2. Further, the opening dimension of the opening 19881d in the circumferential direction is set smaller than the width dimension of the spokes 812c and the spoke 822 in the circumferential direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812) is rotated by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position.
c) can be placed next to the opening 19881d. That is, the opening 19881d can be covered in side view by the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c).

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the inflow of air from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812c) is arranged at a position in the circumferential direction different from the opening 19881d by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position. be able to.

Thereby, it is possible to allow air to flow in from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated. That is, by making the inflow path of air the shortest and reducing the air resistance, it is possible to easily allow air to flow into the inside of the decorative symbol display device 800 (accommodation unit 880).

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated to be decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 so that the player can visually recognize other symbols, the inflow of air from the opening 19881d is restricted to the inner reel 811. The display can be easily made visible to the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 are cleaned by allowing the inflow of intake air from the opening 19881d. It can be done easily.

Although the present invention has been described above based on each of the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to each of the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the bulging portions 524L, 52 of the pair of left and right wing members 520L, 520R.
Although the case of forming symmetrically other than 4R has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing members 520L and 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side so that the wing members 520L and 520R have the same shape. In this case, the wing member 520L
, 520R can be formed with the same parts, so by sharing the parts, the wing member 520L,
The manufacturing cost of 520R can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the inclined portion 625a of the reflective member 625 is formed on a smooth surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curved and formed in a convex state toward the light transmitting portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed, and the light can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In the first and eleventh embodiments described above, the case where the number of components arranged is different has been described as an embodiment in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member) have different rigidity (dimensions, materials, etc. of the constituent members), and the driving force (magnitude,) transmitted between one side and the other side. Those with different transmission times (transmission time, transmission timing, etc.), those with different connection states (for example, the number of connection parts, rattling amount of connection parts, etc.) between the components on one side and the other side, one side and the other side The easiness of displacement to the other party (the urging force received from the urging means, gravity, resistance at the time of displacement (slide or rotation), etc.) may be different, or a combination thereof may be used.

As a result, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the drive means 6
The 80U and the drive means 680D have their own high-rigidity side (low side) as the other party's low-rigidity side (the other side).
You can face the higher side). Therefore, in a state where the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680 are brought into contact with each other.
Each of D can form a state in which the other party is pushed (advanced) on the high-rigidity side and the other party is accepted (backward) on the low-rigidity side. As a result, the facing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the closed state by the urging spring has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by disposing a magnetic material inside the first electric accessory 520 and arranging a magnet on the front base 511 or the back base 512, the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the closed state by the magnetic force of the magnet. It may be something to make.

In the first and eleventh embodiments described above, the case where the number of components arranged is different has been described as an embodiment in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as an embodiment in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) have different configurations, the rigidity of the constituent members (dimensions of constituent members, number of arrangements). , Materials, etc.), the components connected to each other (for example, the number of connected portions, the amount of rattling of the connected portions, etc.) are different, or a combination thereof may be used. Due to the difference in these configurations, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing are different, and the support modes of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are biased to one side, respectively.

In the first embodiment, the case where the erection wall 532c1 is slidably formed inside the first case member 534 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the inside of the main body portion 531a, the standing wall 532c1 may be projected from the inside of the second winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning opening 140, even if the wing members 520L and 520R are opened illegally, the inside of the second winning opening 140 (standing). Wall 53
It is possible to prevent the game ball from being stagnant in front of 2c1). As a result, the player's fraud can be prevented.

In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the case where the game ball is guided in the front-rear direction by changing the side surface shape between the front base 511 and the back base 512 facing each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. ..

For example, magnets may be arranged inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the game ball may be guided in the front-rear direction by the attractive force of the magnets. This eliminates the need to narrow the space between the front base 511 and the back base 512, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the front base 511 and the back base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the attractive force of the magnet is such that the game ball cannot be held on the attractive surface of the magnet. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being attracted to the side surfaces of the front base 511 and the back base 512.

In the second and eighteenth embodiments, a plurality of protrusions 2 are formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812.
Although the case where 812a1 and 18812a1 are formed has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed on the side surface of the hub 812a facing the edge portion 824a. Also in this case, the air flow can be generated by the uneven shape of the groove as in the second and eighteenth embodiments. As a result, the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 82
Air can be sent between the two facing each other to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 15065 is arranged so as to be rotatable and displaceable with respect to the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning device 15065 is arranged so as to be slidable and displaceable in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is set to be immersed in the game board 13 and the game ball is placed in the specific winning opening 65a. In the open state, the variable winning device 15065 may be extended to the front side of the game board 13 so that the game ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 65a.

<First control example>
Next, the first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 155. In the first control example, control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment (control related to the game of the pachinko machine 10, operation control for the variable display device unit 80, light emission control of various lamps, etc.) The related processing) will be explained. In this control example, by controlling the operation of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display unit 1600, and the displacement member 670, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed to the player in various display operation modes. It is controlled to. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a game that he / she never gets tired of.

Further, in this control example, a double reel structure in which the outer reel 821 is provided so as to cover the inner reel 811 is provided, and further, the inside (display surface of the inner reel 811) is provided as an area constituting the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. It has a transmission region 821a1 (see FIG. 109) that allows the transparent region 821a1 (see FIG. 109) and a non-transmission region 821a2, 821a3 (see FIG. 109) that does not transmit the inside (display surface of the inner reel 811). With this configuration, for example, the transmission region 821a1 of the outer reel 821 is provided at a position facing the display window 880 for making the combination of the third symbols for showing the lottery result of the special symbol visible to the player. By locating the position, the operation mode of the inner reel 811 can be visually recognized by the player, and by locating the non-transparent regions 821a2 and 821a3 of the outer reel 821, the operation mode of the inner reel 811 can be visually recognized by the player. Can be made invisible.

With this configuration, a wide variety of reel displays can be executed in the area of the display window 880 where the size is limited due to the structure of the pachinko machine 10, and the effect of effect can be enhanced. In addition, by rotating the outer reel 821, it is possible to create a state in which the operation mode of the inner reel 811 is invisible to the player. Therefore, for example, an operation of positioning the inner reel 811 to the initial state is performed. Operation content (for example, twice as fast as a normal effect pattern) that is different from the normal one (not set as an effect pattern (variable pattern)) that is executed when performing or when you want to stop and display a specific symbol. When performing the operation (the operation of rotating the reel 811 or rotating the reel 811 at a speed of 1/3 of the normal effect pattern), the operation content of the reel 811 should not be visually recognized by the player. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the reel display by the double reel structure described above, the player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol by the 7-segment display using the segment display device 600. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol in a wider variety of display modes, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. In addition, in this control example, the display method of the symbol (third symbol) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is different depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example displays the lottery result of the special symbol according to the reel stop mode, unlike the conventional gaming machine that displays the lottery result of the special symbol using the liquid crystal screen. It is configured in. In such a gaming machine, information other than the lottery result of a special symbol using a liquid crystal screen like a conventional gaming machine, for example, a continuous production in which the expectation of winning a big hit increases as the game continues (for example, a pseudo-continuous production). Since there is no display area for notifying the player of the information indicating the number of times the game has been executed, there is a problem that it is difficult to clearly inform the player of the process for the continuous production. On the other hand, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is operated to change the display area that the player can see, so that the player is notified of the process for the continuous effect (the number of times the continuous effect is executed). It is composed. As a result, even in the pachinko machine 10 that does not have a liquid crystal display device, the process of continuous production can be easily recognized by the player.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which the player is notified of the process of continuous production by changing the display area of the reel display, but other configurations are used to inform the player of the process of continuous production. It may be configured to notify. Specifically, the color of the reel display (the color of the backlight that illuminates the reel display surface) can be changed, or the sound effect during reel operation can be changed according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed. It may be configured.

Further, in this control example, when the above-mentioned continuous effect is executed in the pachinko machine 10, the display area of the reel display is gradually narrowed according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed. With this configuration, the narrower the display area of the reel display for the player, the higher the expectation of the big hit, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine. ..

Further, by operating the displacement member 670 to narrow the display area of the reel display, the number of symbols stopped and displayed in the display area (the number of effective lines for displaying the combination of symbols for showing the lottery result of the special symbol). ) Is reduced, so that it is easy for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol.

In the first control example, the time (variable time) from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result is configured according to the set gaming state. Specifically, in the game state (time saving state, probability variation state) in which the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed, a short variable time is likely to be set in order to increase the number of lottery of the special symbol executed per unit time, which is special. In the gaming state (normal state) in which it is difficult to execute the lottery of symbols, it is configured so that a long fluctuation time can be easily set in order to reduce the period during which the lottery of special symbols is not performed (the period during which the special symbols are not changed). is doing.

In this control example configured in this way, the speed at which the third symbol displayed in the display area is changed in the gaming state (normal state) in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be set is slow (for example, 0.2 seconds) reel display. To execute 7-segment display with a high speed (for example, 0.05 seconds) to change the symbol displayed in the display area in the game state (probability change state, time reduction state) in which a short fluctuation time is easily set. It is composed. As a result, even when a plurality of display methods having different variable speeds of the third symbol are used, the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is surely stopped and displayed after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time. Can be made to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the structure of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. In addition, FIG. 107 is a point that a configuration with a reference numeral is added to the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in order to facilitate the explanation of this control example. , The difference is that the codes are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 107, the variable display device unit 80 includes a decorative symbol display device 800 and a 7-segment display unit 1600, and is configured to be able to notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol by a different display method. ing. The decorative symbol display device 800 is composed of a left rotation unit 800a, a middle rotation unit 800b, and a right rotation unit 800c, and each rotation unit 800a to 800c is composed of a double reel structure (FIG. 32). reference). A display window 880 for allowing the player to visually recognize a part of the symbol (third symbol) stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol display device 800 is formed in the central portion of the game board 13.

With this configuration, the player can be notified of the lottery result of the special symbol by the combination of the symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in the display window 880. Hereinafter, the area in the display window 880, that is, the area visible to the player among the symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol display device 800, is referred to as a symbol display area (simply referred to as a display area). ). Further, the details of the display symbols in the double reel structure of each rotation unit 800a to 800c will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

Next, the 7-segment display unit 1600 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the display area of each rotation unit 800a to 800c, and is used as a part of the 7-segment display for displaying predetermined identification information. Specifically, it is composed of a rectangle (6 segments) having 1 horizontal segment and 2 vertical segments so as to form 6 segments out of 7 segments. The detailed contents of the light emitting member constituting each segment are the same as those in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 55), and thus will be omitted.

In this first control example, as the 7-segment display unit 1600, the left 7-segment display unit 1600a covering the outer circumference of the left rotation unit 800a, the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b covering the outer circumference of the middle rotation unit 800b, and the right rotation A right 7-segment display unit 1600c that covers the outer periphery of the moving unit 800c is provided, and three identification information (numbers) can be displayed as a third symbol by using each of the 7-segment display units 1600a to 1600c.

By combining the six segments of the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the light emitting region 822 (see FIG. 109) displayed by the decorative symbol display device 800, one 7-segment display (7-segment) is configured. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the display area of the reel display and the display area of the 7-segment display can be overlapped. Therefore, it is possible to display various display modes within a limited space. The detailed display contents (display contents of the third symbol) using the 7-segment display unit 1600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

Further, an LED (lightning bolt LED) 671 is arranged on the outer edge of the display window 880 (7-segment display unit 1600) as a light emitting means capable of irradiating light toward the display area of the reel display. The LED 671 is arranged at a position corresponding to the four corners of the display window 880, and the lightning LED 671a is on the lower left side of the display window 880 (the lower left side from the viewpoint when the front view of FIG. 107 is viewed), and the lightning LED 671b is on the upper left side. , The lightning bolt LED671c is arranged on the lower right side, and the lightning bolt LED671d on the upper right side is arranged.

When these lightning bolt LEDs 671 are made to emit light, highly directional light is emitted toward a part of the display area of the reel display, and a composite pattern combined with the above-mentioned stop-displayed pattern is expressed in the part of the area. It is configured as follows. The detailed contents of this synthetic symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 (a).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the display contents of the display symbols (third symbols) that can be displayed by the rotating units 800a to 800c will be described. FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display symbol of the inner reel 811 of each rotation unit 800a to 800c, and FIG. 109 schematically shows a display symbol of the inner reel 811 of each rotation unit 800a to 800c. It is a schematic diagram.

The left rotation unit 800a has a double reel structure composed of a left inner reel 811a and a left outer reel 821a, and the middle rotation unit 800b has two by a middle inner reel 811b and a middle outer reel 821b. A heavy reel structure is configured, and the right rotation unit 800c has a double reel structure composed of a right inner reel 811c and a right outer reel 821c.

Here, a method of displaying a symbol (third symbol) using each of the rotating units 800a to 800c will be briefly described using the left rotating unit 800a. As described above, the left rotation unit 800a has a double reel structure composed of a left inner reel 811a and a left outer reel 821a, and a motor (not shown) that is a drive source for each reel. Is provided. Then, by passing a current in a specific direction to the motor, the reel rotates forward (the direction in which the reel rotates from top to bottom from the viewpoint of FIG. 107), and by passing a current in the direction opposite to the specific direction. The reel is configured to rotate in the reverse direction (the direction in which the reel rotates from the bottom to the top from the viewpoint of FIG. 107).

Further, in this control example, a motor MPU (not shown) is provided as a drive control means for controlling the motor drive of each reel used in each rotation unit 800a to 800c. This MPU for motors is used to variably set the rotation direction and rotation speed of each motor, and executes drive control corresponding to various fluctuation displays executed based on the lottery result of a special symbol. .. By managing the motor drive control of each reel used for each rotation unit 800a to 800c by one motor MPU in this way, it is possible to execute the operation control without discomfort to the player.

First, the display symbol of the inner reel 811 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a display surface member (display tape) having a display symbol (display symbol printed on the display surface) that can be displayed on each inner reel (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c). It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically. In this control example, the display surface member on the loop is formed by attaching the above-mentioned display surface member along the outer peripheral surface of each inner reel.

Therefore, for example, when the left inner reel 811a is rotated in the forward direction (the direction in which the display symbol moves from top to bottom in the display window 880 (see FIG. 107)), it is printed on the display surface member. The display symbol is displayed in the display window 880 while changing from the bottom to the top. Then, after the display symbol printed on the top of the display surface member (the top of the display in FIG. 108, the blue 7 symbol R1 in the case of the left inner reel 811a), it is printed on the bottom of the surface member. The display symbol (at the bottom of the display in FIG. 108, in the case of the left inner reel 811a, a part of the combination symbol R3) is displayed.

Next, the display symbol printed on the display surface member of each inner reel will be specifically described. The left inner reel 811a of the left rotation unit 800a has a jackpot A (see, for example, FIG. 120 (b)) that is most advantageous to the player as a display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. Blue 7 symbol R1 corresponding to the combination of symbols to indicate that the player has won, and red 7 symbol R2 corresponding to the combination of symbols to indicate that the player has won the jackpot, and a specific display area. When the stop display is displayed, the left combination symbol R3a, which is a part of the combination symbol R3 that can satisfy the execution condition of the special effect, and the lottery result of the special symbol are disadvantageous results (for example, off) to the player. The Danger symbol R4, which corresponds to the combination of symbols for indicating the above, is printed on at least the reel display surface.

The blue 7 symbol R1 and the red 7 symbol R2 are symbols printed on each inner reel 811, respectively, and when the stop is displayed at a predetermined position on each inner reel 811 (when the stop is displayed in a row), It indicates that you have won the big hit of the special symbol. In this control example, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpots with different privilege amounts (for example, the number of prize balls and the game state set after the jackpot game ends), and the jackpot is won in favor of the player. In this case, the stop display mode (combination of symbols) indicating that the blue 7 symbol R1 has won the big hit is displayed as a stop (per blue 7). Further, when the jackpot is won regardless of the type of the winning jackpot, the stop display mode (combination of symbols) indicating that the red 7 symbol R2 has won the jackpot is displayed as a stop (red 7 hit).

In other words, in the case of a blue 7 hit, it is possible to notify the player in advance that he / she has won an advantageous jackpot (until the jackpot game starts), so that the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind. Can be done. In addition, when the number of red hits is 7, the player is only notified that the jackpot has been won, so that the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed are determined. It is possible to play a jackpot game while expecting the player to have an advantage.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the blue 7 hit is stopped by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command including the information indicating the result of the jackpot lottery output from the main control device 110. It is configured to determine whether to display or stop and display the red 7 hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the player operates the frame button 22 which is an operation means to hit the blue 7. May be configured to change the stop display ratio per blue 7 when the condition that the stop display is possible (winning a big hit that is advantageous to the player) is satisfied. Note that the variable ratio here means that the stop display ratio per blue 7 is 0%, that is, the stop display ratio per blue 7 is not displayed, or the stop display ratio per blue 7 is 100%, that is, blue 7. It is a concept that includes a state in which the hit is always stopped and displayed.

The combination symbol R3 is not a symbol for indicating the jackpot winning of the special symbol, but is a suggestion symbol capable of suggesting and notifying the expectation of the jackpot winning by combining with the lightning bolt LED671 arranged in the variable display device unit 80. Is. A specific description will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 (a), but only when the combination symbol R3a of the left inner reel 811a and the combination symbol R3b of the right inner reel 811c are stopped and displayed at a predetermined position. The special effective line is set as an effective line for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, and the special effective line is easily set when a big hit is won.

With this configuration, the symbol (blue 7 symbol R1 or red 7 symbol R2) for showing the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line for the fluctuation display using the inner reel 811. In addition to the game of watching whether or not the combination symbol R3 is stopped, the game of watching whether or not the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position can be performed, so that the interest of the game during the symbol variation display can be improved. can.

Further, in this control example, the symbol printed on the inner reel 811 (combination symbol R3) and the lightning bolt LED671 arranged on the variable display device unit 80 may be combined to suggest and notify the expectation of a big hit. It is configured so that it can be done. In addition, the display mode of the combination symbol R3 and the shape of the lightning LED 671 (light emitting mode) so that the combination symbol R3 and the lightning bolt LED671 are integrally expressed when the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position. It is configured to have a relationship with. As a result, the player can visually grasp that the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

The Danger symbol R4 is a symbol printed only on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, and is configured as a suggestion symbol for showing the degree of expectation of a big hit winning like the above-mentioned combination symbol R3. .. When the Danger symbol R4 is stopped and displayed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c in a predetermined arrangement (for example, an arrangement that is one row higher), and the chance symbol R5 is stopped and displayed on the middle inner reel 811b, it is specified. The variable display mode of is executed. That is, unlike the combination symbol R3, the Danger symbol R4 is a suggestion symbol that can suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit winning by using only the symbol printed on the inner reel 811.

In this control example, the stop display of the third symbol is used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and the stop display is performed during the fluctuation time of the special symbol. When the stop display (including the temporary stop display that swings to the extent that the player can recognize that the stop display is displayed), the stop display of the suggestion symbol for suggesting the jackpot expectation of the special symbol being executed is displayed. Will be.

In this way, when the inner reel 811 is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the symbols indicating the lottery result of the jackpot symbol (for example, blue 7 symbol R1 and red 7 symbol R2) are stopped and displayed. Since it is configured to display the suggestion symbol (for example, combination symbol R3, Danger symbol R4) as a stop display (temporary stop display) instead of displaying (temporary stop display), the inner reel 811 during the fluctuation period of the special symbol It is possible to prevent the stop display (temporary stop display) of the third symbol from being mistaken for the stop display of the third symbol.

Here, both the stop display of the third symbol and the stop display of the suggestion symbol are set based on the lottery result of the special symbol executed by the main control device 110. Specifically, since it is set based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol and the result of the variable lottery of the special symbol (lottery of the variable pattern), each symbol shows the lottery result of the special symbol. It becomes a design for.

A total of 10 display symbols are printed on the left inner reel 811a. Here, since the inner reel unit 810 is configured to rotate in 2 seconds per round, the left inner reel 811a is a display means configured so that the display symbol is variable every 0.2 seconds. In this control example, the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c of the inner reel unit 810 are configured to rotate at the same fluctuation speed (1 turn 2 seconds). , Not limited to this, the fluctuation speed of each inner reel may be different. Further, for each inner reel, the time (acceleration period) required from the execution of rotation to reaching a specific fluctuation speed (one round 2 seconds) may be different, or the specific fluctuation speed (one round) may be different. The time (deceleration period) required from the state of rotation in 2 seconds) to the stop display may be different. Further, the timing at which the rotation of each inner reel is started may be different.

By rotating each inner reel with various rotation patterns in this way, the player is reminded that there is some rule between the rotation pattern of each inner reel and the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In addition, in this control example, the fluctuation (rotation) control and stop control of the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c are executed in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation. Not limited to this, for example, among the symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in the previous special symbol change, the stop position (stop display mode) of some of the symbols is the current special symbol change. When it is determined that it is the same as the stop display mode showing the fluctuation result (lottery result), the rotation of only the remaining inner reels is started without rotating the inner reel on which the stop display mode is displayed. It may be configured in.

Similarly, a total of 10 display symbols are printed on the right inner reel 811c. As the type of the printed display symbol, the execution condition of the special effect may be satisfied when the display symbol of the left inner reel 811a is stopped and displayed in a specific display area instead of the left combination symbol R3a. The difference is that the right combination symbol R3b, which is a part of the combination symbol R3, is provided, and the other parts are the same. The reference numerals and description of the same display symbols will be omitted.

In this control example, the rotation of the right inner reel 811c is normally stopped after the rotation of the left inner reel 811a is stopped. Therefore, when the right inner reel 811c is stopped and displayed, it can be suggested that the result of this special symbol lottery may be a big hit (whether or not it has reached the reach state).

Finally, the display design of the Nakauchi reel 811b will be described. In this control example, when the inner reel unit 810 is used to execute a variable display for showing a lottery result of a special symbol, the inner reel 811b is configured to be stopped at the end. Therefore, for the display symbols printed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c described above, a display symbol for showing that the lottery result of the jackpot is out of order and a specific variable display mode are executed. The difference is that a display symbol is added to notify that. Since the other display symbols are the same as the left inner reel 811a or the right inner reel 811c described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in this control example, when the player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol using the three inner reels, the reel drive is stopped in the order of the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b. It is configured to let you. Then, in the stopped left inner reel 811a, right inner reel 811c, and middle inner reel 811b, among a plurality of display symbols stopped and displayed in the area (display area) visible to the player from the display window 880, a specific display symbol is used. It is configured to notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol by the combination of the symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in the area (effective line).

In this way, by displaying the three inner reels in a predetermined order, the player can easily grasp which of the inner reels is to be stopped and displayed next. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand. It should be noted that the order in which each reel is stopped may be changed only when a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a big hit of a special symbol is won) is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won when an unusual operation is executed. Further, since it is necessary for the player to grasp the reel operation at the normal time in order to identify whether the reel operation is different from the normal one, the reel is also performed even when the normal reel operation is performed. You can be interested in the content of the operation.

Further, by using a configuration in which the three inner reels are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b are stopped when two reels are stopped. Whether or not the display symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped (hereinafter referred to as reach state) in a specific area for showing the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to one reel. It is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in order to enhance the effect of effect during variable display, the motor MPU may be configured to perform different rotation operations for each of the left inner reel 811a, the right inner reel 811c, and the middle inner reel 811b. For example, by rotating three reels in the forward direction and controlling the reels to rotate in the reverse direction after reaching the reach state, it is configured to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the reach state has been reached. However, when the fluctuation display this time is in the reach state (there is a high possibility that it will be in the reach state), all the inner reels should be rotated in the reverse direction from the time when the rotation of the three inner reels is executed. By controlling the number of reels, the lottery result of the special symbol may be easily predicted by the player at the timing when the variable display is executed (the timing when none of the reels is stopped).

As described above, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 108, the display symbols are evenly printed on each of the left inner reel 811a, the middle inner reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c, and the left inner reel is printed. By rotating each of the 811a, the middle reel 811b, and the right inner reel 811c, the display symbol displayed in the player's visual recognition area (inside the display window 880) is configured to be variable.

A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 110, but an effective line is set in the display area where the reel 811 is displayed in this control example, and the blue 7 symbol R1 and the red 7 symbol R2 are set on the effective line. , When any of the BAR symbols are aligned in a row, the jackpot game is executed. Further, when the combination symbol R3, the special symbol R6, or the like stops at a specific position, a special effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot game or the special effect is executed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, the display symbols are arranged to be evenly spaced, but the intervals may be unevenly arranged. Specifically, a section in which many display symbols are printed to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player, and most of the display symbols are printed. By providing a section that does not exist, the intervals between the displayed symbols may be made uneven. As a result, the player can predict the game result with an ambiguous feeling as to which section the rotation of the inner reel 811 stops.

Next, the display symbol of the outer reel 821 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. The display surface of the outer reel 821 used in this control example is roughly divided into three. Here, the display surface of the outer reel 821 will be described using the left outer reel 821a of the left rotation unit 800a. As described above, in this control example, a double reel structure is adopted, and the outer reel 821 is arranged so as to cover the display surface of the inner reel 811.

Explaining the contents of the display surface of the outer reel 821 with reference to the left outer reel 821a, the left first region (transmission region) 821a1 formed of a transparent member capable of transmitting the inside and the seg display unit 1600 are combined. The left second region (seg area) 821a2 on which one 7-segment is formed and the left third region (effect) on which a special display mode for notifying the lottery result of a special symbol is formed on the display surface of the outer reel 821. Display area) It is divided into 821a3.

As described above, the outer reel 821 is formed of a transmissive member whose inside is visible only in the first region of each region (first region to third region). That is, in the double reel structure of this control example, when the inner reel 811 is used to perform variable display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, the first area of the display surface of the outer reel 821 is set to the display window 880. It is driven and controlled by the MPU for the motor so as to stop at the corresponding position.

With this configuration, the drive content (variation display mode) of the reel (inner reel 811) provided inside the double reel structure can be easily visually recognized by the player from the display window 880. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a left light emitting region 822a is formed over the entire width of the left outer reel 821a at the center position in the vertical direction of the left second region 821a2, and is combined with the left 7-segment display unit 1600a. This is configured to be one 7-segment display (see FIG. 110 (b)). The left light emitting region 822a is controlled to emit light so as to be linked to the light emission display of the 7-segment display unit 1600, and includes the same color as the six segments of the 7-segment display unit 1600 (including an error to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). It is configured to emit light according to the concept). Specifically, it is configured to transmit the same emission color as the emission color of the 7-segment display unit 1600 emitted from the backlight unit 830 (see FIG. 31) of the decorative symbol display device 800.

Further, in the left second region 821a2, the portion other than the left light emitting region 822a is formed of a black non-transmissive member, and the player is provided on the inside (back side) of the left outer reel 821a. The reel 811a is configured so that it cannot be visually recognized. As a result, as a display mode of the decorative symbol display device 800, by locating the outer reel 821 in the second region, it is possible to execute variable display (7-segment display) using 7 segments.

In this control example, when the 7-segment display is executed, the 7-segment display is stopped and displayed by controlling the lighting and blinking of each of the 7 segments at high speed during the fluctuation time of the special symbol. It is configured to perform a dynamic display indicating that it has not been done. In addition, it is configured to control so that the 7-segment display during dynamic display (7-segment display that lights up and blinks repeatedly at high speed) is not misunderstood as a specific symbol.

Specifically, in this control example, by controlling the seven segments to be lit one by one, a dynamic display in which one lit segment appears to move in a circle. Is configured to do. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the current is in the dynamic display period, and the display mode of the 7-segment display during the dynamic display period is a display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent misidentification as a design.

That is, in this control example, the 7-segment display unit 1600 is arranged around the decorative symbol display device 800, and a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol according to the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 800 (third). It is configured to change the type of the variable display mode in which the symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is possible to easily switch between a variable display mode using the inner reel 811, a variable display mode using the outer reel 821, and a variable display mode using 7 segments, and each variable display mode can be used. The displayed areas can be duplicated. Therefore, it is possible to provide various variable display modes within a limited predetermined area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109, a part of a symbol (a symbol imitating "7") for showing that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is printed in the left third area 821a3. When the MPU for the motor is driven and controlled to stop at the position corresponding to the display window 880, the left special display mode 823a printed on the left outer reel 821a and the middle special display printed on the middle and outer reels 821b are displayed. The aspect 823b and the right special display aspect 823c printed on the right outer reel 821c are combined so that the special display aspect imitating "7" is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, the lottery result of the special symbol can be notified to the player by using the display symbol having a size that occupies most of the display area in the display window 880, which gives an impact to the player. Can be done. Further, although the details will be described later, in this control example, when the variable display for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is executed by using the outer reel 821, the symbol rows of the outer reels 821 are aligned (). (In the state shown in FIG. 109), it is configured to execute the control to rotate each outer reel 821 in synchronization.

The display symbol of the outer reel 821 has been described above with reference to the left outer reel 821a, but the display symbols of the middle outer reel 821b and the right outer reel 821c are the same as those of the left outer reel 821a (in the special symbol display mode). Only the difference in design is different), so detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115, the contents of the variable display executed by the variable display device unit 80 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 110 (a), the variable display content when the normal state is set as the gaming state will be described. FIG. 110A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation display using the inner reel 811 in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 110A, normally, three display symbols of each inner reel (left inner reel 811a to right inner reel 811c) are displayed in the display window 880 at the top and bottom. , As an effective line for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, the display symbol stopped and displayed in the upper part (the left inner reel 811a is the blue 7 symbol R1, the middle inner reel 811b is the blank symbol R7, and the right inner reel 811c is the right combination. The first line S1 whose effective line is the symbol R3b) and the display symbol (the left inner reel 811a is the red 7 symbol R2, the middle inner reel 811b is the special symbol R6, and the right inner reel 811c is the blue 7). The second line S2 with the symbol R1) as the effective line, and the display symbol (the left inner reel 811a is the bar symbol, the middle inner reel 811b is the blank symbol R7, and the right inner reel 811c is the right combination symbol R3b). ) Is an effective line, and a third line S3 is formed.

Further, the first diagonal line V1 whose effective lines are the lower stage of the left inner reel 811a, the middle stage of the middle inner reel 811b, and the upper stage of the right inner reel 811c, the upper stage of the left inner reel 811a, and the middle inner reel 811b. A second diagonal line V2 having an effective line of the middle stage and the lower stage of the right inner reel 811c is formed.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the display symbol is stopped and displayed on the five effective lines (S1 to S3, and V1 and V2) formed on the display surface of the variable display device unit 80. The result of the lottery of the special symbol is notified to the player by the combination of. Further, in this control example, the number of target effective lines is configured to be different depending on the stop position of the displayed symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110A, the upper position of the left inner reel 811a constitutes a part of two effective lines (first line S1 and second diagonal line V2), and the left inner reel 811a The middle position constitutes a part of one effective line (second line S2). As a result, when the first inner reel (for example, the left inner reel 811a) of each inner reel is stopped, the inner reel (for example, the right inner reel 811c) to be stopped next can be stopped at which position. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether it is desirable. In addition, when a part of the display symbols corresponding to the combination of the display symbols for showing the lottery result advantageous to the player stops at the stop position constituting a part of the plurality of effective lines, the display symbols are on the plurality of effective lines. Since it can be in a reach state, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for a big hit.

Next, the variation display content when the time saving state (probability change state) is set as the game state will be described with reference to FIG. 110 (b). FIG. 110B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the variation display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 in the time saving state. In this control example, when the time saving state (probability change state) is set, it is easy to set the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time shorter than the normal state as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, in the time-saving state (probability variation state) in which the variation pattern of the short variation time is easily set, the 7-segment display is configured to be executed as the variation display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, even when a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set, the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol can be reliably stopped and displayed after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 110 (b), during the time saving state, the left second region (segment region) 821a2 of the left outer reel 821a, the middle second region (segment region) 821b2 of the middle outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c. By locating each of the right second area (segment area) 821c2 so as to correspond to the display window 880, the left 7-segment display unit 1600a, the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b, and the right 7-segment display unit are located in the display area. Three 7-segments of 1600c are formed. FIG. 110 (b) shows a state in which all the areas that can be lit in the 7-segment display are lit, but each 7-segment display shows a display mode imitating the numbers "0" to "9", respectively. It will be possible.

When the lottery result of the special symbol is started during this time saving state, each 7-segment is dynamically displayed, and the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol after a predetermined period (variation time set in the fluctuation pattern) has elapsed. The display symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in this control example, as a display symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the display symbol in which the light emitting region 822 is emitted is easily displayed.

More specifically, in this control example, a display symbol imitating 10 types of numbers "0" to "9" can be displayed as a 7-segment display symbol, and a lottery result of a special symbol is displayed. If is off, among the display symbols imitating the above-mentioned 10 types of numbers, the display symbols (“2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6” that emit light in the light emitting region 822. , "8", "9") are configured to be easy to set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the displayed symbol that has been stopped and displayed.

That is, of the seven segments used for the 7-segment display, one segment (light emitting region 822) formed by using the outer reel 821 is displayed in a lighting (light emitting) mode with respect to the other six segments. Is configured to be lit in the same color so that they are the same, but since the mode when the light is off (when the light is not emitted) is different from the other six segments, the light is emitted when the light is not emitted. It is possible to prevent the region 822 from being mistakenly recognized as forming a part of the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol.

More specifically, in this control example, the second region of the outer reel 821 is divided into a region for transmitting the light emitted from the backlight unit 830 and a region for not transmitting the light, and a region for transmitting the light is defined. The light emitting region 822 is formed by using the light emitting region 822, and the other regions are formed of a non-transmissive member (black member) for preventing light from being transmitted. The light emitting region 822 is formed of a white member for transmitting the light of the backlight unit 830.

Therefore, the light emitting region 822 is a region formed by a white member surrounded by a black member. As a result, even when the backlight unit 830 is not lit, the non-transmissive light emitting region 822 is easily grasped, and as a result, a part of the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is formed. It is possible to prevent misidentification as being present.

Then, using these three 7-segments, a variable display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is executed for the player, and after the variable time of a predetermined period has elapsed, the lottery result of the special symbol is shown. The display symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this control example, after the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the period until the number of lottery of the special symbol reaches 100 times is configured to be the time saving state, and it is executed during the time saving state. When the number of lottery of special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times, that is, when the number of remaining lottery of special symbols executed during the time saving state reaches the predetermined number of times, the number of remaining time reductions (remaining lottery) using 7-segment display The number of times) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111 (a), the display contents of the third symbol displayed in the variable display device unit 80 during the time reduction (during the time reduction state) will be described. In this control example, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the third symbol is varied and displayed by using the segment display unit 1600 of the segment display device 600. FIG. 111A is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third symbol during the time reduction. As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the variation result is shown in the display mode in which the symbol is displayed in 7-segment display. In FIG. 111A, "7" is stopped and displayed on the left 7-segment display unit 1600a, "5" is displayed on the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b, and "6" is stopped and displayed on the right 7-segment display unit 1600c. As described above, in the display mode using the 7-segment display, the symbol is variably displayed by the irradiation of the light provided in the backlight unit, so that it is possible to cope with the variability pattern having a short variability time.

Here, the display of the number of remaining time reductions will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). FIG. 111 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state is displayed. .. As shown in FIG. 111 (b), the number of remaining time reductions is displayed on the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b. In this control example, when the number of remaining time reductions is less than 5, the player is configured to be notified of the number of remaining time reductions using the 7-segment display. As a result, the period until the end of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player (the time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state) can be notified in advance, so that the time saving state suddenly ends and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress giving.

In addition, in this control example, during the variable display period of the special symbol, the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is first stopped and displayed (see FIG. 110 (a)), and then the remaining time reduction number is displayed. It is configured to be done. Then, a display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is set so that the display symbol showing the same number as the number displayed as the remaining time reduction count is not displayed in the 7-segment display for the remaining time reduction count. It is composed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the display mode of the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol different from the display mode of the remaining time reduction number indicating the remaining time reduction number, so that the player can have the remaining time reduction. The number of times can be reliably notified.

Further, in this control example, when it is not necessary to display the remaining time reduction number display indicating the remaining time reduction number after the display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, the special symbol jackpot is won. In that case, since the display symbol is set regardless of the numerical value of the number of remaining time reductions to be displayed next, the mode of the display symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won should be set without limitation. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to set the display mode of the display symbol that is stopped and displayed according to the privilege (the size of the number of prize balls and the game state set after the end of the big hit game) given by the winning big hit.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b is configured to display the number of remaining time reductions, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the left 7 is used. The seg display unit 1600a or the right 7-segment display unit 1600c may be used to display the number of remaining time reductions. In this case, for example, when the left 7-segment display unit 1600a, which is first stopped and displayed, is configured to display the number of remaining time reductions, the game is played with the number of remaining time reductions displayed next being grasped in advance. By doing so, when the same numerical value as the number of remaining time reductions to be displayed next is stopped and displayed as a display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the left 7-segment display unit 1600a, the lottery result this time is a big hit. It is possible to grasp in advance that it is. Further, the 7-segment display unit 1600 on which the number of remaining time reductions is displayed may be appropriately changed.

Further, although details will be described later, in this control example, the variation display of the special symbol and the remaining time reduction number display are configured to be displayed within one variation display period (including the symbol confirmation time). , It is configured to execute the display of the remaining time reduction number of times for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation time of the set special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the set variation time of the special symbol is 2 seconds, the variation display of the special symbol of 1.5 seconds is performed regardless of whether or not the remaining time reduction number display is executed, and then 0.5 seconds. The remaining time reduction count display is executed, but if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 1 second, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction count display is executed, and if the remaining time reduction count display is not executed, 1 second. When the special symbol variation is executed while the remaining time reduction number display is executed, the shortened variation of 0.5 seconds is executed as the special symbol variation, and then the remaining time reduction number display of 0.5 seconds is executed. Is configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to execute both the variation display of the special symbol and the display of the number of remaining hours within the variation display period of one special symbol.

In this control example, as described above, the configuration is such that the variation display of the special symbol and the display of the number of remaining hours are both executed within the variation display period of one special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute the remaining time reduction number display so as to straddle the special symbol fluctuation. In this case, for example, the special symbol fluctuation display for a certain period of time is executed regardless of the set fluctuation time, and the remaining time, which is the difference between the period in which the fluctuation display is executed and the set fluctuation time, is shortened. It is good to set it as the time to execute the number display. As a result, the variable display mode of the special symbol can be made constant, the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the pattern of the variable display mode can be simplified. Can be reduced.

In addition, the display lower limit time for executing the remaining time reduction number display is set, and the remaining time that is the difference between the period in which the variation display of the special symbol is executed and the set variation time is a predetermined time (for example, 0). If it is shorter than .5 seconds), it is preferable to configure it so that the remaining time reduction number display is executed over the period during which the next special symbol change is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player surely grasp the remaining time reduction number of times. However, in this case, since the change of the special symbol is started while the remaining time reduction number display is being executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the new special symbol change has been started. There is a problem. Therefore, the player is notified that the special symbol change has started by blinking the area not used for displaying the remaining time reduction number (in the example of FIG. 111B, the left light emitting area 822a of the left inner reel 811a). Or, by changing the emission color of the display mode of the remaining time reduction display mode (display mode imitating "4" in FIG. 111 (b)), the player is notified that the special symbol change has started. It is good to configure it to. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a new special symbol change has been started while displaying the remaining time reduction number of times.

When executing the above-mentioned process, it is preferable to specifically provide the following configuration in the voice lamp control device 113. First, the fluctuation time extraction means for extracting the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation from the information included in the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the fluctuation of the third symbol within the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation. The third symbol variation display time for executing the display and the third symbol variation display time set by the setting means for setting the remaining time reduction display time for executing the remaining time reduction display time, and the variation time extraction means are extracted. A calculation means for calculating the difference of the fluctuation pattern (variation time), a lower limit determination means for determining whether the time calculated by the calculation means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit time (for example, 1 second), and a lower limit determination means. When it is determined that the time is less than or equal to the lower limit fluctuation time, the continuation flag for indicating that the remaining time reduction number display does not end within the current fluctuation pattern period is set to on.

Then, this continuation flag is configured to be set to off at the timing when the remaining time reduction count display ends, and the continuation flag is set to on, that is, the remaining time reduction count display is being executed. When a new variation pattern is set, it may be configured to set a variation start display mode for indicating that the new symbol variation is executed during the display of the remaining time reduction number of times.

Furthermore, the setting means is configured to set a plurality of different times as the time for executing the remaining time reduction number display, and even if the shortest time among the plurality of different times is set, the remaining time reduction number display is the current variation pattern period. It may be configured to set the continuation flag to on when it is determined that it does not end within. Further, when the time saving state is set, the third symbol variation display time set by the setting means is configured to be different depending on whether the remaining time saving number display is executed or not, and the remaining time saving is shortened. When the number of times display is executed, it may be configured so that the third symbol variation display time, which is shorter than the case where the number display is not executed, can be easily set.

Further, in this control example, the period in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (symbol variation period) and the period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period) are included in the description within the fluctuation time of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol variation period of the special symbol and the symbol determination period may be controlled separately. In this case, for example, when the remaining time reduction number display period is set in advance so as to be the same as the symbol confirmation period and the third symbol variation display time longer than the symbol variation period is set, or when the remaining time reduction number display period is set. Is set in advance so that it is longer than the symbol confirmation period, and if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number display cannot be executed during the symbol variation period, it is shown that it does not end within the current variation pattern period. May be configured to turn on the continuation flag of.

In this control example, when the variation display (variation display by 7 segments) using the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed, the symbol display mode for showing the third symbol is configured to be variable display. Not limited to this, the display mode different from that of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the display mode in which only one segment of the seven segments is lit) is varied and displayed. It may be configured in. With this configuration, when the 7-segment display unit 1600 is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed during the variable display of the third symbol, the game states that the specific third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a person is misunderstood.

Further, as the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600, the player visually recognizes the high-speed variable display period in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the individual symbol display modes that are variablely displayed, and the individual symbol display modes that are variablely displayed. An easy low-speed fluctuation display period is set, and the high-speed fluctuation display period is configured to variably display a display mode different from the third symbol, and the low-speed fluctuation display period is configured to variably display the symbol display mode showing the third symbol. You may. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third symbol from suddenly stopping while suppressing the misunderstanding that the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light during high-speed fluctuation. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the variation display contents of the inner reel 811 and the variation display of the seg display unit 1600 will be described. In this control example, as described above, the variation display of the third symbol executed by using the inner reel 811, the variation display of the third symbol executed by using the outer reel 821, and the seg display unit 1600 are used. The variable display of the third symbol to be executed is configured to be executable, and further, the plurality of devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, seg display) described above correspond to one special symbol variable display. The variation display (mixed variation display) of the third symbol using the part 1600) is configured to be feasible.

Further, in this control example, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit, the above-mentioned mixed variation display is more likely to be executed than when it is not a big hit. As a result, the player is expected to execute the variable display (mixed variable display) of the third symbol using the plurality of devices in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of devices capable of variablely displaying the third symbol. At the same time, it is possible to suggest to the player by using a gorgeous effect (mixed variation display) that there is a high possibility that the jackpot of the special symbol has been won.

FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in the mixed variation display (special reach 1) using the inner reel 811 and the seg display unit 1600. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but when the special reach 1 is set as the variation display mode of the third symbol, first, the variation display (normal variation display) for rotating the inner reel 811 is executed. The lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (hit), and the reel is temporarily stopped (including a slight rocking state that makes the player think that the reel has stopped). After that, the displacement member 670 is changed to a position (fourth position) that covers the entire display surface of the inner reel 811, and the displacement member 670 is changed to the initial position (first position) again. The effect mode shown in 112 is displayed.

In the effect mode shown in FIG. 112, the third symbol indicating "7" is stopped and displayed on the left 7-segment display unit 1600 and the right 7-segment display unit 1600c, and the inner reel 811b is in the arrow direction (from top to bottom). It is spinning towards. In this state, the left outer reel 821a and the right outer reel 821c are controlled so that the second region corresponding to the 7-segment display unit 1600 (the region where the inner reel 811 is not visible to the player) is located in the display window 880. Only the middle and outer reels 821b are controlled so that the first region where the player can see the inner reel 811 is located in the display window 880.

By executing different operation controls according to the effect mode executed for the three outer reels 821 in this way, the mixed variation display can be executed. Then, in the middle reel 811b, the third symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed in any of the display areas displayed in the display window 880, so that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. Is notified to the player.

That is, according to the effect mode shown in FIG. 112, even if the third symbol imitating "7" is stopped and displayed at any of the upper position, the middle position, and the lower position of the middle reel 811b, it is a big hit. Since the effect (variable display) is executed, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect that is likely to be a big hit is being executed.

In addition, with respect to the effect mode shown in FIG. 112, only the corresponding displacement member 670 (medium displacement member 670b) may be configured to be variable so as to change the display area of the inner reel 811b, or 7 The third symbol imitating "7" displayed on the seg display unit 1600 is made to emit red or blue light, and the color of the third symbol of the Nakauchi reel 811b indicating that the jackpot is won is limited. May be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the variable display content using the outer reel 821 will be described. In this control example, as the effect during the variation display using the inner reel 811, the special reach 2 effect of rotating the outer reel 821 is configured to be executable. This special reach 2 effect is an effect of synchronously rotating the left outer reel 821a, the middle outer reel 821b, and the right outer reel 821c constituting the outer reel 821 in a aligned state.

FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect content of the special reach 2. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the outer reel 821 slowly rotates forward (1/3 of the rotation speed of the inner reel 811) while the inner reel 811 is rotating at high speed in the forward direction. The effect that the special display mode 823 is gradually displayed in the display area in the display window 880 is executed. Since the third area on which this special display mode 823 is printed is a non-transparent area in which the inner reel 811 cannot be visually recognized, the display area of the inner reel 8111 gradually becomes narrower depending on the rotation status of the outer reel 821, and the outer reel 821 When the inner reel 811 is completely covered and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), a display symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed.

In FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), while the inner reel 811 is rotating at high speed in the forward direction, the outer reel 821 is slowly rotated in the forward direction, whereby the momentum of rotation of the inner reel 811 is increased. An example of the effect of interlocking rotation so that the special display mode (823a, 823b, 823c) displayed in the third region (821a3, 821b3, 821c3) of the outer reel 821 is extruded is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the inner reel 811 and the rotation direction of the outer reel 821 may be opposite to each other. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the inner reel 811 is rotating at a higher speed than before.

Further, in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), an example in which the outer reel 821 is driven at a constant rotation speed in one direction is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is shown in FIG. 113 (a), for example. The outer reel 821 is controlled to rotate in the opposite direction (the direction opposite to the forward direction) from the state where the outer reel 821 is rotated, and the outer reel 821 does not stop in the state shown in FIG. 113 (b) in the forward direction. It may be configured to continue the rotation of. In this case, after passing the state shown in FIG. 113 (b), the speed at the time of transition (rotating) from the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 113 (b) is passed. It is preferable to configure the speed until the state shown in FIG. 113A is reached again to be faster. As a result, it is possible to relatively lengthen the period in which it seems that the special display mode is stopped and displayed in the display window 880.

In addition, in this control example, as described with reference to FIG. 113, the reels (left outer reel 821a, middle outer reel 821b, right outer reel 821c) constituting the outer reel 821 are rotated in an aligned state. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be driven separately like the inner reel 811.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the effect contents of the special reach 3 effect (pseudo-variation effect) will be described. FIG. 114A is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the decorative symbol display device in the pseudo-variation effect. In this control example, it is as if a plurality of lottery results are displayed during the dynamic display period (during the variable display period) in which the display symbol for showing the result of one lottery of the special symbol is dynamically displayed. It is configured to execute the pseudo-variable effect shown in.

In this pseudo-variation effect, the re-variation effect of stopping the display symbol (temporarily stop display) and then starting the variation again is executed a plurality of times during one dynamic display period. As the number of times this re-variation effect is executed increases, the possibility of winning the jackpot increases.

Here, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using the liquid crystal display device, for example, the number of re-variation effects (pseudo-continuous number) executed during the pseudo-variation effect can be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device. Although it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example does not have a liquid crystal display device, and the number of re-variation effects executed during the pseudo-variation effect for the player. There was a problem that it was difficult to inform (the number of pseudo-reams) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Therefore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is changed each time the re-variation effect is executed, so that the player is notified of the number of times the re-variation effect is executed. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is configured to be variable so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 800 is narrowed each time the revariation effect is executed, and each time the revariation effect is executed. , The number of effective lines in the display area is reduced. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the effective lines to be watched by the player, so it is possible to prevent the process of stopping and displaying the combination of display symbols corresponding to the jackpot from being overlooked. ..

As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a displacement member 670. Further, lightning bolt LEDs671 which is a light emitting means composed of LED lamps are arranged at the four corners of the variable display device unit 80, the first lightning bolt LED671a is on the lower left side of the variable display device unit 80, and the second lightning bolt is on the upper left side. The LED671b, the third lightning bolt LED671c on the upper right side, and the fourth lightning bolt LED671d on the lower right side are arranged. In this control example, when the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at the corresponding position of each lightning bolt LED671, the first special line L1 to the fifth special line L5, which are special effective lines, are formed, and the fifth special line L5 is formed. When the special symbol R6 (a symbol imitating a black star mark) is stopped, the effect of rotating each inner reel 811 again (so-called pseudo-variation effect) is executed.

Specifically, the rotation (variation) of each inner reel 811 is started in response to the fluctuation of the special symbol, the combination symbol R3a is stopped at the upper and lower stages of the left inner reel 811a, and then the upper stage of the right inner reel 811c. And when the combination symbol R3b is stopped in the lower row, the four lightning bolt LEDs 671 are turned on, and the first special line L1 to the fourth special line L4 are formed. Then, when the rotation speed of the inner reel 811b gradually decreases in that state and the special symbol R6 is stopped and displayed on the fifth special line L5, the first special line L1 to the fifth special line L5 are predetermined. This means that the specific display symbol has been stopped and displayed (see FIG. 114 (a)), and the displacement member 670 is variable in the direction of narrowing the display area of the inner reel 811 (see FIG. 114 (b)). Each inner reel 811 re-displaces (rotates) (executes the first pseudo-displacement effect).

When the first pseudo-variation effect is executed, the displacement member 670 is changed, so that the display area of the inner reel 811 becomes narrower than usual, so that the number of effective lines of the display symbol is 5 lines (S1 to S3 and). It decreases from V1, V2) to 3 lines (see FIG. 114 (b)). In this control example, displacement members 670 are arranged above and below the variable display device unit 80, and each of them variably operates so as to cover the display area of the inner reel 811 so as to narrow the display area of the inner reel 811. Because of the configuration, the effective lines in the left-right direction (fourth line S4, fifth line S5) formed in the display area during the first pseudo-variation effect are different from the first line S1 to the third line S3. Formed in position.

Specifically, the fourth line S4 is formed between the first line S1 and the second line S2 (see FIG. 110 (a)), and the second line S2 and the third line S3 (see FIG. 110 (a)). ), A fifth line S5 is formed. By varying the position where the effective line of the display symbol is formed in accordance with the size of the display area set in the pachinko machine 10 having the configuration in which the display area of the inner reel 811 is variable in this way, the game is played. The display symbol can be stopped and displayed in a display mode that is easy for a person to understand.

Although detailed description is omitted, the reel MPU 114a that controls the drive of the inner reel 811 receives a command from the voice lamp control device 113 that includes information indicating the currently set effective line type, and the received information includes the command. Based on this, it is configured to control the stop position of the displayed symbol. Therefore, in a configuration in which the position (vertical position) where the effective line of the display symbol is formed can be changed, the display symbol can be stopped and displayed at an appropriate position.

In addition to the above-described configuration, for example, a detection means (sensor) for detecting the actual variable position of the displacement member 670 is provided, and the reel MPU 114a determines the formation position of the effective line based on the detection result of the detection means. It may be configured to discriminate and determine the stop position of the display symbol. With this configuration, the number of commands (amount of information) output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the displacement can be determined in order to determine the actual position of the displacement member 670. Even when the member 670 is not operating normally (at the time of failure), the display symbol can be stopped in an appropriate display mode.

In this control example, when the size of the display area is changed by changing the displacement member 670 during the pseudo-variation effect, the formation position of the effective line of the display symbol is changed according to the size of the display area. However, the displacement member 670 is not limited to this, and the displacement member 670 is in the initial position (see FIG. 114 (a)), that is, normally there are 5 effective lines (S1 to S3 and V1, V2 (see FIG. 114 (a)). (See FIG. 110A) In the formed state, only the effective line forming position may be variably set so that the second line S2 and the third line S3 become effective lines.

Returning to FIG. 114 (b), the description will be continued. During the first pseudo-variation effect (special reach 3), a display area is formed so that a maximum of two display symbols (see FIG. 108) printed on each inner reel 811 can be visually recognized. In this state, since the effective line cannot be formed in the diagonal direction, a part of two effective lines (4th line S4 and 5th effective line S5) is formed on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c. The position to be displayed is set as the stop position of the display symbol. Then, in addition to the position where the middle inner reel 811b forms a part of the above-mentioned two effective lines (fourth line S4 and fifth effective line S5), the position where the fifth special line L5 is formed is the stop of the display symbol. Set as a position.

That is, during the first pseudo-variation effect, the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c execute a variation display (two-frame variation) for stopping and displaying the display symbol at two positions, and the middle reel 811b displays the display symbol. Is configured to execute a variable display (three-frame variation) for stopping and displaying at three positions.

In this way, even if the display area of each inner reel 811 is the same size, the variable display mode for each inner reel 811 can be changed by changing the number of positions for stopping and displaying the display symbol. , Can provide a novel production to the player. In addition, the number of frames of the variable display, that is, the number of positions where the player can think that the displayed symbol is stopped by slowing down the variable speed while the displayed symbol is fluctuating, is the number of positions where the displayed symbol can be stopped and displayed. By making the difference according to the above, the player can easily grasp at which position the display symbol stops in the current variable state of the displacement member 670.

Further, in this control example, as described above, by combining the lightning bolt LED671 and the combination symbol R3, the lightning bolt runs toward the position where the fifth special line L5 is formed (see FIG. 114 (a)). ), Which makes it easier for the player to watch which display symbol is stopped and displayed on the newly formed effective line, but it is not limited to this, and other It may be configured to be a symbol or a pattern.

Further, in this control example, a new effective line is formed by combining the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 and the light emitting means (lightning bolt LED671) arranged in the variable display device unit 80. However, in addition to this, for example, when a specific display symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific position while a movable accessory for decoration is located at a specific position, a new effective line is formed. It may be configured. In addition, the display symbol may be stopped and displayed first, and then a new effective line may be formed when the light emitting means (lightning bolt LED671) emits light. In this way, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by forming a new effective line by combining the display symbol that can be variablely displayed and the element other than the display symbol so as to satisfy a predetermined condition. At the time of this, not only the variable display mode of the display pattern but also the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and the movable mode of the decorative movable accessory are to be watched, so that the player is prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the display contents of the display area of the inner reel 811 during the second pseudo-variation effect will be described. When the special symbol R6 is stopped and displayed on the fifth special line L5 during the first pseudo-variation effect described with reference to FIG. 114 (b), the second pseudo-variation effect is executed and the displacement member 670 is displaced. The display area of the inner reel 811 is variable in a direction to be narrower, and each inner reel 811 starts to fluctuate (rotate) again. During this second pseudo-variation effect, the display area of the inner reel 811 is reduced to one display symbol, and only one effective line of the display symbol (second line S2) is formed.

Then, on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, the red 7 symbol R2 for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, and the middle inner reel is displayed to the player. A variable display is executed in which only the type of the display symbol that is stopped and displayed on 811b is watched.

Next, the flow of the operation contents of the various devices while the pseudo-variation effect (special reach 3) is being executed will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a timing chart for showing the operation contents of various devices during the pseudo-continuous effect (during the pseudo-variation effect). As shown in FIG. 116, when the pseudo-variation effect (special reach 3) is executed, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80 are executed. , Lightning LED671) is configured to be driven at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, first, each inner reel 811 rotates according to the timing when the special symbol change is executed, and first, the left inner reel 811a is stopped and controlled so that the left combination symbol R3a is stopped at a specific position. After that, the right inner reel 811c is stopped and controlled so that the right combination symbol R3b stops at a specific position. After that, the lightning bolt LED671 is turned on, and four effective lines (first special line L1 to fourth special line L4) are formed. Then, when the special symbol R6 of the inner reel 811b is stopped on the fifth special line L5 which is effectively determined in the state where the first special line L1 to the fourth special line L4 are formed (FIG. 114 (a). )) The first chance is established, and the pseudo-variation effect continues.

When the first chance is established, each inner reel 811 starts to fluctuate again, and from the first position where the displacement member 670 is the initial position to the second position (the area of the display surface of the inner reel 811 is the first position). A variable display state is formed in which the number of effective lines is three (see FIG. 114 (b)). In this state, regardless of the stop display mode of the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, an effect for attracting attention only to whether or not the special symbol R6 is stopped on the fifth special line L5 is executed. Here, when the special symbol R6 stops on the fifth special line L5, finally, each inner reel 811 starts to fluctuate again, and the displacement member 670 is changed from the second position to the third position (). See Figure 115).

When the displacement member 670 is changed to the third position, there is only one effective line (second line S2), and both the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c reach the display symbol (third symbol) indicating the jackpot winning. The red 7 symbol R2 is stopped and displayed so as to be in the state (see FIG. 115). As shown in FIG. 116, an effect is executed in which the upper limit of the effect display time to be executed corresponding to the variable display time of the special symbol is set long and the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the effect display. ..

In this control example, the above-mentioned pseudo-variation effect, that is, the effect of changing the effective symbol sequence in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed is executed by using the period during which one special symbol change is executed. Although it is configured, as another configuration, it may be configured to execute an effect of varying the effective symbol sequence across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations.

In this case, for example, based on the winning information command set in the look-ahead process (see S513 in FIG. 132) executed by the main control device 110 described later with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol after the next change is displayed. It is preferable to determine the lottery result in advance and set the effect (continuous effect) so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations based on the pre-determination result. With this configuration, it is possible to stop and display the lottery result of the special symbol multiple times during the period when the continuous effect is being executed, so that the special symbol to be executed is executed for the player at what timing. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the continuous production has been executed in response to the variable display of.

Further, in this control example, a configuration is used in which the pseudo-variation effect is executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually decreases, but the player can change the effective lines of the third symbol. It may be configured to provide a new variable display effect, and for example, it may be configured to execute a pseudo variable display effect so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually increases.

In this control example, when the pseudo-variation effect is executed, the higher the number of re-variations (the longer the set fluctuation time), the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot. However, the possibility is not limited to this, and for example, when the reach is displayed with the number of pseudo stops of the third symbol being a predetermined number during the pseudo-variation effect, there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won. It may be configured in. As a result, during the period from the execution of the pseudo-variation effect to the end of the pseudo-variation effect, it is possible to make the player always have a feeling of expectation regarding the jackpot while playing the game.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 126, the contents of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. ..

Further, in order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction. In this control example, the payout control device 111 is used as a part of the sub control device, and various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 in one direction. However, the payout control device is not limited to this. Various commands may be configured to be bidirectional so that the main control unit 110 can receive the command from 111.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 135) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the right side, and the MPU 201 is connected to various commands and controls via the input / output port 205. Send a signal.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 to be described later provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the payout prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, and turns on and off in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, 7-segment display unit 1600, etc.) 227. It controls the setting of the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 in which the output and the variable display (variable display) are performed. Then, a drive motor KM (inner reel drive motors KM1a to 1c, outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c, displacement member drive motors KM3a to 3c) for driving various devices provided in the variable display device unit 80 is driven. Is. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a drive motor KM, and a frame button 22 are connected to the input / output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and is based on the determined display mode. Drive control of various drive motors KM and light emission control of the 7-segment display unit 1600 are executed. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display mode of the variable display executed by the variable display device unit 80 is variable. Various devices such as changing the light emitting mode of the lamp display device 227 in the reach state, and changing the target (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) for executing the variable display. The command content for is variable.

Further, although not shown, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to receive the detection result of the detection means for detecting the drive result of each drive motor KM. Then, based on the detection result of each of the received detection means, the type of the symbol display that is stopped and displayed can be determined. As a result, it is determined whether or not the display mode determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display mode actually stopped and displayed match, and if they do not match, an error command is set and an error notification is sent. It is configured to run. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a variable display that is uncomfortable.

Since this control example has a different variation display mode, for example, when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the operation content of the inner reel 811, the variation display mode without using the inner reel 811 (for example, the outer reel). It may be configured to execute the process of switching to the variable display mode using 821 and the variable display mode using the 7-segment display unit 1600). As a result, even if a problem occurs in one variation display mode, the player can be made to execute the variation display without a sense of discomfort. Further, in this case, the variable display mode of the switching destination may be different depending on the set gaming state, or the setting may be made by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22). Is also good.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described. In the main control device 110, a pachinko machine such as a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol), a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol), a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, and a display setting on the second symbol display device 83. Perform 10 main processes. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 118, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are conditions for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display control in the variable display device unit 80. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 for making settings and the like.

For the special symbol lottery and the display control condition setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the purpose, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 137). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each of which is composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are set according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. Are stored respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 66.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 137).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 120 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It can be divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 120 (a)) is composed of a first random number table for low probability and a first random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers that are big hits is different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the low probability time of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for the high probability time of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table 202a for the low probability. (See FIG. 120 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are the first random number table 202a for the high probability (FIG. 120 (a)). ) Is stored in). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/40".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 120 (b)). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39", the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) is selected, and when the value is "40 to 79", the jackpot B (16R). (Time saving jackpot) is selected, and if it is "80 to 99", jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot) is selected.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot types set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 120 (b)) are three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, but are not limited to four types. The above jackpot types may be selected, or two or less types, for example, only one type of jackpot may be selected. Further, the type and ratio of the jackpot types selected for the jackpot of the special symbol 1 and the jackpot of the special symbol 2 may be set differently.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the variable display device unit 80, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability time and a special symbol for low-probability time, and a range of random value values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times where the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64, which is for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the variable display device unit 80 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 137) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 121) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. ing.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 121. As shown in FIG. 121 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 121 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 121 (c)). And at least the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 121 (d)) are set. If the latent state (probability change with time reduction / non-state) is set as the gaming state, the deviation pattern table 202d2 is referred to, and if the time reduction state is set as the gaming state, the deviation is achieved. For (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (b). FIG. 121B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set respectively. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", and for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds). ), Each of "180 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 hits the fluctuation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 121 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal). The out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", the complete deviation is set, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

Also, for the off-reach, "0-149" for various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds), and "150-197" for various out-of-super reach (60 seconds), out of special reach. "198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 121 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out of alignment when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation becomes long at the time of the probability change and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where a big hit is likely to occur.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 121 (b) to 121 (d), the normal reach (30 seconds), the super reach (60 seconds), and the special reach (90 seconds) are the players who win the big hit of the special symbol. In this control example, the contents of each fluctuation pattern table are defined so that the expectation of the jackpot increases as the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected.

Then, when a variation pattern indicating normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) is set, a variation pattern command for indicating that effect is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. A reach effect is set based on the variation pattern command that is output and received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Here, in this control example, a plurality of reach effect modes are prepared. For example, among the inner reels 811 on the left inner reel 811a and the right inner reel 811c, the same display symbol (blue 7) is displayed on the effective line. The symbol reach effect mode in which the symbol R1 or the red 7 symbol R2) is stopped and displayed, the combination reach effect mode in which the combination symbol R3 is stopped and displayed at a specific position, and the lightning bolt LED671 is turned on, and the outer reel 821 is rotated. It has a rotation reach effect mode.

That is, the main control device 110 outputs only a command indicating that the reach effect is executed and the variable display period as the variable display effect set on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and outputs the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to select which reach effect mode is to be set as the reach effect mode to be executed this time on the side.

Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, when setting the reach effect mode to be executed this time, the current game state, the result of the special symbol lottery, the presence / absence of the player's operation on the frame button 22, and the value that can be randomly acquired. It is configured to be set based on (value of the effect counter) and the like. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various reach effect modes, so that the reach effect can be executed at various timings in the execution process of the variable display effect, and the player can perform the reach effect. Can prevent you from getting bored of the game early.

In this control example, the content of the reach effect mode to be executed this time is set at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, that is, at the start timing of the new special symbol fluctuation. , Not limited to this. For example, the stop display mode (stop roll) of the left inner reel 811a for first stopping the variation display may be determined, and the reach effect mode to be executed this time may be set according to the determination result. With this configuration, the timing for setting the reach effect mode can be different. Further, since the timing for setting the reach effect mode can be different from the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is started, that is, the timing at which the execution processing is concentrated in the pachinko machine 10, the timing for various processing of the pachinko machine 10 can be set. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a large load is temporarily applied.

Further, as an effect (so-called Gase effect) in which the special reach 3 (see FIGS. 114 and 115), which is a pseudo-variable effect, is terminated in the middle of the effect, for example, the lottery result of this time is out of order, and the variation pattern. In the case of "normal reach" in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set, a short-gaze effect is executed in which the fluctuation display ends without the first chance being established, and a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern. In the case of "super reach", the first chance may be established and the second chance may not be established.

By executing such a fake effect, the same effect mode as the pseudo-variation effect can be executed even when the variation time of 90 seconds is not set, so that the first half of the pseudo-variation effect is given to the player. It is possible to make it easier to experience the part, and it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game without experiencing at least a part of the pseudo-variation effect.

Further, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set, the special symbol jackpot can be established at the timing when the second chance in the pseudo-variation effect can be established. The combination of display symbols (third symbol) for indicating that the winner has been won may be configured to be stopped and displayed. As a result, after the first chance is established, the effect of whether or not the second chance is established (the effect of whether or not the special symbol R6 stops on the fifth special line), or the blue 7 symbol The effect content can be set so as to execute any of the effects in which R1 and the red 7 symbol R2 are in the reach state. Therefore, regardless of which effect content is set, the player can have a feeling of expectation for the big hit, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, for example, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set, an effect for establishing the second chance after the first chance is established (see FIG. 114 (a)) (see FIG. 114 (a)). It may be configured to skip the effect (see FIG. 114 (b)) and execute the effect (skip effect) to execute the final stage (see FIG. 115) of the pseudo-variation effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect. In addition, even in the production mode other than the special reach 3, it may be configured to execute the gassing effect or the skip effect corresponding to the set length of the fluctuation time.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 66. , Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 120 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 120 (c)), it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (of a normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 120 (c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the sphere passes through the through gate 66 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 140 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the sphere passes through the through gate 66 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 140 is further reduced. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 140 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time is And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 127). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 137).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and display settings in the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80 are set according to the values of the counters and the like. , The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. Counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, jackpot flag 203i, time saving flag 203k, counter buffer 203y, It also has at least a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning prize, the original special symbol jackpot lottery is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. It should be noted that the various information corresponds to whether or not the information is correct, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the special symbol 1 of the RAM 233 or It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol among the special symbols 2.

In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start prize. From, various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted. In addition, this prediction (look-ahead) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probabilistic gaming state) at the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning is started. .. As a result, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize can be accurately predicted.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2), and the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1) is used with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. ) Is changed to the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2), so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 66, and the acquired data is vacated in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (variable display device unit) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed in 80 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S504 in FIG. 131). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 128).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 128 and S505 in FIG. 131). ). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the variable display device unit 80 based on the reserved ball number notified by this display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls in the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 140 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, detailed explanations will be omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the process of S510 in FIG. 131, and is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 128). Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variation display in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 128 and S511 in FIG. 131). reference).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 66 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 66 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. See S804 in FIG. 127). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 133).

When the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of holding times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S803 in FIG. 134: No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is the special symbol. If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of this probability variation flag 203g is set to off, and in the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or jackpot C (2R probability variation time saving no jackpot) (big hit game). When it is determined that it is the end timing), it is set to on (see S1214 in FIG. 138). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 129) to determine whether or not the game state is a probable change state (see S302 in FIG. 129), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. It is set (see S1202 in FIG. 138).

Specifically, when the special symbol change start processing (FIG. 129, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 129, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the value is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability time.

In this control example, the timing for setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON is the start timing (big hit) of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variation time saving no jackpot) in the jackpot control process. Although it is set as the end timing of the game), it may be set so that the lottery of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit can be performed in a high probability state. If the condition for executing the first special symbol lottery after the big hit game is satisfied, the probability change flag 203g is set to on by the time the special symbol lottery is executed. It may be configured as.

Further, the timing for setting the probability variation flag 203g to off is set to the case where the jackpot game is started, but the jackpot game is not limited to this, and for example, a display symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (second symbol). May be configured to be set to off when is displayed as stopped.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol. When the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is larger than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol. If the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. This time reduction / medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the jackpot B (16R time reduction jackpot) is executed at the start timing of the ending effect (that is, the end timing of the jackpot game) by the jackpot control process (FIG. 138). See S1215). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the time is shortened in the normal symbol variation processing (see S708 in FIG. 133), and is subtracted by 1 each time the variation time elapses in the special symbol variation processing. (See S205 in FIG. 128). When the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 and the above-mentioned probability change flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state and the time reduction state of the special symbol.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is turned on, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state by the jackpot control process (FIG. 138, S1104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed.

The time saving flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol (high probability state of the normal symbol). If the value of the time saving flag 203k is on, the pachinko machine 10 is the special symbol. If the value of the time saving flag 203k is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the normal symbol). When the initial value of the time saving flag 203k is set to off and it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the start timing (end timing of the jackpot game) of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot). , Set to on (see S1216 in FIG. 138). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 129) to determine whether or not the game state is a probable change state (see S302 in FIG. 129), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. It is set (see S1202 in FIG. 138).

As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are both set to ON, and the time saving game is given together with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the jackpot C (2R probability variation with time reduction and no jackpot), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, but the time reduction flag 203k remains off, and only the probability variation game is given to the latent probability game state.

Here, in the latent probability game state (probability change state of the special symbol), the probability that the lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 will be a big hit is set with a high probability. Unless it is suggested that the player is in the latent probability game state by changing the production mode, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a latent probability game. On the other hand, in the time-saving game, since the opening number and opening time of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 are changed, it is easy to determine whether the game is a normal game or a time-saving game. Is.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize that it is a probabilistic game when a time-saving game is given together with the probable change game based on the jackpot A (16R probable change jackpot) (when the probabilistic game state is set). , When only the probabilistic game is given based on the jackpot C (2R probable change time-saving no jackpot), it becomes difficult to recognize that the probabilistic game is a probabilistic game (so-called latent probability change state). As a result, the player needs to guess whether the game is in a normal game or a probabilistic game, and the player's interest can be improved.

The other memory area is 203z, which is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 201. A stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by MPU201 are stored, and a work area (work area) where various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. Have.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 137) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 136) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 135) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (a). The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, an outer reel operation table 222c, an inner reel operation table 222d, a symbol operation table 222e, a special effect scenario table 222f, and a symbol group storage area 222g. ing.

Since the variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, it will be briefly described. However, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the variation pattern command indicates a rough variation. Further detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a from the contents (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.)). This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

Here, a description will be given based on the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 222a in the variation pattern selection table in this control example. In this control example, in addition to the lottery result or the pass / fail judgment result of the special symbol, when the set variation pattern (variation time) is a long period (long period), the third symbol is referred to by the dedicated variation pattern table. It is configured to set the variable display mode of.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 222a3 for long variation will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram in which the contents specified in the variation pattern table 222a3 for long variation are schematically designated. As shown in FIG. 123, the variation pattern table 222a3 for long variation shows the type of variation time (for example, 60 seconds or 90 seconds) set in this special symbol variation, and the lottery result of this special symbol variation. The effect mode is set based on the currently set operation scenario (operation pattern) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223j.

The outer reel operation table 222c is a data table in which the operation contents of the outer reel 821 are stored. A plurality of operation scenarios corresponding to the fluctuation pattern commands received from the main control device 110 are set in the outer reel operation table 222c, and correspond to the fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145). The operation scenario to be performed is determined.

In the operation scenario determined here, the operation contents (motor data) of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c are set in association with the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p, and the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). Each time the outer reel control process (see S3002 in FIG. 150) is executed, the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is updated (see S3102 in FIG. 150), and the corresponding motor data is set (see S3104 in FIG. 150). ). The drive of each outer reel drive motor KM2a to 2c is controlled by the motor MPU based on the motor data set here.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, dynamic display (third) until the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Apart from the variable display of the symbol), as an effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol, the effect display for driving the outer reel 821 and the inner reel 811 is configured to be executed.

That is, the case where the display symbol printed on the display surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 is used as the third symbol and the case where the display symbol is used as the effect symbol for the effect can be switched. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which variable display mode (motion display mode) is for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness. ..

It is also configured to switch the variable display mode for showing the third symbol in one dynamic display executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, when a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set is set as a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol, the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 is displayed for the first 30 seconds. It is configured to be used as the third symbol, and the display symbol printed on the outer reel 821 is used as the third symbol for the latter half of 30 seconds. As a result, it is possible to set a variable display mode that is difficult for the player to predict, and it is possible to provide a more unexpected game.

In this control example, any one of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 and the 7-segment display unit 1600 is configured to have a variable display mode for displaying the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a light emitting means (display means) composed of a plurality of LEDs may be provided at a specific position on the game board 13, and the light emitting means (display means) may be used to execute variable display of the third symbol. .. As a result, all the variable display modes using the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, and the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be used as the variable display mode for the effect, so that the effect with a higher degree of freedom can be executed. , The effect of production can be enhanced. Further, during the variable display period of the special symbol, the above-mentioned light emitting means (display means) is used to notify that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and only when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the inner reel 811, The third symbol may be stopped and displayed by using any of the outer reels 821 and the 7-segment display unit 1600.

The inner reel operation table 222d is a data table in which the operation contents of the inner reel 811 are stored. In the reel operation table 222d, a plurality of operation scenarios corresponding to the fluctuation pattern commands received from the main control device 110 are set, and correspond to the fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145). The operation scenario to be performed is determined.

In the operation scenario determined here, the operation contents (motor data) of the inner reel drive motors KM1a to 1c are set in association with the value of the inner reel operation counter 223q, and the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). Each time the inner reel control process (see S3003 in FIG. 151) is executed, the value of the inner reel operation counter 223q is updated (see S3202 in FIG. 151), and the corresponding motor data is set (see S3204 in FIG. 151). ). The drive of the outer reel drive motors KM1a to 1c is controlled by the motor MPU based on the motor data set here.

The symbol operation table 222e is an operation of each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80 according to the game state and game conditions to be set. It is a data table in which the operation information referred to when setting the initial state (operation pattern) of the embodiment is stored. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a plurality of variable display modes (operation display modes) for showing the lottery result of a special symbol (for example, a variable display mode using the inner reel 811 and a variable display using the outer reel 821). It is configured so that any of the mode and the variable display mode using the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be set). Then, for example, when the variable display mode to be executed is different due to the setting of different gaming states, it is necessary to position the various devices in the initial state corresponding to the changed variable display mode. Since the symbol operation table 222e stores the initial state (operation pattern) of various devices corresponding to each variation display mode, the drive control to be executed for the various devices when the variation display mode is changed is performed. It can be executed accurately.

Further, in the symbol operation table 222e, even when the variable display mode is not changed, each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821,) provided in the variable display device unit 80 is used when a special effect is executed. The 7-segment display unit 1600, the displacement member 670) is configured to execute a special operation control, and the symbol operation table 222e stores the initial state (operation pattern) of the special effect.

In addition, when a jackpot of a special symbol is won and a jackpot game is executed, each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) provided in the variable display device unit 80 is executed. ) Is configured to be executed, and the initial state (operation pattern) of the jackpot effect is also stored in the symbol operation table 222e.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124, the contents stored in the symbol operation table 222e will be specifically described. As an operation pattern when a normal state or a latent state is set as the gaming state, the reels are included. Reel 811 (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c) is defined as operable (indicated as "○" in FIG. 124), and outer reel 821 (left outer reel 821a, middle outer reel 821b, right outer) is specified. The reel 821c) is defined as a first region (denoted as "first" in FIG. 124) formed of a transmissive member, and a 7-segment display unit 1600 (left 7-segment display unit 1600a, middle 7-segment display unit 1600b, right). The 7-segment display unit 1600c) is defined as non-display (indicated as "x" in FIG. 124), and the displacement member 670 (left displacement member 670a, middle displacement member 670b, right displacement member 670c) is placed in the first position (most open). The operation pattern (first operation pattern) defined as the state (see FIG. 114 (a)) is stored.

When this first operation pattern is selected, the rotation operation of the inner reel 811 is executed in correspondence with the variation display of the special symbol, and the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 is stopped and displayed as the third symbol. (See FIG. 110 (a)).

Next, the inner reel 811 (left inner reel 811a, middle inner reel 811b, right inner reel 811c) can be operated as an operation pattern when the time saving state or the probability variation state is set as the gaming state (in FIG. 124). The outer reel 821 (left outer reel 821a, middle outer reel 821b, right outer reel 821c) is defined as "○"), and the second region (indicated as "second" in FIG. 124) in which the light emitting region 822 is formed. It is defined that the 7-segment display unit 1600 (left 7-segment display unit 1600a, middle 7-segment display unit 1600b, right 7-segment display unit 1600c) can be operated (indicated as "○" in FIG. 124), and the displacement member. An operation pattern (second operation pattern) that defines 670 (left displacement member 670a, middle displacement member 670b, right displacement member 670c) as the first position (most open state (see FIG. 114 (a))) is stored. ing.

When this second operation pattern is selected, the variation display of the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 (FIG. 111). (A)). In this control example, the inner reel unit 810 is configured to operate even when the second operation pattern is set. That is, the inner reel unit 810 is configured to operate even when the second region of the outer reel 821 is displayed and the player cannot visually recognize the rotation status of the inner reel 811.

With this configuration, for example, when a problem occurs in the 7-segment display unit 1600 and the lottery result of the special symbol cannot be notified without discomfort depending on the display mode of the 7-segment display unit 1600. The outer reel 821 is rotated so that the player can visually recognize the inner reel 811. It is possible to stop and display the lottery result using the inner reel 811.

Returning to FIG. 124, the description of the contents specified in the symbol operation table 222e will be continued. In a state where the first operation pattern is set as the operation pattern, the content of the special reach (first special effect) executed when the first effect condition is satisfied is defined as the operation pattern "operation 3".

In this "operation 3", only the inner reel 811b of the inner reels 811 can be operated "○", each outer reel 821 is set to the first position, and the left 7-segment display unit 1600a of the 7-segment display unit 1600a is set. Only the right 7-segment display unit 1600c can be displayed, the left displacement member 670a and the right displacement member 670c of the displacement member 670 can be variably operated in the range of the first position and the middle displacement member 670b in the range of the first position to the third position. The operation content is specified. When this operation pattern "operation 3" is set, the above-mentioned effect (special reach 1) is executed in FIG. 112.

Further, in a state where the first operation pattern is set as the operation pattern, the content of the special reach 2 (second special effect) executed when the second effect condition is satisfied is defined, and the first operation is defined as the operation pattern. The content of the special reach 3 (third special effect) to be executed when the third effect condition is satisfied in the state where the pattern is set is defined. In addition, "motion 6" is defined as an motion pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game.

In the special effect scenario table 222f, the operation control contents for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) when the special effect is executed are defined according to the elapsed time. The data table is set when the special effect is executed, and the operation control contents corresponding to the values of the scenario counter 223i which are periodically updated are stored.

Next, the contents of the special effect scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special effect scenario table 222f. As shown in FIG. 125, the special effect scenario table 222f shows various devices (inner reel 811 and outer reel) when the special effects (reach) 1 to 3 executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example are executed. The operation content for the 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, and the displacement member 670) is defined corresponding to the elapsed time (value of the scenario counter 223i). Since the scenario counter 223i is configured to update the counter value every 1 millisecond as described later, the scenario is actually defined in the special production scenario table 222f in milliseconds. In FIG. 125, the scenario is defined in seconds (S units) for convenience of explanation.

First, the special effect (reach) 1 is defined in association with a special effect scenario having an effect period of 60 seconds (60S), and can be set when a variation time of 60 seconds is set. In this special effect (reach) 1, each inner reel 811 starts to rotate at the timing when the remaining fluctuation time is 60 seconds, that is, at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is started, and each outer reel 821 has each inner reel 811. An operation scenario is defined in which the rotation state of the reel is positioned in the first region (first position) so that the player can visually recognize it, and the displacement member 670 is positioned in the first position.

After that, the left inner reel 811a is stopped at the timing of the remaining fluctuation time of 55 seconds, the right outer reel 821c is stopped at the timing of the remaining fluctuation time of 50 seconds, and the middle inner reel 811b is stopped at the timing of the remaining fluctuation time of 40 seconds. Stop, that is, all the inner reels 811 are temporarily stopped and the 7-segment display unit 1600 is fully lit. Then, the left 7-segment display unit 1600a and the right 7-segment display unit 1600c are displayed with a pattern imitating "7" at the timing of the remaining fluctuation time of 35 seconds, and the middle inner reel is displayed at the timing of the residual fluctuation time of 34 seconds. The 811b is revariated (see FIG. 112). Then, the operation scenario is defined so that the middle reel 811b is stopped at the timing of the remaining fluctuation time of 5 seconds.

In this way, when various operation controls are executed for a plurality of devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670), operation scenarios for each device are defined in advance. By doing so, the special effect can be executed smoothly.

The symbol group storage area 222g is data in which information for limiting the symbol types (“0” to “9”) that can be selected when setting the display symbol to be stopped and displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 is stored. A display symbol that is an area and is to be stopped and displayed using the symbol type included in the set symbol group is set.

The symbol group storage area 222g is a storage area in which the symbol group referred to when setting the stop display mode of the third symbol is stored. Here, the contents of the symbol group storage area 222g will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol group storage area 222g.

As shown in FIG. 126, three symbol groups (symbol groups A to C) are defined in the symbol group storage area 222g, and each symbol group has a different number. Specifically, the symbol group A has a number of "0,1,7", the symbol group B has a number of "2,3,4,5,6,8,9", and the symbol group C has a number of "0 to". The numbers "9" are stored in association with each other.

The symbol group storage area 222g has a display mode of each stop symbol when a time saving state is set as a gaming state and a variation display of the third symbol (see FIG. 111) using the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed. It is used when setting. As described above, in this control example, only one segment (light emitting region 822) constituting the seven segments is formed in a different form, and the light emitting region 822 is visually recognized by the player even when the lights are turned off with respect to the other segments. It is formed as an easy-to-use segment.

Therefore, in this control example, in order to suppress the misidentification of the player, it is configured to execute the process of setting the stop symbol mode, and the symbol group storage area 222 g is used in the process.

Returning to FIG. 122 (b), the description will be continued. FIG. 122B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a remaining time reduction counter 223g. At least a specific remaining period flag 223h, a scenario counter 223i, an effect counter 223j, a game state storage area 223k, an operation mode storage area 223m, a stop symbol storage area 223n, a returning flag 223l, a power supply cutoff flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided. Has been.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1, first area to fourth area for special symbol 2). Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start prize. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the corresponding special symbol among the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) or special symbol 2 (second special symbol). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the variable display device unit 80), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2308 in FIG. 142). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the variable display device unit 80. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol 1 reserved ball number. The value of the counter 223b is configured to be notified to the player by using a dedicated display means.

Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, has a maximum of 4 reserved balls (number of standbys) for the variation effect of the special symbol 2 held in the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts up to times. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a special symbol 2 whose number of reserved balls is added by entering the second winning opening 140 and is different from the display of the reserved ball number symbol of the special symbol 1 in the dedicated display means. Since the difference is only in that it is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol and the others are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

It should be noted that the operation content to be output to the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is different based on the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. It may be configured, and for example, a special voice or light emission mode may be provided to be executed only when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 both reach the upper limit. This makes it possible for the player to enthusiastically play a game in order to store the reserved ball.

The variation start flag 223d is set to ON in the variation pattern reception process executed when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2302 in FIG. 142), and the variation display in the variable display device unit 80 is displayed. Is turned off when the setting is made (see S2602 in FIG. 145). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 identifies a device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) that executes the variation display of the third symbol based on the received display variation pattern command, and corresponds to the MPU (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600). Display control is executed using the MPU 114a for the segment and the MPU 114b for the reel).

The stop type selection flag 223e is set on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2305 in FIG. 142), and is turned off when the stop type is set (FIG. 145). See S2609). When the stop type selection flag 223e is set to on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variation effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed by the variable display device unit 80. Control.

In this control example, the third symbol variation corresponding to the above-mentioned special symbol variation display is used by using various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) controlled by the display control device 114. In addition to the display, the variable display for suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol and the variable display for big hit effect executed during the big hit game are configured to be executable. The suggestion effect variation display is a suggestion effect variation display command set for a device other than the device targeted for the third symbol variation display when the display variation pattern command is set by the voice lamp control device 113. Is executed when the display control device 114 receives.

Further, when the jackpot start command for display set by the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the variable display for jackpot effect is executed based on the content included in the command. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of devices capable of executing the third symbol variation display, the variation display for suggestion effect is executed by using the device that does not execute the third symbol variation corresponding to one special symbol variation. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which device is executing the third symbol variation, and it is possible to provide a surprising game.

In addition, in a device such as the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 on which the display symbol is printed in advance, the display symbol is printed on the third symbol based on the display variation pattern command set by the voice lamp control device 113. Since it is possible to switch between the pattern used as the reel and the pattern used as the effect symbol for the suggestion effect, it is possible to provide a game that is more surprising to the player.

The remaining time reduction counter 223g is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol fluctuations until the time reduction state ends. The remaining time reduction counter 223g indicates that the time reduction state has been set in the state setting process (see S2317 in FIG. 144) executed by the command determination process (see S2212 in FIG. 142) of the voice lamp control device 113. When it is determined that the status command for is received (S2506: Yes in FIG. 144), a value of 100 is set (S2507 in FIG. 144), and the variation for display is set in the variation display setting process (see S2606 in FIG. 145). After setting the pattern command, 1 is subtracted (see S2606 in FIG. 145).

Then, in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see S2603 in FIG. 146), when the current value is referred to and it is determined that the value is 5 or less (S2709: Yes in FIG. 146), it can be executed during the time saving state. The remaining number display process (see S2710 in FIG. 147) for displaying the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations (remaining time reduction number) is executed, and the remaining time reduction number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 (FIG. 111 (b). )reference).

That is, in this control example, when the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state reaches 5, the player is configured to be notified of the remaining time reduction number. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the time saving state suddenly ends without giving notice to the player. In addition, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the number of remaining time reductions is displayed immediately after the time reduction state is set, making it difficult to grasp the stop display content of the third symbol.

In this control example, the period in which the remaining time reduction number is displayed is set to a period in which the remaining time reduction number is 5 times or less, but the period is not limited to this, and the remaining time reduction number may be a period of 10 times or less. Further, it is not necessary to continuously display the number of remaining time reductions, and for example, it may be configured to be displayed when the number of remaining time reductions is a multiple of 10. Further, in this control example, the remaining time reduction number is always displayed during the period for displaying the remaining time reduction number, but it may be configured to determine whether or not to display the remaining time reduction number by lottery. Alternatively, the player may operate the frame button 22 to select whether or not to display the number of remaining time reductions.

The specific remaining time flag 223h is a flag for indicating whether or not it is a period for displaying the remaining time reduction number in the time saving state, and is set to be turned on when it is a period for displaying the remaining time reduction number. be. This specific remaining period flag 223h is set to on when the remaining number display process (see S2710 in FIG. 147) is executed (see S2801 in FIG. 147), and when the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223g becomes 0. It is set to off (see S2806 in FIG. 147).

Further, it was referred to in the stop symbol setting process (see S2608 in FIG. 153) for setting the stop display mode (stop symbol) of the third symbol (see S3406 in FIG. 153), and it was determined that it was set to ON. In some cases (S3406: Yes in FIG. 153), a stop symbol is set using a numerical value different from the displayed numerical value of the number of remaining time reductions (see S3408 in FIG. 153).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the stop display mode (stop symbol) of the third symbol and the display mode indicating the number of remaining time reductions from being the same display mode. Information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and information indicating the number of remaining time reductions can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

The scenario counter 223i is a counter referred to when determining the timing for executing operation control for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670) of the variable display device unit 80, and is a variable display setting. When the operation scenario (effect scenario) to be executed this time is set in the variation pattern selection process (see S2603 in FIG. 146) executed in the process (see S2213 in FIG. 145), the setting is made (see S2707 in FIG. 146). A value corresponding to the set operation scenario (effect scenario) is set (see S2708 in FIG. 146).

The set value is subtracted in the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 141) of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S3005 in FIG. 149). When it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is larger than 0 (see S3001 in FIG. 149), the operation control content for each device (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670) of the variable display device unit 80 Referenced to set.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 125, the operation scenario (effect scenario) defines the operation control content corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223i and corresponding to each device, and the operation control process (FIG. FIG. Based on the value of the scenario counter 223i at the time when (see S2211 of 149) is executed and the currently set operation scenario (effect scenario), the operation control content to be executed in this processing is determined and determined. Set the operation command (motor data) according to the operation control content. Then, in the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2202 in FIG. 141), an operation command is output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 for each device based on the content of the received operation command. Perform the action.

In this control example, when an operation scenario (effect scenario) is set, the value corresponding to the time of the operation scenario (effect scenario) is set in the scenario counter 223i, and the value of the scenario counter 223i is set every 1 millisecond. It is configured to subtract. That is, when a 30-second operation scenario (effect scenario) is set, "30000" is set as the value of the scenario counter 223i, and the scenario counter 223i is executed every time the operation control process (S2211 in FIG. 149) is executed. Although it is configured to subtract 1 from the value of, it may be configured as long as it can determine the progress of the operation scenario. , Difference between the storage means that stores the timekeeping information at the timing when the operation scenario (effect scenario) is set, the timekeeping information that is stored in the storage means, and the current time information that is timed by the timekeeping means. Is calculated, and the progress status of the operation scenario (directing scenario) may be determined based on the calculation result.

Further, in this control example, the operation control contents of a plurality of devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, displacement member 670, etc.) possessed by the variable display device unit 80 are collectively defined in one operation scenario (effect scenario). By doing so, it is configured so that the operation contents of a plurality of devices are less likely to be displaced, but the operation scenario (directing scenario) is defined for each device without limitation. A dedicated scenario counter may be provided for each operation scenario. With this configuration, by combining a plurality of operation scenarios, it is possible to increase the number of operation control patterns using a plurality of devices included in the variable display device unit 80.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for selection of various effects (variation pattern, notice effect, etc.), various lottery, etc., and is 0 in the main process (see FIG. 141) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is repeatedly updated in the range from 198 (not shown).

The game state storage area 223k is a data area for storing information for indicating the current game state included in various state commands output from the main control device 110, and is on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is used to determine the currently set gaming state. In this control example, each time a different gaming state is set in the main control device 110, and each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set. Since the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the state command is set, the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably determine the current gaming state.

In addition, the game state storage area 223k of this control example has an area for storing the currently set game state and an area for storing the previously set game state. For example, immediately before the end of the jackpot game (during the jackpot game), the game state at the time of the jackpot winning can be determined, the jackpot is won with the time saving state set, and the jackpot is won again after the jackpot is completed. It is possible to set different production modes depending on whether the time saving state is set or the jackpot is won in the state where the normal state is set and the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends.

The returning flag 223l is a flag for indicating that the reel operation confirmation process is currently being executed after the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the reel operation confirmation process is being executed. .. This returning flag 223l is set to ON when the reel operation confirmation process (see S2013 in FIG. 140) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (FIG. 139). 140 S2104), when the outer reel 821 moves to the second position (S2102: Yes in FIG. 140), it is set to off (S2113 in FIG. 140).

When determining whether or not a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed from the execution of the reel operation confirmation process to the detection that the outer reel 821 has moved to the second position (S2105 in FIG. 140). It is determined whether the returning flag 223l is set to ON (S2103 in FIG. 140). The returning flag 223l is determined that the outer reel 821 has not reached the second position even though 10 seconds have passed since the reel operation confirmation process was executed (S2105: Yes in FIG. 140). It is set to off when setting the error command (S2107 in FIG. 140). It is also set to off when the reel operation confirmation process is normally executed (see S2113 in FIG. 140).

The operation mode storage area 223m stores information for determining which is the current operation mode (operation pattern). As for the operation mode, "operation 1" is stored when the current gaming state is the normal state and the latent state, "operation 2" is stored when the current game state is the time saving state and the probability changing state, and "operation 2" is stored when the special reach 1 is in progress. "Action 3" is stored, "Action 4" is stored if the special reach 2 is in progress, "Action 5" is stored if the special reach 3 is in progress, and "Action 6" is stored if the jackpot is in progress. .. Each operation mode (operation pattern) is set with reference to the symbol operation table 222e.

In this control example, various devices (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600, displacement member 670) arranged in the variable display device unit 80 according to the operation mode stored in the operation mode storage area 223 m. ) Is configured to be different in the operation mode (initial mode (initial position) until the operation control is executed, and the presence / absence of the target of the operation control).

It should be noted that a holding means (backup means) that can hold the information for indicating the operation mode stored in the operation mode storage area 223 m even when the power is turned off may be provided. Thereby, even after the power failure is restored, the operation mode of various devices of the variable display device unit 80 can be set to an appropriate operation mode.

The stop symbol storage area 223n is a storage area for temporarily storing the set display mode of the stop symbol. In the stop symbol storage area 223n, when it is determined in the variation display setting process (see S2213 in FIG. 145) that the stop type selection flag is set to ON (S2607: Yes in FIG. 145), the stop is executed. Information indicating the stop symbol set in the symbol setting process (see S2608 of FIG. 153) is stored.

In this control example, a predetermined condition is set in a state in which a time saving state is set as a game state (operation pattern (operation mode) is "operation 2"), and variation display of the third symbol is performed using the 7-segment display unit 1600. When is satisfied (when the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations (remaining time reduction number) for which the time reduction state is set is 5 times or less), the 7-segment display unit 1600 is configured to display the remaining time reduction number.

In the state of displaying the number of remaining time reductions in this way, if the stop symbol (a symbol imitating a number) of the third symbol and the value indicating the number of remaining time reductions are displayed, the display mode indicating the same number is displayed. There is a problem that it is difficult to understand whether the displayed display mode is for showing the lottery result of the special symbol or for showing the number of remaining time reductions. Therefore, in this control example, when the number of remaining time reductions is displayed, the process of controlling the stop symbol (the symbol imitating a number) of the third symbol to be different from the value indicating the number of remaining time reductions is performed. It is being executed, and the stop symbol set in this process is stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n.

The outer reel operation counter 223p is a counter referred to when determining a period for instructing an operation to the outer reel 821, and is an outer reel control process (S3002 in FIG. 150) of the operation control process (see S2211 in FIG. 149). When the value of the scenario counter 223i indicates that it is the timing to operate the outer reel 821 in the operation scenario (when the outer reel operation table is set), the value indicating the period for operating the outer reel 821 (END). Data) is set (S3107 in FIG. 150).

While the outer reel operation table 222c is set, the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is incremented by 1 in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141) (see S3102 in FIG. 150), and after the addition. It is referred to when determining whether the value has reached the END data (see S3103 in FIG. 150). Then, the operation of the outer reel drive motors KM2a to 2c is controlled based on the reference result of S3103 in FIG.

The inner reel operation counter 223q changes the target from the outer reel 821 to the inner reel 811 with respect to the above-mentioned outer reel operation counter 223p, and further sets and refers to the counter value. The difference is that the outer reel control process (see S3002 in FIG. 150) has been changed to the inner reel control process (see S3003 in FIG. 151). Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this control example, the operation scenario is managed based on the value of the scenario counter 223i, and when the operation scenario is the timing to operate any of the various devices, the operation target device is selected. It is configured to operate a dedicated counter. In this way, it is divided into a main counter (scenario counter 223i) for managing a large operation flow and a sub-counter (outer reel operation counter 223p, inner reel operation counter 223q) for managing the operation of each device. As a result, the number of items managed by the main counter can be reduced, so that the frequently executed scenario counter 223i can be simplified.

Further, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to manage only the counter corresponding to the main counter, and the display control device 114 is configured to manage the counter corresponding to the sub counter. While reducing the processing load of 113, the operations of various devices can be centrally managed, and the operations of various devices can be synchronized.

The power cutoff flag 223y sends a power cutoff command to the voice lamp control device 113 when the main control device 110 detects the power cutoff, and turns on the power cutoff flag 223y when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command. It is set and the power cutoff process is executed (S2217 in FIG. 141). Then, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 139), when the power-off flag 223y is on, the RAM work area is cleared and the data read process is executed, and the power-off flag 223y is set to off. (S2010 in FIG. 139). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process when the power is turned off can be reused by the data read process in the start-up process when the power is restored, and the game can be continuously executed. Can be done.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 142) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 127 to 138. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the variable display device unit 80 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66. The through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 127), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the variable display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display (variation time) of the third symbol performed in the unit 80.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the variable display device unit 80 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. The jackpot game is included in the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

That is, in this control example, a new special symbol change occurs from the execution of the stop display indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot to the end of the jackpot game (until the ending period of the jackpot game ends). It is configured not to start. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a new special symbol change is started during the jackpot game and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game.

Not limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, during the period when the stop display indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is being executed, or during the ending period of the big hit game, a new special symbol change. It may be set as a period during which it is possible to start a new special symbol change during a jackpot game. As a result, the number of times the special symbol change is executed can be increased.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol N1) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variable display in the special symbol). Hold count N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (that is, whether there is a reserved memory of the special symbol 2) (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 137) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and the extracted values are used in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 2) (S204: No), it is special. It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (that is, the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 are not stored) (S209: No), the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are determined. Since there are no reserved balls in both cases, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

In the process of S208, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the stop setting process is executed (S215), and this process is terminated. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

Next, the special symbol change start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 128) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first 1 This is a process for determining a condition (for example, a fluctuation time) relating to an effect pattern (variation pattern) of a variation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the variable display device unit 80.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S302). In the process of S302, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, thereby determining whether or not the probability change is currently in progress.

When it is determined that the probability is changing (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table (see FIG. 120 (a)) for high probability. Based on the jackpot determination value, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values set in the first random number table (see FIG. 117 (a)) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the determination value determined to be a big hit is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the determination value is not limited to this, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, so that the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 Based on the value and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 120 (a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), the jackpot is determined. The display mode at the time of a big hit indicating is set (S306).

In this process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the variable display device unit 80. Specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table. In this first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 39", the jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), which is any of the values "40 to 79". The jackpot type in the case is jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot), and the jackpot type in the case of any of "80 to 99" is jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit (big hit fluctuation pattern) is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 121) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1. After that, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the special symbol (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out of the special symbol is set (S308). ). In this process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined according to the set gaming state. Specifically, when the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent state, the variation pattern is determined using the off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 121 (c)). When the current gaming state is the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 121 (d)). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

In this control example, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that differs depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the set gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine different fluctuation patterns according to the current number of reserved balls. Further, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is set using the same fluctuation pattern table regardless of the set gaming state. , Not limited to this, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that differs according to the set game state and the number of reserved balls stored. It may be configured.

Further, in this control example, the same fluctuation pattern table (disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2) is used depending on whether the normal state is set as the gaming state and the latent state is set. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent state based on the determined fluctuation pattern.

In addition, different from the configuration of this control example, for example, a variation pattern table corresponding to each gaming state is provided, and a variation pattern table (normal variation pattern table) used in the normal state and a latent state are in progress. It may be configured so that the contents specified in the fluctuation pattern table (latent fluctuation pattern table) used in the above are slightly different from each other. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern table for normal use and the fluctuation for latent probability are used. It is preferable to unify the variation pattern types (variation time) that can be selected in the pattern table and to make the selection ratio of each variation pattern different. With this configuration, the player cannot identify the current gaming state from the determined variation pattern type, but the player can predict the current gaming state by the selection ratio of the determined variation pattern type. can. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the fluctuation pattern (disengagement fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol fluctuation executed a plurality of times.

Further, the special variation pattern type (variation time) determined only when the latent variation pattern table may be used may be configured to be selected with a low probability (for example, 1%). As a result, the player can be made to grasp the current gaming state only when the special variation pattern type is determined. Therefore, it is possible to provide a privilege (information that can grasp the current game state) that is advantageous to the player against the special symbol change that is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

In the process of S310, a variation pattern command for notifying each determined variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S310), a stop type command is set (S311), and then this process is terminated and a special symbol is displayed. Return to variable processing.

Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 128) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127).

In the stop setting process (S215), first, the stop display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The display mode of the stopped symbol stopped at this time is preset by the special symbol variation start processing (S208) of FIG. 129 (see S306 and S308 of FIG. 129).

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on and the jackpot C is reached. In that case, the yellow LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the lighting mode is not limited to the above-mentioned LED display color and lighting mode, and other lighting modes may be used as long as the lighting mode can identify the type of jackpot and the fluctuation state.

After the processing of S261 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S262). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S263), the start of the jackpot is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the lottery result of this time is out of order (not a big hit) (S262: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S269). .. If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 1 or more (0) (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S269: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265. In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 130, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the process corresponding to the result of the current special symbol fluctuation is immediately executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the process of S262 is configured to be executed after a predetermined time (predetermined stop display period) has elapsed after setting the stop display of the first symbol display device (see S261 in FIG. 130). good. That is, the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined in the special symbol fluctuation start processing is completed, and the stop display is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is also good. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the special symbol that has been stopped and displayed.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and determines whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (starting winning). This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 131) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is acquired (S502). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S503: No), the process proceeds to S507.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S504). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 137) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S505, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes of S507 to S512, the same process is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140 for the processing of S501 to S506. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 140, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S507 that the ball has not won the second winning opening 140 (S507: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a look-ahead process (S513), which is a process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S513).

In this look-ahead process (FIGS. 132, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601; No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a probabilistic change (S602), and the gaming state is determined. If is probable (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 120 (a)) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the gaming state is not probable (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 120 (a)) (S604), and S605. Move on to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process is terminated. In this look-ahead process (S513), not only in this embodiment, but also the type of the selected fluctuation pattern (off reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is subjected to the winning information command. May be configured to notify.

Further, in this control example, the look-ahead process is executed regardless of whether the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, but in either case. It may be configured to execute only the look-ahead process. For example, the look-ahead process is executed only when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140 corresponding to the special symbol 2 in which the special symbol change start process is preferentially executed. It may be configured to do so.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the first pattern attached to the second winning opening 140 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 520 and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 133), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S701: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704 :. No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the variable display device unit 80 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. The jackpot game is included in the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

In the processing of S709, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 120 (c)).

In the process of S708, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: No), the process proceeds to the process of S711. In the processing of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for the probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,29 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 120 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a hit of the normal symbol (S712), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (S712: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S714), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S714: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is currently underway. Whether or not it is determined (S715). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the big hit of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S715, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 140 The opening period of the first electric accessory 520 accompanying the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the process proceeds to the process of S717. In the processing of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 Is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S712: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S719, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the release period of the second winning opening 140 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S702: Yes). S722). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the processing of S723, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 137) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (S106 of FIG. 133) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the first electric accessory 520 is set by the process of S725, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 137) is executed, the electric accessory is executed. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 134), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S901) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1002). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process shifts to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1012 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1012 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1114 of the main process (FIG. 137), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1004: No). S1007: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 137), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 127) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 128) and the start winning process (see FIG. 131) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the variable display device unit 80 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 131) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or specified. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 127). The details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 133), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 129) is completed, the first symbol display device 37A, The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 129) after ending the variation display executed in 37B. , 37B is displayed as a stop (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 133), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 133), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 in the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 133). )do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process is shifted to S1101, and each process after S1101 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1109: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1108, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 135 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1112 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1114), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1001). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1101. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 137). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1104 in FIG. 138), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 130) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the processing of S1201, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are turned off (S1202), the opening command is set (S1203), and this processing is terminated as it is. do.

On the other hand, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1204). The special symbol jackpot includes the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the variable display device unit 80, and the special symbol jackpot. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the game. In the process of S1204, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205). When it is determined in the process of S1205 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206), and a new start is started. A round number command indicating the number of rounds is set (S1207), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208). If the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1208, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and the ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter 203h (S1217), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is A or C (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the time saving flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 155, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S2217 (see FIG. 141) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (S2214: Yes in FIG. 141), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2217. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S2217 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1514 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S2217 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S2217. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the variable display device unit 80 to display an error message. You may.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff flag 223y is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S2217 is executed (see S2217 in FIG. 141). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S2217 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned on at the moment of the start-up process. This is the case where the operation is started in a state where the execution of the power cutoff process of S2217 is completed even after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009) and setting the power cutoff flag 223y to off (S2010). , Set the initial value of RAM223 (S2011). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110. After that, the interrupt permission is set (S2012), the reel operation confirmation process is executed (S2013), and the process proceeds to the main process. The details of the reel operation confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power cutoff flag 223y turned off is that the start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the process from S2004 to S2006 is followed by S2008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2011, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S2011), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S2012), the reel operation confirmation process is executed (S2013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S2009 is that when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Here, the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), which is one of the processes in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reel operation confirmation process (S2013). In the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), a process for confirming whether the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 operate normally when the power is turned on is executed.

In the reel operation confirmation process (S2013), first, the outer reel unit 820 is moved to the second position (non-transmissive region) (S2101). Here, by moving the outer reel unit 820 to the non-transparent region (second position), it is possible to make the operation confirmation process of the inner reel, which is executed later, invisible. Next, the outer reel unit 820 determines whether or not the detection is performed at the origin position of the second position (S2102). If it is determined that the origin of the outer reel unit 820 is not detected (S2102: No), is the returning flag 223l turned on, that is, is the outer reel unit 820 moving to the origin of the second position? It is determined whether or not (S2103). If it is determined that the returning flag 223l is not on (S2103: No), the returning flag 223l is set to on (S2104), and the process returns to S2102.

Returning to the process of S2102, it is determined whether the outer reel unit 820 is detected at the origin of the second position (S2102). Even so, if it is determined that the outer reel unit 820 is not detected at the origin of the second position (S2102: No), it is determined whether or not the returning flag 223l is set to ON in the processing of S2104 (S2103). .. When it is determined that the returning flag 223l is set to ON (S2103: Yes), the returning flag 223l is set to ON, that is, a predetermined time after the return of the outer reel unit 820 is started. It is determined whether or not (10 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S2105). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the return was started (S2105: No), the process is returning to the process of S2102 because the return is in progress. On the other hand, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of recovery (S2105: No), an error command for notifying an abnormality of the outer reel unit 820 is set (S2106), and the power supply is cut off. Infinitely loop until. The abnormality of the outer reel unit 820 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the outer reel unit 820, or the variable display device unit 80 may display an error message.

On the other hand, in the process of S2102, if it is determined that the outer reel unit 820 is detected at the origin position of the second position (S2102: Yes), then the operation check process of the inner reel unit 810 is executed (S2107). .. Next, it is determined whether or not the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 of S2107 is completed (S2108). If it is determined that the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 has not been completed (S2108: No), the process of S2108 is looped until the operation confirmation process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation confirmation process of the inner reel unit 810 is completed (S2108: Yes), it is determined whether or not the normal operation of the inner reel unit 810 is confirmed in the process of S2107 (S2109). When the normal operation of the inner reel unit 810 is confirmed (S2109: Yes), the inner reel unit 810 is moved to the initial off-design row (S2110), and then the outer reel unit 820 is moved to the first position (S2109: Yes). (Transparent area) (S2111), and this process is terminated.

In this way, after the normality of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 is confirmed, each reel is configured to move to the initial position, so that immediately after the start-up process (see FIG. 139) is completed. It has the effect of being able to start the game. On the other hand, if an operation abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is found in the processing of S2109 (S2109: No), an error command indicating an operation abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is set (S2112), and this processing is terminated. .. The abnormality of the inner reel unit 810 is notified by the indicator lamp 34 in the same manner as the outer reel unit 820. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the inner reel unit 810, or the variable display device unit 80 may display an error message.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2201 this time was executed (S2201), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2201: No), the process proceeds to S2212 without performing the processes of S2202 to S2211. In the process of S2201, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S2202 to S2212, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2212, the variation display setting process of S2213, and the like in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S2201 (S2201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2203 to S2213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2202). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2208 described later (S2203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2204). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be.

Further, at the time of recovery from the power outage due to a power failure or the like, the effect permission command based on the game executed at the time of the power outage is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 136). .. The voice lamp control device 113 creates a display variation pattern command in the power-on notification process (S2204) based on the reception of the effect permission command including the fact that the special symbol is changing, and the display control device 113. Send to 114. The display control device 114 discriminates this fluctuation start command by a simple command determination process (see FIG. 118 (b)), and executes a variation display for power-on based on a variation pattern based on the received command (FIG. FIG. 82 (b) or (c)). As described above, the display variation pattern command created here is for executing a simple variation display, and is therefore simpler than the one selected in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146) described later. It is a thing. As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the player can be notified that the power is on with good response when the power is restored from the power failure.

In this control example, in addition to the fluctuation display using the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, the fluctuation display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 is configured to be executable. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the variable display for the power-on to be executed by the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600 regardless of which device is used for the variable display at the time of turning on the power. This eliminates the need to execute a reel operation that consumes more power due to the motor operation after the power is turned on, so that a sudden increase in power consumption can be suppressed. Further, even if the timing (remaining period) until the fluctuation display is stopped is unknown, the third symbol to be stopped and displayed by using the 7-segment display unit 1600 can be changed to an arbitrary third symbol at the stop timing. It can be made easy to make.

Further, after the effect permission command based on the game executed at the time of power off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 136), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command for stopping the variable display is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received by the simple command determination process (see 118 (b)), and the display mode based on the received command is the display mode when the power is turned on (FIG. 82 (b)). Or (see (c)) is stopped.

Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied in the variable display device unit 80. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2205 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2206). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player elapses for a predetermined time, the display mode of the variable display device unit 80 is changed to the initial mode (for example, the mode in which the displacement member 670 is changed to the fourth position). A setting for switching to is made, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2207). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2208), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the variable display device unit 80. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the variable display device unit 80, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2209, the effect execution management process is executed (S2210). In the effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the segment display device 600 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is set. The lamp editing process of S2208 is executed based on the time set in this effect execution management process. The sound editing / output processing of S2209 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the variable display device unit 80.

After the effect execution management process, an operation control process for controlling the operation of the reel or the displacement member is performed (S2211). The details of this operation control process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

After executing the operation control process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2212). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

Next, the process proceeds to S2213. In the process of S2213, the variable display setting process is executed (S2213). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the variable display device unit 80. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 145.

When the variation display setting process (S2213) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2214 (S2214: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2216), and the power-off process is executed (S2217). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S2218), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2214 (S2214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2215: No), the process returns to the process of S2201 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2215: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the variable display device unit 80 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2212). This command determination process (S2212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S2212), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S2301). When the variation pattern command is received (S2301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2302), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command received this time (S2303), and this process is terminated. .. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 145) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the variable display device unit 80 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S2301: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2304). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2306), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2304: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2307). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S2307: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 hold ball of the main control device 110. The value of the number counter 203e (the number of holdings N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2308). Further, in the process of S2309, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S2308 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is broken, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S2308. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start prize or drawing a special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S2308 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the variable display device unit 80.

In the process of S2307, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S2307: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2309). If it is determined in the process of S2309 that the winning information command has been received (S2310: Yes), the winning information (such as the lottery result of the special symbol) based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S2310), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the winning information command is not received (S2309: No), it is determined whether or not the command related to the jackpot has been received (S2311). When a command related to a jackpot is received in the process of S2311 (S2311: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S2311), and this process is terminated. The commands related to the jackpot include, for example, an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. Further, as the process corresponding to the received command related to the jackpot, for example, there is a process of setting a display opening command, a display round number command, and a display ending command.

Here, with reference to FIG. 143, a jackpot-related process (S2312), which is one process in the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related process (S2312). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the variable display device unit 80 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device 110 is performed. Processing corresponding to various commands sent from is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S2312), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the command determination process (S2212) has received the jackpot start command (S2401). When the jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S2402), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the variable display device unit 80.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2403). When the round number command is received (S2403: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S2404), and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control unit 110 as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2403: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2405). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2405: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2405: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2406), and the game state after the big hit is read from the game state storage area 223k (S2407). Next, the operation pattern corresponding to the information read in the process of S2407 is determined from the symbol operation table 222e (S2408). Specifically, since the time reduction or the probability change state is set after the jackpot ends, the operation 2 is determined as the operation pattern from the symbol operation table 222e (see FIG. 124). Next, the variable display device unit operation corresponding to the operation mode determined in the process of S2408 is set (S2409), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, in the probabilistic change or the time saving state, the display mode is set by the segment display device 600 (see FIG. 110 (b)). Since the fluctuation time in the time saving state is set to 1 second or 2 seconds, if the operation pattern is set after the jackpot ends, the outer reel unit 820 is placed in the player's visible area from the start to the end of the fluctuation. There may be a problem that the two regions 821a1 to 821c3 cannot be switched. In this control example, by setting the operation pattern of the variable display device unit during the ending, the outer reel unit 820 can be switched by the end of the big hit, and the trouble can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 142, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2311 that the command related to the jackpot has not been received, it is determined (S2311: No) whether or not the stop command has been received (S2313). If it is determined that the stop command has been received in the processing of S2313 (S2313: Yes), the execution stop processing of the variable display being executed is executed (S2314), and the display stop command is set (S2315). This process ends.

The display stop command set by the process of S2315 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted toward the variable display device unit 80. Upon receiving the display stop command, the variable display device unit 80 stops the variable effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

On the other hand, in the process of S2313, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2313: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S2316). If it is determined that the status command has been received in the processing of S2316 (S2316: Yes), the status setting processing is executed (S2317), and this processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 144, a state setting process (S2317), which is a process in the command determination process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the state setting process (S2317). In the state setting process (S2317), a process for extracting the current gaming state from the command received from the main control device 110 and setting the operation mode of the variable display device unit 80 is executed.

In the state setting process (S2317), first, the current gaming state is extracted from the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process (S2212) (S2501). Next, the symbol operation corresponding to the current gaming state is set using the symbol operation table 222e (S2502). The operation mode of the inner reel 811 is set (S2503), and the operation mode of the outer reel 821 is set (S2504). Next, the operation mode of the 7-segment display unit 1600 is set (S2505). In this control example, as shown with reference to FIG. 124, since the operation modes of the inner reel 811, the outer reel 821, the 7-segment display unit 1600, and the displacement member 670 differ depending on the corresponding gaming state, the processes of S2503 to S2505 are performed. The operation mode is set in each.

Next, it is determined whether the received state command is a command indicating the transition to the time saving state (S2506). If it is determined that the command indicates the transition to the time reduction state (S2506: Yes), 100 is set in the remaining time reduction counter 223g (S2507), and the process proceeds to S2508. On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the received state command is not a command indicating the transition to the time saving state (S2506: No), the current gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area 223k (S2508). , End this process.

Returning to FIG. 142, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined that the status command has not been received in the processing of S2316 (S2316: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S2318). ), Return to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the variable display device unit 80, the command is displayed by the variable display device. Set the command so that it is sent to the unit 80.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the variation display setting process (S2213) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2213). This variation display setting process (S2213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is mainly used to execute the variation effect in the variable display device unit 80. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2601). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2601: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2607 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2602), and then the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is selected. The variation pattern selection process for selection is executed (S2603).

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection process (S2603) will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern selection process (S2603). In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern type according to the effect mode is selected based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and the effect counter 223j counted by the voice lamp control device 113. be.

In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2701), and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern this time is a long variation (S2702). When it is determined in the processing of S2702 that the current fluctuation is a long fluctuation (S2702: Yes), the effect counter acquired in the processing of S2701 from the fluctuation pattern table 222a3 for long fluctuation (see FIG. 123 (b)). Based on the value of 223j, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command received in the process of S2303 of the command determination process (S2212) is determined (S2703). In the process of S2703, by setting the variation pattern table for long variation, it is possible to display the variation according to each effect period of the special reach 1 to 3. Next, the process proceeds to S2707.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2702 that the fluctuation is not long (S2702: No), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the time saving (S2704). If it is determined in the process of S2704 that the current gaming state is in the time saving (S2704: Yes), the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command in the process of S2703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 142). The corresponding variation pattern is selected from the probability variation time / short / medium variation pattern selection table 222a2 (S2705) based on the type and the effect counter 223j, and this process is terminated. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a display variation pattern command in the variation display setting process described later (see S2604 in FIG. 145).

On the other hand, in the process of S2704, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the time saving (S2704: No), the corresponding fluctuation pattern is usually changed to the middle fluctuation based on the extracted fluctuation pattern type and the effect counter 223j. It is selected from the pattern selection table 222a1 (S2706), and the process proceeds to S2707. By executing the process of the variation pattern selection process (S2603) in this way, it is possible to perform variation display according to each effect period (effect mode).

Next, an effect scenario corresponding to the variation pattern determined in any of the processes of S2703, S2705, and S2706 is set (S2707), and the value of the scenario counter 223i is set based on the set effect scenario (S2708). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223g is 5 or more (S2709). If it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter is 5 or more (S2709: Yes), the remaining number display process is executed (S2710), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223 g is less than 5 (S2709: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the details of the remaining number display process (S2710) will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the remaining number display process (S2710). This remaining number display process (S2710) is executed in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 146), and is a process for setting a command for displaying the remaining time reduction number on the segment display device 600.

In the remaining number display process (S2710), first, the specific remaining period flag 223h is set to ON (S2801). Next, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223 g (n) is read out (S2802). Next, the value of n-1 is calculated (S2803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of n-1 calculated in the process of S2803 is 0 (S2804). When it is determined that the value of n-1 is 0 (S2804: Yes), a display count command indicating "END" is set as the display mode of the count display period (1S) (S2805), and the specific remaining period. The flag 223h is set to off (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of N-1 is not 0 in the processing of S2804 (S2804: No), the display mode of the number display period (1S) is "n-1" calculated in the processing of S2803. A display count command indicating a value is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to S2809.

In this control example, the number of remaining time reductions is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600 from the time when the fluctuation of the time reduction state is stopped until the next fluctuation starts as described above (see FIG. 111 (b)). .. When the number of remaining time reductions is n, the number of remaining time reductions is displayed after the fluctuation of the nth variation is stopped, so that the number obtained by subtracting 1 from n is the remaining time reduction number. In this control example, the number of remaining time reductions is displayed after the fluctuation is stopped, but the number of remaining time reductions may be displayed before the fluctuation starts.

After executing the process of S2806 or S2807, the variation time of the variation pattern received this time is read out (S2808). Next, in the process of S2808, it is determined whether the read variation time is 1 second (S2809). When it is determined that the time is 1 second (S2809: Yes), a process of rewriting the determined fluctuation pattern into the shortening fluctuation pattern is executed (S2810). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2809 that the fluctuation time is not 1 second (S2809: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. When the processing of S2603 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the variable display device unit 80 is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S2603, and the command is transmitted to the variable display device unit 80. (S2604). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the variable display device unit 80 displays the variation of the third symbol in the variable display device unit 80 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. After finishing the process of S2604, next, the advance notice selection process for setting the advance notice effect based on the hit / miss determination result according to the current effect mode is executed (S2605).

Here, the details of the advance notice selection process (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (S2605). This advance notice selection process (S2605) is executed in the above-mentioned variable display setting process (see FIG. 145), and is a process for setting a notice effect based on a hit / fail determination result according to the current effect mode.

In the advance notice selection process (S2605), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2901), and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the time saving (S2902). In the process of S2902, when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (S2902: Yes), the hit / fail determination result of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the value of the effect counter 223j. Based on the above, the time-saving and medium-time notice effect, which is the advance notice effect of the time-saving effect period, is selected (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2907.

On the other hand, in the process of S2902, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the time saving (S2902: No), the hit / fail determination result of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the effect counter 223j. Based on the value, the normal advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect of the normal effect period, is selected (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906.

In the process of S2905, it is determined whether or not the normal advance notice effect selected in the process of S2904 is the advance notice effect of shutter rotation (S2905). In the process of S2904, if it is determined that the selected normal advance notice effect is the advance notice effect of shutter rotation (S2905: Yes), the shutter advance notice scenario is set (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the selected time advance notice effect is other than the advance notice effect of shutter rotation (S2905: No), the process of S2906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2907. do.

When the processing of S2903, S2905, or S2906 is completed, a display warning command indicating the selected warning effect is set (S2907), and this processing is terminated. The display notice command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is variable in the command output process (S2202) of the main process (see FIG. 141) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display device unit 80. When the variable display device unit 80 receives the display notice command, the variable display device unit 80 displays the notice effect corresponding to the command on the variable display device unit 80.

Returning to FIG. 145, the description will be continued. When the processing of S2605 is completed, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S2606), and then it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2607). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2607: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2607: Yes), the stop symbol setting process is executed (S2608).

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, a stop symbol setting process (S2608), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S2213), will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol setting process (S2608). The stop symbol setting process (S2608) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed by the variable display device unit 80 based on the current gaming state.

In the stop symbol setting process (S2608), first, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 223k (S3401). The game state storage area 223k is set in the process of S2508 in the state setting process (see FIG. 144). Next, in the process of S3401, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state read out is in the time saving (S3402). When it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the time saving (S3402: No), the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) is executed, and the process shifts to the process of S3409.

Here, the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403), which is one of the processes in the stop symbol setting process (S2608), will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403). The normal stop symbol setting process (S3403) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed by the variable display device unit 80 when the current gaming state is normal.

In the normal stop symbol setting process (S3403), first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is extracted from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S3501). Next, the stop symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n is read out (S3502). Next, the display range in which stop display is possible is set based on the read stop symbol (previous stop symbol) and the current variation (S3503). Next, the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set from the display range that can be stopped and displayed (S3504), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 153, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (S3402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current variation is a hit variation (S3404). When it is determined that the current fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (S3404: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group C of the symbol group storage area 222g (S3405), and S3409. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a hit variation (S3404: No), it is determined whether or not the specific remaining period flag 223h is ON (S3406). When it is determined that the specific remaining period flag 223h is on (S3406: Yes), the value (n) of the remaining time reduction counter 223g is read out (S3407). Next, the stop symbol of the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b is made different from the value of n-1, and the stop symbol is set using the symbol group B of the symbol group storage area 222g (S3408).

In this way, by setting the stop symbol and the remaining time reduction number to be different in the processing of S3408, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the stop symbol and the remaining time reduction number. Next, the set stop symbol is stored in the stop symbol storage area 223n (S3409), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, when it is determined that the specific remaining period flag 223h is not on (S3406: No), the time saving stop symbol setting process is executed (S3410), S3409 is executed, and this process is terminated. ..

Here, with reference to FIG. 155, a time-saving stop symbol setting process (S3410), which is one of the processes in the stop symbol setting process (S2608), will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving stop symbol setting process (S3410). The time saving stop symbol setting process (S3410) executes a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the segment display device 600 when the current gaming state is in the time saving.

In the time saving stop symbol setting process (S3410), first, the information in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S3601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the information read in the process of S3601 (S3602). When it is determined that there is no hit information (out of order) in the read information (S3602: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group B of the symbol group storage area 222g (S3602: Yes). S3603).

As described above, the symbols of "2,3,4,5,6,8,9" are stored in the symbol group B of the symbol group storage area 222g (see FIG. 126), and these numerical symbols are stored. , When the display by the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed, all the symbols are displayed using the light emitting area 822. In this control example, the outer reel 821 is set in the player's visual recognition area in order to show the variation result as the display mode by the 7-segment display unit 1600 during the time reduction. Then, the display mode in 7-segment is shown by using the light emitting region 822 as well. However, since the light emitting region 822 can be recognized by the player even when the light emitting region 822 does not emit light, there is a risk that the light emitting region 822 may be misidentified as a result of fluctuation. In this control example, when the deviation result is shown, the player can clearly recognize the symbol by selecting the symbol that uses all the light emitting regions 822. In this control example, the out-of-order symbol is configured to always use the symbol that uses the light emitting region 822, but it may be configured not to use the symbol that shows the previous fluctuation result.

In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the next fluctuation is a hit (S3604: Yes), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group A of the symbol group storage area 222g (S3605). ). Numerical symbols of "0, 1, 7" are stored in the symbol group A of the symbol group storage area 222 g (see FIG. 126). As described above, in this control example, the symbol that always uses the light emitting region 822 is displayed when the fluctuation result of the deviation is shown during the time reduction, but when the fluctuation result of the hit is shown, the light emitting region is displayed. It is configured so that the 822 does not emit light. With such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the out-of-order symbol and the hit symbol, which has the effect of making it easier for the player to recognize.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the next fluctuation is not a hit (S3604: No), the stop symbol corresponding to the received stop type command is set using the symbol group C of the symbol group storage area 222g (S3606). End the process.

Returning to FIG. 145, the explanation will be continued. After executing the stop symbol setting process (S2608), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2609), and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type. Then, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2610). By receiving this display stop type command, the variable display device unit 80 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command on the variable display device unit 80. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, the details of the operation control process (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the operation control process (S2211). This operation control process (S2211) is executed in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 141), and executes a process for controlling the variable display device unit 80 according to the current effect mode.

In the operation control process (S2211), first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223i is larger than 0 (S3001). When it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S3001: No), it is not the timing to control the variable display device unit 80, so the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3001 that the value of the scenario counter 223i is larger than 0 (S3001: Yes), the outer reel control process is executed (S3002).

Here, the details of the outer reel control process (S3002), which is one process in the operation control process (S2211), will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the outer reel control process (S3002). This outer reel control process (S3002) executes a process for controlling the outer reel 821 according to the current effect mode.

In the outer reel control process (S3002), first, it is determined whether or not the outer reel operation table 222c is being set (S3101). When it is determined that the outer reel operation table 222c is being set (S3101: Yes), the value of the outer reel operation counter 223p is added by 1 (S3102). Next, it is determined whether the set data is END data (S3103). If it is determined that the set data is not END data (S3103: No), the motor data corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223j is set (S3104), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that the set data is END data (S3104), the outer reel operation table setting area is reset (S3105), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the outer reel operation table 222c is not being set (S3101: No), it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223i is a value indicating the start of operation of the outer reel unit 820. (S3106). When it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223i is a value indicating the start of operation of the outer reel unit 820 (S3106: Yes), the value of the operation counter corresponding to the operation content is set (S3107), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3106 that the value of the scenario counter 223i is not a value indicating the start of the outer reel operation (S3106: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 149, the explanation will be continued. After executing the outer reel control process (S3002), the inner reel control process (S3003) for controlling the inner reel unit 810 is executed. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the inner reel control process (S3003). Since the inner reel control process (S3202) merely changes the processing target from the outer reel unit 820 to the inner reel unit 810 with respect to the above-mentioned outer reel control process (S3002 in FIG. 150), the detailed description thereof will be described. Omit.

After executing the inner reel control process (S3003), the displacement member control process (S3004) is executed. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the details of the displacement member control process (S3004). Since the displacement member control process (S3004) merely changes the target of the process to the displacement member 670 with respect to the above-mentioned outer reel control process (FIG. 150), detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the displacement member control process (S3004) is executed, the value of the scenario counter 223i is next subtracted by 1 (S3005), and this process ends.

In this control example, the variable display device unit 80 is configured to control the outer reel unit 820, the inner reel unit 810, and the displacement member 670 in this order, but the control order may be changed.

In this first control example, a configuration is used in which a symbol (third symbol) imitating a number (0 to 9) is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 1600, but the 7-segment display unit 1600 (light emission of the outer reel 821) is used. The segment of (including the area 822) may be used to display a pattern imitating an alphabet or a character. In this case, for example, the displacement member 670 is changed to a position (fourth position) that covers the entire display surface of the inner reel 811 while the variation display is being executed using the inner reel 811, and the displacement member 670 is the fourth position. While in position, that is, during a period in which the player cannot see (difficult) the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, each outer reel 821 is positioned in the second region (the region having the light emitting region 822). When the displacement member 670 returns to the initial position (first position), the variation display effect using the 7-segment display unit 1600 is configured to be executed, and the three 7-segment displays are displayed. By displaying the symbols imitating "S", "E", and "G" from the left of the part 1600, the game is to execute the variation display of the third symbol on the 7-segment display unit 1600 in the middle of the variation display effect. After displaying the variation start display mode for notifying the person, the variation display effect using the 7-segment display unit 1600 may be executed.

In this way, the 7-segment display unit 1600 is used for explaining the content of the effect and notifying the game state in addition to the variable display of the third symbol, that is, a plurality of display means (inner reel 811, Outer reels 821, 7-segment display unit 1600), the display means that does not display the third symbol is used to notify the player of information about the game other than the lottery result of the special symbol. Since the amount of information that can be notified to the player during the display effect can be increased, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game even when the liquid crystal display device is not used.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 198. In the first control example described above, the variable display device unit 80, that is, the reel display by the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821, and the segment display by the 7-segment display unit 1600 are displayed as display means for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. The pachinko machine 10 used has been described. On the other hand, the second control example differs in that the third symbol display device 81 using a liquid crystal display is used as the display means for showing the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, the second control example differs from the first control example described above in that the voice output control of the pachinko machine 10 is described in detail. Specifically, in this second control example, the tempo (BPM (beat per minute)) of the variable sound (BGM) output during the variable display of the special symbol (during the variable display of the third symbol) can be changed. The stop sound of the third symbol is changed according to the tempo of the fluctuating sound (BGM) to be reproduced.

In this way, by variably setting the stop sound of the third symbol corresponding to the BGM played at different tempos, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the fluctuating sound and the stop sound of the third symbol, and the effect is produced. Can be enhanced.

First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 156, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example replaces the variable display device unit 80 provided in the central portion of the game board 13 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the third symbol display device 81 is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10 in the second control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be briefly described. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. In the second control example, the configuration of the device that receives various commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 is different from that of the first control example described above. Specifically, the difference is that various commands set by the voice lamp control device 113 can be output to the third symbol display device 81. The other configurations are the same as those of the first control example described above, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the display control device 1140 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 158, the voice output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 158, the audio output device 226 is equipped with the MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 301 has a built-in RAM 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing various control programs executed by the MPU 301.

The MPU 301 of the voice output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port 305 and the voice synthesis unit 306. When a command for designating voice data is received from the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input port 305 and the bus line 304. Further, the voice data designated by the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the voice type of the voice synthesis unit 306. For example, the voice data corresponding to the BGM is output to the CN1, the voice data corresponding to the stop sound is output to the CN2, and the voice data corresponding to the warning sound is output to the CN3.

The voice synthesis unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes the voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. As a result, various voices designated by the voice lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308.

In this second control example, the number of channels of the voice synthesis unit is set corresponding to the voice data output from the voice lamp control device 113, but the number of channels is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of types of voice data are set. (For example, audio data for a jackpot game, audio data for a stop sound) may be configured to be output by the same channel. In this case, it is preferable to configure a plurality of audio data output to the same channel to be set with audio data that cannot occur at the same timing. With such a configuration, the number of channels of the audio output device can be reduced, so that the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROM 302 of the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROM 302 of the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which an audio file (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, or the like is stored. When the output of various voice data is instructed by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice file corresponding to the effect is read from the voice file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the voice synthesis unit 306.

Specifically, the music file storage area 302a stores music data (BGMA, BGMB) related to music (BGM) and stop sound data (stop sound A, stop sound B) related to stop sound. In this control example, it is possible to execute music (BGM) at different tempos, and when different tempos are set for the same music, the same music data is used. It is configured to execute a process of varying the data reproduction speed (see S9211 in FIG. 196). With such a configuration, it is not necessary to store the music data corresponding to each tempo, so that the storage amount of the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 158, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a music data group storage area 303a, a music pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a music timer 303d.

The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing a voice file (music data group) corresponding to the sound to be reproduced (BGM, stop sound, etc.). By playing back the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a in the order of the values of the music pointer 303b, one music is reproduced. In the music data group storage area 303a, a command (BGM command for music) output from the voice lamp control device 113 to instruct the music to be played, or a stop sound of the display symbol (third symbol) is played. When the command (stop sound command for voice) output to instruct is received, the music data group corresponding to the music instructed by the command is read from the voice file storage area 302a and stored ( See S9205 and S9210 in FIG. 196).

Further, in this control example, the music data group (audio file) is configured to be stored for each type of audio to be reproduced. That is, the audio file used when playing the BGM and the audio file used when playing the stop sound are configured to be stored separately, and the audio to be reproduced is output for each read audio file. It is configured to do. Then, it is output to a different channel for each audio file.

The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which data of the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a is being played. When the music pointer 303b is instructed to play the music (receives the audio BGM command), the value of the music pointer 303b is set to "00H" (see S9212 in FIG. 196). Along with this, playback of BGM audio data corresponding to the pointer value "00H" is set.

In this control example, a plurality of pointer values are set for one song. For example, "A melody", "B melody", "chorus 1", and "chorus 2" of one song. ], Etc., the pointer value is set. As a result, it is possible to easily change the position at which the reproduction of a specific musical piece is started according to the value of the pointer set initially.

For example, when playing a musical piece, the value of the pointer 303b for the musical piece to be set first, the update order of the pointer 303b for the musical piece, the fluctuation time of the special symbol to be set, the game state to be set, and the game state to be set. It may be configured to be variable according to the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, when the same song is played, depending on where the song was played, or the arrangement content of the song (for example, the arrangement that shifts from "verse 1" to "sabi 1"). Since it is possible to suggest the game content to the player, it is possible to make the player interested in the voice output from the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, when the playback of the stop sound in accordance with the stop timing of the third symbol is instructed (the stop sound command for voice is received), the pointer value corresponding to the timing in which the playback of the stop sound is executed is set. (See S9206 in FIG. 196).

The value of the music pointer 303b is updated by 1 each time the reproduction of the music data of 1 set in the music data group storage area 303a is completed. Further, when the value of the music pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each type of music and the pointer value is further updated, the value is updated to "00H". That is, when the music is played to the end, the music is played again from the "verse".

The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. Therefore, when the music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a and the music reproduction is set, the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music to be reproduced is set with respect to the maximum value storage area 303c. The maximum value of is set in advance (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 196).

The music timer 303d is a timer that measures the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced. In the music timer 303d, a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the music data is set every time the reproduction of new music data is set. The reproduction time of each music data is defined in the music data group storage area 303a in association with the type of music data. During music reproduction, it is determined whether or not the reproduction time has elapsed based on the value of the music timer 303d. Although not shown, the music timer 303d is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond).

In this second control example, the number of channels of the voice synthesis unit is set corresponding to the voice data output from the voice lamp control device 113, but the number of channels is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of types of voice data are set. (For example, audio data for a jackpot game, audio data for a stop sound) may be configured to be output by the same channel. In this case, it is preferable to configure a plurality of audio data output to the same channel to be set with audio data that cannot occur at the same timing. With such a configuration, the number of channels of the audio output device can be reduced, so that the product cost can be reduced.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. To. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 14 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 1140 described later, for example, three symbols of upper, middle, and lower are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 159 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 159 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers from "1" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by imitating the numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "1" to "9" on the rear symbol that imitates an animal.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the big hit is performed after the variable display is completed. Is configured to occur. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 3/4 of the upper side is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variablely displayed, and the rest. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, which are upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling in the left-right direction with periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The vertical line on the left side of the main display area Dm, the vertical line in the middle stage, and the vertical line on the right side are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the downward-sloping diagonal line and the upward-sloping diagonal line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol in this control example) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and the reserved ball exists, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 even though the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In many cases where the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player has quit the game and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. .. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the third ball corresponding to the new entry. The variable display of the symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. .. In this control example, the ball is the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing variable display based on the special symbol lottery. When a prize is won, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the sub-display area Ds. It is also shown in the small region Ds1 of. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is currently suspended. In this control example, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be reserved, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are set for the player. In order to make it easy to understand, the display mode of the first reserved symbol showing the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the display mode of the second reserved symbol showing the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed differently. It is configured to do.

Next, an example of the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and three parts of the sub symbol are displayed. The lottery result of the special symbol is shown. Further, in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. In this small area Dm1, variation display of three third symbols having a simple aspect composed of only the numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Even in this small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols composed of the same numbers.

As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is shown on the five effective lines (V1 to V5) by using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the variation display with high effect (V1 to V5). The main variation display) and the variation display (sub variation display) executed smaller than the main variation display in the small area Dm1 of the main control device 110 are configured to be executed. As a result, for example, even if the decorative movable member provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is moved to a position covering the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is executed in the small area Dm1. The sub-variable display can reliably notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, for example, in the main variation display, the reach state (a part of the combination of the third symbols for showing that the jackpot is won in the state where the fluctuation of the two symbol rows out of the three symbol rows is stopped is stopped and displayed. Even when the main variation display is temporarily turned off in order to greatly change the mode of the effect executed in the main display area Dm, only the sub variation display of the small area Dm1 is left. , It is possible to make the player understand that the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner.

In this control example, the display position of the small area Dm1 is fixed above the center position of the main display area Dm, but the position where the small area Dm1 is formed may be variably configured. In this case, it may be configured to be variable according to whether or not the movable member for decoration is movable and the effect mode executed in the main variation display. Further, the size of the small area Dm1 may be varied, or a period may be provided in which only one of the sub-variation display and the main variation is executed.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the number of the first reserved symbols imitating the face of a bird is displayed in the same number as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and the second reserved symbol imitating an egg is the second. The same number of balls as the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved ball, the reserved symbol is executed to enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. As a result, the player can easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that the reserved symbol performs a special operation or another character appears.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

The display control device 1140 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Here, the details of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 1140. The display control device 1140 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 1140 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 1140 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 1140 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 1140. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 1140. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, the NOR type ROM 234d is a boot program in which a predetermined number of instructions are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 180) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 1140, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 166) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 1140, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 1140. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 1140 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 180).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 shows the power-on displayed by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 1140 is transferring the image data to be stored to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 1140 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 1140 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 161 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 1140 displays FIG. 161 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 161 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 161 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 1140 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, the player starts the game. The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 161 (b) and 161 (c) are alternately displayed. 3 The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed immediately.

Returning to FIG. 160, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 162, the range of the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 162 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 162 (b) shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 163 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 162, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the back type change is determined based on the back type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 will display the corresponding back side. First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 163, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 163 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 163 (a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 163 (b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 163 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 163 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 163 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the position a to the position d is displayed. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 1140 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 162 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the rear surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 163 (a), and the image data corresponding to the rear image between FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (b) excluding FIG. 163 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 163 (a) and 163 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 163 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 163 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 163 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 163 (b) to (c) and 163 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 163 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 163 (c) to 163 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 160) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 160, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 159 (b)) with numbers "1" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. To. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, the third symbol display device 81 is used. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not started immediately.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the main symbol without the numbers "1" to "9" is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "female" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 1140 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 1140 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control unit 1140 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 1140 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 1140 receives an error command, the display control device 1140 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 1140 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 1140 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 1140 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A to F. If either is the case, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will be from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 164). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 166) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 1140, the display control device 1140 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 1140 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 1140.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 165). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 165).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 165, in the example of FIG. 165). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 166) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 165, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 1140 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 180) (see S6005 in FIG. 180). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 192 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 182), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 182 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 182 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S6309 in 182 (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 183 to 187) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 192 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 192 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 166), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 166) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 166) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 182 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 191) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 166) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 1140.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 166, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design).

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 167 described later, various sprites for creating a display screen for vertical scrolling (vertical scroll display data group) and a display screen for horizontal scrolling (horizontal scroll display data group) are used. ), And a drawing list corresponding to various sprites for creating a display screen (common display data) commonly used in vertical scroll display and horizontal scroll display are created. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Here, in the drawing list of this control example, as shown in FIG. 166, the sprite to be drawn first becomes a sprite related to the vertical scroll display data group, then a sprite related to the horizontal scroll display data group, and finally, the common display data. It is configured to be a sprite for. Then, the rear image of the horizontal scroll display data group (the image arranged on the rearmost side of the horizontal scroll display data group) is a game of the image of the vertical scroll display data group created on the rear side of the rear image. It is set so that the person cannot see it.

As a result, when the horizontal scroll display is executed, the vertical scroll display formed on the back side of the display data related to the horizontal scroll display is not displayed. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the player is made to visually recognize the vertically scrolled display, the side-scrolled display data group is performed by executing a process (transparency process) in which all sprites of the horizontally scrolled display data group are displayed transparently. The vertical scroll display formed on the back side of the screen is configured to be visually recognized by the player.

In this way, by always drawing a plurality of variable display modes and changing the variable display modes to be displayed so that the player can visually recognize them depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can be varied. Since it is possible to provide various variable display modes, it is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, since a plurality of variable display modes are always created, for example, even if the variable display mode is configured to be variable according to the operation of the player, the variable display mode can be smoothly changed. ..

Further, in this control example, as described above, the common display (for example, the reserved ball symbol display) that is commonly displayed regardless of whether the vertical scroll display is executed or the horizontal scroll display is executed is displayed. Since it is formed on the frontmost side, common display can be executed without being affected by other display data (regardless of whether or not transparent processing is performed on the side-scrolling display data).

In this control example, the data for vertical scroll display and the data for horizontal scroll display are configured to be completely independent to create a drawing list, but the vertical scroll display and the horizontal scroll display are used. For sprites (for example, effects) that can be shared, the information is described only in the display data on the front side (horizontal scroll side), and when the scroll direction is changed, the sprites (for example, effects) are drawn. Only the display position coordinates of the sprite) may be configured to be variable to the value corresponding to the scroll direction. This can reduce the amount of sprites in the entire drawing list.

As described above, in this control example, vertical scroll display and horizontal scroll display can be set as a variable display mode for displaying the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (one liquid crystal display). By configuring the image data for displaying each variation display mode to be created in parallel, even if it is not determined which variation display mode is to be displayed at the start of the variation of the third symbol (). For example, even when the variable display mode to be displayed is changed based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 during the variable display of the third symbol), the variable display mode can be smoothly changed. However, in addition to this, a configuration capable of smoothly changing the variable display mode by creating image data related to a plurality of variable display modes in parallel may be used.

Further, in this control example, different variable display modes can be executed without changing the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but the third control example is the same as the first control example described above. A display area shielding means (for example, a movable combination) that covers a part of the display area of the display means for variablely displaying the symbol (the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example) so as to make it difficult for the player to see. An object, a light guide plate, or an organic EL) is provided, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific fluctuation pattern is set), the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is variable and variable. It may be configured to set a variable display mode corresponding to the display area.

In this way, when the size of the display area for variable display of the third symbol is varied and the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display area is set, the third symbol is displayed in the same direction. Even if the variable display mode to be changed is set corresponding to the display area, it is possible to make the player think that a different variable display is being executed, so that it is easier to reduce the amount of sprites in the entire drawing list. Can be done.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 182 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 189). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 193). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 193). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 1140, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 194).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 182 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Next, the content of the image display in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various images created based on the drawing list. As shown in FIG. 167, in this control example, one display image is created by superimposing images (layers) in the order of the types shown in the drawing list described with reference to FIG. 166. A common display data group (common layer group) for displaying common information such as a reserved ball number symbol and an error symbol is formed on the foremost side (player side), and a horizontal scroll display data group is formed behind the common display data group. (Horizontal scroll layer group) is formed, and the vertical scroll display data group (vertical scroll layer group) is formed on the innermost side.

Further, it is configured so that all images belonging to the side-scrolling layer group can be subjected to transparency processing (processing for making all color information colorless). According to the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, normally, the rear image formed at the innermost position of the horizontal scroll layer group is used to create an image behind it, that is, for vertical scrolling. Various images are made invisible to the player, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the player operates the frame button 22), transparency processing is performed on all the images belonging to the horizontally scrolling layer group. As a result, the player can visually recognize the vertical scroll display displayed on the back side (rear side) of the horizontal scroll layer group.

Next, the contents of the display screen during the effect executed by the third symbol display device will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen using the variable display layer 1 (horizontal scroll layer group), and FIG. 168 (b) is a variable display layer 2 (vertical scroll layer). It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen using a group).

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the third symbol is normally configured to be variablely displayed by the side-scrolling display, and is as shown in FIG. 159 (a) during the side-scrolling display. Five effective lines (V1 to V5) are used to change the display of the third symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol.

During this side-scrolling display, when the reach state (so-called double reach state) is reached on the effective lines V4 and V5 (see FIG. 168 (a)), when the player operates the frame button 22, the switching flag 223aa Is set to ON, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the vertically scrolled display shown in FIG. 168 (b). As shown in FIG. 168 (b), in the vertically scrolled display, only one valid line is displayed, and the main symbols imitating the numbers "2" and "3" in the horizontally scrolled display are displayed. The display switches from the double reach state of to the reach state of only the number "3".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, it is more advantageous for the player to have all the main symbols imitating odd numbers and to be a big hit than to have all the main symbols imitating even numbers and to be a big hit. It is configured so that it is easy to become a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 168 (a), during the side-scrolling display, it is not possible to know which main symbol will be the big hit until the timing when the main symbol stops, and the player is the last player. However, by switching to the vertical scrolling display shown in FIG. 168 (b), it is possible to notify the player that a big hit is likely to be an advantageous big hit, which gives the player a sense of security. Can be given.

In this way, by switching to the variable display with different scroll directions and different the number of effective lines of the main symbol, the content of the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol can be changed, and the player gets tired of it. It is possible to provide a game that does not come. In this control example, the scroll direction is different to provide different variable display modes by reducing the number of effective lines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the scroll direction is different. It may be configured to increase the number of effective lines. In this case, although it is not in the reach state during the normal horizontal scroll display, it is preferable to configure it so that it is in the reach state by switching to the vertical scroll display. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation for the big hit until the variable display is completed.

Further, in this control example, the method of establishing the switching condition for switching the scroll direction is defined as that the player operates the frame button 22, but the method is not limited to this, and for example, a specific fluctuation pattern may be used. It may be configured so that it always switches when it is set, or it may be configured so that the scroll direction does not change by operating the frame button 22 by the player.

In addition, in this control example, since the display control device 1140 is configured to create both the variable display image for horizontal scrolling and the variable display image for vertical scrolling, the switching condition is set at what timing. Even if it is established, the scroll direction can be switched immediately, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, as a variation pattern for showing the lottery result of one special symbol, a variation pattern for horizontal scroll display and a variation pattern for vertical scroll display are set to form a display image. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the main symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed in one of the scroll displays, the main symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the other scroll display. The screen may be continuously displayed, and the other scroll display side may be configured to display the effect image during the jackpot game. With this configuration, the jackpot symbol can be easily confirmed by operating the frame button 22 and switching the display screen at any timing during the jackpot game.

Further, in a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing a lottery of a first special symbol and a second special symbol, one scroll display is used to execute a variable display for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol, and the other scroll is displayed. The display may be configured to execute a variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which the fluctuation direction of the third symbol is switched when the display screen showing the variation display is switched, but if the variation display mode for showing the result of the jackpot lottery to the player is different. The configuration for notifying is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and for example, a variable display for showing a jackpot lottery result is executed by a combination of three symbols on one display screen. The other display screen may be configured to show the jackpot lottery result with only one symbol stop display mode, one display screen may execute a variable display mode imitating a reel, and the other display screen may display a variable display mode. It may be configured to execute a variable display mode imitating a 7-segment display.

Further, in this control example, a configuration capable of displaying two display screens in one liquid crystal display device is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two liquid crystal display devices are arranged in an overlapping manner to display a liquid crystal display. It may be configured to switch to a different variable display mode by variably operating the device.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, an aspect of the fixed stop sound of the special symbol in the second control example will be described. As will be described later, in this second control example, two types of BGM, BGMA and BGMB, are set as BGM output during the period when the special symbol is changed. In the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the voice effect counter 223ab, which will be described later, is the timing at which the special symbol starts to fluctuate (the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is output from the main control device 110 and received by the voice lamp control device 113). Is acquired, and the type of BGM is determined by the acquired value and the lottery result (hit or miss) of the special symbol. The type of BGM is determined not only by the content of the BGM (BGMA, BGMB) but also by the tempo of the BGM.

In the present embodiment, even if the same BGM is used, by changing the output tempo, the player can feel that various BGMs are being output, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the game gets tired early. .. Furthermore, by changing the tempo of the BGM, even if the fluctuation display (dynamic display) is performed with the same fluctuation pattern, different fluctuation patterns are executed depending on the tempo of the BGM output according to the fluctuation display. It can be reminiscent, and the variation mode of the special symbol can be felt in various ways.

Here, as the variation of the special symbol, mainly, the symbol is scrolled at high speed after the variation display (scroll display) of all the symbol columns is started, and then in the order determined in advance by the variation pattern. After each symbol column changes from the high-speed scroll state to the low-speed scroll display state in order, it is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the example composed of three columns of symbols, the left, middle, and right symbol columns are scrolled at high speed, the left symbol column is scrolled at low speed, and then the right symbol is displayed. After the slow scroll state is entered in the order of the column and the middle symbol column, the left symbol column is stopped and displayed, the right symbol column is stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol column is stopped and displayed. After that, after the stopped left, middle, and right symbols are in a swaying fluctuation state (a state in which fluctuations are displayed slightly up and down in a predetermined cycle) indicating that the symbols are temporarily stopped, the fluctuation period elapses, and the main Based on the receipt of the confirmation command output from the control device 110, the confirmation stop display (stationary display) is displayed.

Here, a sound effect called a symbol stop sound (for example, Dan) is output to notify the player that the symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when each symbol string is scrolled and displayed. It is output separately from BGM. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the symbol has been stopped in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player is informed of what kind of determination result the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol row is. You can expect it.

However, as in this control example, by using various BGMs or changing the tempo of the BGM, the output state and tempo and the stop sound of the symbol can be obtained at the timing of the output BGM symbol stop. However, it is possible that the music does not match and the player feels uncomfortable. Specifically, even though it was a fast-paced BGM, by outputting a slow-tempo symbol stop sound, the BGM and the stop sound do not match, giving a sense of discomfort as a special symbol variation effect, or special. It is conceivable that the BGM that was output at the timing when the symbol stops stops, resulting in a poorly cut BGM. Further, in this control example, the fluctuation period of the special symbol (variation period of the fluctuation pattern) is set in various ways, but the output BGM is by repeatedly outputting music (song or phrase) shorter than that period. , It is configured to output music for the required output period. With this configuration, the output BGM does not always have a sharp timing at the stop timing of the symbol, and the player is likely to feel a sense of discomfort.

Here, in this control example, the type of the output stop sound is changed and set according to the tempo and type of the output BGM, and the output is configured. As a result, it is possible to output the stop sound of the symbol according to the tempo and type of the BGM, and it is configured so that the discomfort given to the player at the symbol stop timing can be reduced.

With reference to FIG. 169, an example in which the tempo 120 (BPM120) of the BGMA is selected as the BGM output when the fluctuation pattern A (12 seconds) is executed and an example in which the tempo 80 (BPM80) is selected are shown. The output stop sound will be described in comparison with each other. In the fluctuation pattern A, the left symbol row is stopped 8 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the right symbol row is stopped 10 seconds later, and the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed 12 seconds later.

As shown in FIG. 169, the BGMA (tempo 120) is composed of a BGM in which four quarter notes are played in one bar and two seconds, and one bar is controlled to be repeatedly output. In BGMA (tempo 120), one quarter note is output every 0.5 seconds (one quarter note is played every 0.5 seconds). In BGMA (tempo 120), the stop sound A is set to be output as the stop sound. As shown in FIG. 169, the stop sound A is configured so that the stop sound of an eighth note is output at a tempo of 120. Specifically, the stop sound B is composed of the voice "Doo, Daddy", and is configured to be output in total for about 0.5 seconds. Here, in BGMA (tempo 120), as shown in FIGS. 169 (a) to 169 (b), at the timing of 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation, the timing at which the output of the quarter note indicated by α1 is actually started. However, since it is the output timing of the stop sound, the stop sound A is output without outputting the sound. In this way, in reality, the BGM (tempo 120) stops the output of the BGM at the timing when the sound corresponding to the quarter note is output, but at that timing, the output of the eighth note of the stop sound A is stopped. Is started, so that the player can feel that the stop sound A is output at the timing when the sound is actually output, and the discomfort can be reduced. Similarly, at the right symbol row stop timing 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation, the stop sound A is output at the timing when the quarter note indicated by α2 is output in BGM, and the middle symbol row stop timing 12 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Then, the stop sound A is output at the timing when the quarter note indicated by α3 is output.

In this way, in BGMA (tempo 120), the short 1-bar music of 2 seconds is repeatedly output, so that the player can remember the music pattern at an early stage and be aware of the type of sound to be output next. However, at the symbol stop timing, the stop sound A is output in accordance with the output timing of the sound set by the BGM, so that it is possible to suppress the problem that the BGM is not cut well. After the stop sound A is output at the stop timings of the left symbol and the right symbol, the output of the BGM is configured to be output according to the passage of time. Specifically, even when the symbol is stopped, the BGM reproduction process is continued, and the output channel of the BGM is set to mute during the period when the stop sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 169 (c), in BGMA (tempo 80), the same composition of one bar as BGMA (tempo 120) is output so as to be played in 3 seconds. At the stop timing of 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation, in BGMA (tempo 80), it is not the timing at which a new note is output, but the timing at which the output of the note set before that is continued. In the BGM of BGMA (tempo 80), the timing corresponding to the new note (β1) is actually output after 8.25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Here, in BGMA (tempo 80), as shown in FIG. 169 (c), the stop sound B composed of triplets is output based on the left symbol stop timing 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Has been done. Since this stop sound B is output at a tempo of 80, a new note sound is output after 0.25 seconds, and then a sound corresponding to the new note is output 0.25 seconds later. With this configuration, the sound corresponding to the note in the stop sound B at the output timing corresponding to the note of β1 that should have been output 8.25 seconds after the start of fluctuation in BGMA (tempo 80) ( Since the output of the second note of the triplet) is executed, even if the sound that should have been output at BGMA (tempo 80) is not output by the output of the stop sound B, the stop sound B will output at that timing. Since the sound is output, it is possible to suppress the discomfort felt by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169 (c), in the stop sound B output at the stop timing of the right symbol row 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the timing at which the sound of the stop sound B is output (the third in the triplet). Since the timing at which the BGMA (tempo 80) is output coincides with the output timing of the sound corresponding to the note β2 output 10.5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the BGMA (tempo 80), the BGMA (tempo 80) and the stop sound B It can be combined with and the player's discomfort can be suppressed. Furthermore, at the stop timing of the middle symbol sequence 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the output timing of the note in BGMA (tempo 80) and the output timing of the stop sound B match, so that there is a sense of discomfort that the stop sound is output. Can be suppressed.

In this way, even when the tempo of the BGM is changed and output, the stop sound corresponding to the tempo change is selected and output, so that it is possible to suppress the problem that the BGM and the stop sound do not match. Also, even when the tempo of BGM is flexibly changed and played by lottery etc., the stop sound is set so that it matches the reference tempo by converting the stop sound according to the change in the tempo and outputting it. If it is set, it can be easily configured to output a matching stop sound.

Further, in this control example, since the lottery ratio of the tempo of the BGM selected according to the lottery result is changed and set, the BGM of the tempo that is easy to be selected when it is a hit is output, and the player is determined to win or fail. You can expect the result to be a hit at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170, with reference to FIG. 169, the output contents of various sounds for the fluctuation pattern B (18-second fluctuation) in which the fluctuation time different from the fluctuation pattern A (12-second fluctuation) described above is set. I will explain. FIG. 170 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the fluctuation pattern B (18-second fluctuation), and FIG. 170 (b) shows each case where the BGMA is reproduced with respect to the fluctuation pattern B. FIG. 170 (c) is a timing chart schematically showing the output timing of sounds, and FIG. 170 (c) is a timing chart schematically showing the output timing of each sound when BGMB is reproduced with respect to the fluctuation pattern B. be.

As shown in FIG. 170 (b), when the fluctuation pattern B having a fluctuation time of 18 seconds is set, the stop timing of each symbol row is set at a timing different from the fluctuation pattern A having a fluctuation time of 12 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 170 (a), the left symbol row stops 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the right symbol row stops 16 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the middle symbol row stops 18 seconds after the start of fluctuation. Is set to. It should be noted that the stop timing of each symbol row is set in response to each fluctuation when the fluctuation time is different or when the effect mode to be executed is different even if the fluctuation time is the same. The stop timing shown in FIG. 170 (a) is just an example. Further, the order in which the symbol rows are stopped and the interval at which each symbol row is stopped are also set according to the mode of production to be executed. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be stopped at the same time, or a game. It may be configured to stop based on the operation of the operating means (frame button 22) by a person.

According to the example shown in FIG. 170 (b), the timing at which each symbol row is stopped differs from the example shown in FIG. 169 (b), but the same as the example shown in FIG. 169 (b). The stop sound A (eighth note with beam) can be output (reproduced) according to the stop timing of each symbol string.

In this way, by setting the type and tempo of the stop sound that is output (reproduced) according to the stop timing of the symbol string, based on the content (rhythm) of the BGM to be reproduced and the reproduction speed (tempo). Since it is possible to reproduce a stop sound that matches both the timing of beating with the BGM being played and the stop timing of the symbol sequence, the player can produce a unified image and sound. There is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), the type of the stop sound is determined according to the content (rhythm) of the BGM to be reproduced, and then the tempo of the stop sound is changed to change the tempo of the stop sound. The reproduction timing (timing of striking a beat) may be configured to match both the timing of striking a beat in the BGM being reproduced and the stop timing of the symbol sequence.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), if the timing at which the BGM beats and the timing at which the stop sound beats completely match, both sounds may be output. In this case, only when it is determined that there is a slight difference between the timing at which the BGM beats and the timing at which the stop sound beats, the mute processing for muting the BGM sound is executed. It should be configured. As a result, only when the timing at which the BGM beats and the timing at which the stop sound beats completely match, the emphasized sound can be output without impairing the rhythm of the sound being played. It is possible to emphasize that the symbol has stopped and notify the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), the BGMB is configured to repeatedly reproduce the rhythm using the triplet of the eighth note instead of the quarter note with respect to the BGMB. As a stop sound (stop sound B) corresponding to, a stop sound consisting of one triplet (a note that divides the period during which a quarter note outputs a sound (1 beat) into 3 equal parts and strikes 3 beats) Set.

Then, the stop sound B is played at the timing when the left symbol sequence stops (14 seconds after the start of fluctuation), and the beats β1 and β2 of the BGMB that overlap with the stop sound B (γ1, γ2) are set to mute. do. According to the example shown in FIG. 170 (b), it is determined that the output timings of the next beat of the BGM beat β2 and the next beat of the stop sound B beat γ2 are completely matched. , It is configured to output (emphasized output) sound for any beat. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the left symbol row has stopped according to the tempo of the BGMB.

Similarly, at the timing when the right symbol sequence stops (16 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the beats β3 and β4 of the BGMB that overlap with the beats γ3 and γ4 of the stop sound B are set to mute, and the beats in between are set to mute. Highlight output. Finally, when the middle symbol column is stopped and displayed (when the variable display period ends), the BGM playback ends at the timing when the variable display period ends, but it is set according to the type of BGM. Since the output of the stop sound B (triplet) is output after the variable display period ends, that is, across the fixed period, it seems as if the BGM is being played even after the variable display period ends. Can be made.

In this control example, the reproduction of the BGM is started based on the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, and the reproduction of the BGM is terminated at the fluctuation stop timing (determined period arrival timing). As a result, the reproduction position of the BGM at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol can always be fixed, so that the stop timing of each symbol row and the type of BGM being executed can be easily determined at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol. However, as a configuration other than this, a configuration in which a specific BGM is always played in a loop is used regardless of the fluctuation status of the special symbol. May be. In this case, at the variation start timing of the special symbol, a means for determining the stop timing of each symbol sequence corresponding to the variation pattern set this time, and a means for determining the reproduction position of the BGM being reproduced at the start of the variation of the special symbol. And, it is preferable to set the type of the stop sound after determining the reproduction status of the BGM in the vicinity of the stop timing of each symbol string.

Further, the BGM type may be changed or the BGM tempo may be changed during the change of the special symbol. In this case, the timing for setting the type of stop sound is not the time when the special symbol changes start, but the predetermined time when the stop timing of each symbol row arrives (BGM cannot be changed again by the time the stop timing arrives). It suffices to execute the process of determining the type and tempo of the BGM being played before (a period of about). As a result, it is possible to smoothly respond to a sudden change in BGM.

Further, for example, when the holding ball number determination means for determining the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the determination result of the determination means determine that the number of reserved balls is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more). In a pachinko machine configured to easily set a fluctuation pattern in which a shorter fluctuation time is set than when it is determined that the number is less than a predetermined number, the tempo of the BGM to be played differs according to the number of reserved balls, specifically. May be configured so that a fast-paced BGM can be easily set when the number of reserved balls is large.

Further, in this control example, the type of the stop sound output as voice corresponding to the stop timing of the third symbol is configured to be selected from the predetermined data defined in the stop sound selection table 222ab. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a BGM discriminating means for discriminating the tempo or rhythm of the BGM to be reproduced may be provided, and a stop sound may be created according to the discriminating result of the BGM discriminating means. In this case, for example, a beat set as a stop sound is set according to the rhythm of the BGM (for example, a stop sound of 2 beats) and a playback of the stop sound set according to the tempo of the BGM. All you have to do is execute the process of setting the speed. In addition, the output period of the stop sound may be varied according to the discrimination result of the BGM discrimination means.

Further, in this control example, when the stop sound and the BGM overlap at the stop timing of the third symbol, the stop sound is output with priority over the BGM, but other configurations are used. For example, a winning / failing determination means for determining the lottery result of the special symbol this time and a variable means for changing the setting of the audio output when it is determined that the determination result of the winning / failing determination means is a big hit are provided. When the audio output setting is varied by the variable means, the BGM may be configured to be output with priority over the stop sound. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the stop sound from being output at the timing when the stop sound is usually output, that is, at the stop timing of the third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that is different from the usual one.

In this control example, in order to output only one voice when the stop sound and the BGM overlap, a process for muting the other voice is executed, but the process is not limited to this. , Each duplicated voice may be synthesized and output. In this case, it is preferable to provide a discriminating means for determining whether or not to synthesize the duplicated voice according to the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol depending on whether or not the duplicated voice is synthesized.

In addition, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a time measuring means (for example, RTC) having a backup power source capable of continuously measuring the current time is provided, and a predetermined time (for example, noon) is provided by the time measuring means. ) Is timed, the pachinko machine 10 provided with the time effect executing means capable of executing a specific time effect, 1 stop sound from the BGM-corresponding stop sound group reproduced during the time effect. May be configured so that can be set. In this case, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 having the same specifications are installed side by side, the stop sounds set from the same stop sound group are different from those of the adjacent pachinko machines 10. It may be configured so that the stop sound to be set differs according to the number.

With this configuration, the same BGM can be reproduced simultaneously for a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by time production, and further, the same BGM can be supported and different modes (for example, scale, rhythm, etc.) can be reproduced. Since the stop sound of the tempo (tempo, period) can be reproduced by the adjacent pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a realistic voice effect that is difficult to realize with a single pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a variation time (variation pattern) of a different length is set according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol, the third symbol is displayed until the first predetermined period elapses. When each fluctuation pattern is configured to execute high-speed fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation that cannot stop and display the third symbol), and then execute low-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation that can stop and display the third symbol) of the third symbol. , Regardless of the length of the set fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern is set so that the period of low-speed fluctuation is constant, and then the above-mentioned stop sound and BGM processing are executed. You may. In this case, it is preferable to determine the BGM for the low-speed fluctuation at the timing of switching from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation, and determine the type of the stop sound based on the determined BGM.

With this configuration, even when it is possible to set fluctuation patterns with a plurality of different fluctuation times, the stop timing of the third symbol can be shared, so the stop sound and BGM are set. The process can be simplified.

In this control example, processing for the BGM and the stop sound is described as a plurality of voices output by the pachinko machine 10, but the output timing and output of other voices are not limited to this. The mode may be adjustable. Specifically, the type of sound (operation sound) output when the frame button 22 is operated can be changed according to the type of the BGM being played, or the timing of the beat of the BGM being played can be changed. The output timing of the operation sound may be adjusted, or the abnormal sound that notifies the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10 may be set at a timing different from the beat of the voice being played. It may be configured to be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the abnormal sound beat from being absorbed by the BGM beat reproduced by the pachinko machine 10 and overlooking that the abnormal sound is being output.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the main controller in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. The second control example differs from the first control example described above in that the variation pattern 2 table 202aa is used instead of the variation pattern table 202d, and is the same except for the above. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the variation pattern 2 table 202aa is provided with the variation pattern 2 table 202aa1 for deviation (probability variation) with respect to the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 121) of the first control example described above. Is different. The deviation pattern 2 table 202aa1 selects a variation pattern when the probability variation state and the time saving state in which the special symbol is shortened variation are set as the gaming state and the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. It is a data table that is referred to at the time and defines the fluctuation pattern of different fluctuation times based on the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the determined stop type.

Here, the contents of the deviation pattern 2 table 202aa1 for deviation (probability variation) will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the deviation pattern 2 table 202aa1 for deviation (probability variation). As shown in FIG. 172 (b), when the stop type for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is "completely off" and the value of the acquired variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190", "Short off (12 seconds)" is selected, and if it is in the range of "191 to 198", "off (18 seconds)" is selected. When the stop type is "reach" and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 190", "various normal reach (30 seconds)" is selected and "191 to 197". Is specified that "various super reach (60 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "198", "various special reach (90 seconds)" is selected.

Here, when "short off (12 seconds)" or "off (18 seconds)" is selected, the setting process of the BGM and the stop sound described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170 is executed. .. In addition, in FIGS. 169 and 170 described above, the setting process of the BGM and the stop sound when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order is described as an example, but when other fluctuation patterns are set, the explanation is given. Is also executed in the same setting process.

When various fluctuation patterns are selected with reference to the deviation pattern 2 table 202aa1, a fluctuation pattern command for indicating the fluctuation pattern is set and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other commands. Will be done. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets an effect mode to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the received fluctuation pattern command.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the target (device) for executing the variation display of the third symbol whose operation is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 is different from that of the first control example described above. Specifically, in the first control example described above, the variable display device unit 80 was used to display the third symbol in a variable manner, whereas in the second control example, the third symbol display device 81 was used to display the third symbol. The difference is that the three symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

Here, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 173 (a). FIG. 173 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the ROM 222 of the second control example has an outer reel operation table 222c, an inner reel operation table 222d, a symbol operation table 222e, and a special effect with respect to the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the scenario table 222f and the symbol group storage area 222g are deleted, and the BGM type selection table 222aa and the stop sound selection table 222ab are added. Further, it is different in that various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 222a correspond to various effect modes to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Since the specific contents (contents indicating the effect mode) defined in the variation pattern selection table 222a are the same as those of a well-known gaming machine using a liquid crystal display device, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The BGM type selection table 222aa is a data table for selecting a BGM to be reproduced during the variation display of the third symbol, which is executed in correspondence with the variation display of the special symbol. Here, the contents of the BGM type selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (a). FIG. 174 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the BGM type selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), in this control example, different BGM types (BGMA, BGMB) and different BGM types (BGMA, BGMB) based on the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol and the acquired value of the voice effect counter 223ab, and , Different tempos (BPM80, BPM120) are configured to be selected.

Specifically, when the hit / fail determination result is "hit (big hit)" and the value of the voice effect counter 223ab is in the range of "0 to 69", "BGMA (BPM120)" is selected as the BGM. In the case of the range of "70 to 89", "BGMA (BPM80)" is selected, and in the case of the range of "90 to 99", "BGMB (BPM120)" is selected. is doing.

When the hit / fail determination result is "off" and the value of the voice effect counter 223ab is in the range of "0 to 89", "BGMA (BPM80)" is selected and the range is "90 to 99". In the case of, "BGMA (BPM120)" is configured to be selected.

That is, in the second control example, the BGM type and the tempo to be reproduced during the variable display are configured to be different according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Specifically, BGM (BGMB (BPM120)), which is selected only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and BGM (BGMA), which is easier to select when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, are easier to select. (BPM120)) is provided. With this configuration, the player can predict the lottery result of this special symbol based on the BGM reproduced during the variable display of the special symbol (during the variable display of the third symbol). It is possible to make a person interested not only in the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but also in the sound output from the sound output device 226.

Further, in this control example, the BGM having a faster tempo is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. This makes it possible to enhance the feeling of exhilaration for the player. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the remaining period of the time saving state is determined as an element when selecting the BGM, and the selection ratio of the BGM type is different based on the determination result. Specifically, when it is determined that the remaining period of the time saving state (number of remaining time reductions) is 10 times or more, the BGM having a slow tempo is configured so as to be easily selected, and the remaining period of the time saving state (number of remaining time reductions) is set. ) Is less than 10 times, the BGM having a fast tempo is easily selected. As a result, it is possible to voice the fact that the end of the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is approaching. In addition, by making the selection ratio of the BGM type different according to the number of remaining time reductions, for example, when a fast-paced BGM is selected in a state where a large number of remaining time reductions remain, this special symbol lottery is a big hit. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, since common processing can be executed between the tempo of the BGM selected according to the number of remaining time reductions and the tempo of the BGM selected according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the processing of the voice lamp control device 113. The load can be reduced.

In this control example, the type of BGM and the playback speed (tempo) are selected according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the remaining period of the time saving state, but other configurations may be used. For example, the table for selecting the type of BGM and the table for selecting the tempo of BGM may be different, and one of the elements may be selected from each table according to different conditions. As a result, the BGM to be reproduced is determined by combining the elements selected from each table, so that the BGM can be diversified. In this case, it is preferable to configure the BGM type to be selectable using an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the frame button 22), and to variably select the BGM tempo depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. ..

Further, in this control example, the tempo of the BGM is likely to be faster if the jackpot is won, but it is sufficient if the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbol according to the tempo of the BGM. , BGM with a slow tempo may be easily reproduced. Further, in this control example, a specific tempo is selected as the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced, but the tempo may be changed during the reproduction of the BGM. In this case, for example, the BGM is played at a common tempo until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the BGM is played, and after that, the BGM is played according to the playback speed of the selected BGM. It is good to configure it so that it does. With this configuration, the lottery result can be made unpredictable by voice immediately after the special symbol change is started, so that the player is interested in various effects during the special symbol change. Can be done.

Further, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display information for indicating the type of BGM being executed this time and the reproduction speed (tempo). As a result, the player can visually recognize the information regarding the currently played voice, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easier to understand.

The stop sound selection table 222ab is a data table for selecting the type of sound (stop sound) to be reproduced according to the stop timing of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the type of the stop sound is configured to be different according to the type and reproduction speed of the BGM reproduced during the special symbol variation, or the set variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to reproduce the stop sound corresponding to both the variable display effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the BGM output from the voice output device 226, and the display effect. And the sense of unity with the audio production can be enhanced.

Here, the contents of the stop sound selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (b). FIG. 174 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the stop sound selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), in this control example, different stop sounds are produced according to the BGM type selected using the BGM type selection table 222aa and the variation pattern (symbol stop timing) set this time. It is configured to be selected.

Specifically, when the BGM type is "BGMA (BPM120)", the symbol is stopped at either timing A (see FIG. 169 (a)) or timing B (see FIG. 170 (a)). When sound A (eighth note with beam) is selected (see FIG. 169 (b)) and is "BGMA (BPM80)", the symbol stop timing is timing A (see FIG. 169 (a)) and timing B. In any of (see FIG. 170 (a)), when the stop sound B (triplet) is selected (see FIG. 169 (c)) and is “BGMB (BPM120)”, the symbol stop timing is timing A. In both (see FIG. 169 (a)) and timing B (see FIG. 170 (a)), the stop sound B (triplet) is selected.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 173 (b). FIG. 173 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The RAM 223 of the second control example has a specific remaining period flag 223h, a scenario counter 223i, a returning flag 223l, an operation mode storage area 223m, a stop symbol storage area 223n, and an outer reel with respect to the RAM 223 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the operation counter 223p and the inner reel operation counter 223q are deleted, and a switching flag 223aa and a voice effect counter 223ab are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The switching flag 223aa is a flag for indicating that the switching condition for switching the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied, and is set to ON when the switching condition is satisfied. Specifically, in this control example, when the gaming state is on standby, the scrolling mode of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22 is shown. It is configured to be able to switch, and is turned on when the switching condition is satisfied based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the standby mode (when the frame button operation for changing the scroll mode is executed). A switching command for switching the scroll mode when a change pattern command for special symbol variation is received while the switching flag 223aa is set to, that is, when a new special symbol variation is executed. Is set.

As described above, in this control example, when the operation for changing the scroll mode is performed while waiting in the gaming state, the variable display in which the scroll mode is changed is executed from the special symbol change executed thereafter. It composes. In this control example, the scroll mode is configured to change even when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a specific variation display (when the player operates the frame button 22). In this case, the scroll mode is changed. Since the scroll mode is changed immediately after the frame button 22 is operated, the switching flag 223aa does not turn on.

It should be noted that a timekeeping means for measuring the elapsed time since the on state of the switching flag 223aa is set is provided, and when the timekeeping means measures the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), the switching flag 223aa May be configured to be set to off. As a result, even if the player who was playing the game before stops the game by performing an operation for turning on the switching flag 223aa when stopping the game, the next player can change the scroll mode. It is possible to suppress the situation of playing a game. Further, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in standby may be configured to display information for indicating the currently set scroll mode.

The voice effect counter 223ab is a counter used when selecting a BGM type in the voice lamp control device 113, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99 in the main process (see FIG. 141) of the voice lamp control device 113. (Not shown).

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents specified in the ROM 302 and the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 175 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 302 of the audio output device 226, and FIG. 175 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226. Is.

The contents of the audio file storage area 302a specified in the ROM 302, the music data group storage area 303a specified in the RAM 303, the music pointer 303b, the maximum value storage area 303c, and the music timer 303d are described. Since it has been described above with reference to FIG. 158, it will be omitted.

The confirmation flag 303e is a flag for indicating that a command for indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed has been received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is a command for indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. Is set to on when is received (see S9217 in FIG. 196). Then, in the audio setting process (see S9002 in FIG. 198), it is referred to at the end timing of the music data being played (S9403 in FIG. 198), and when it is set to ON (S9403: Yes in FIG. 198). , It is determined to be normal and set to off (S9404 in FIG. 198). On the other hand, when it is set to off in the process of S9403, the process of configuring the value of the pointer for music to 00H is executed again (see S9405 in FIG. 198).

That is, in this control example, the music data is set in advance according to the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol is confirmed and displayed at the playback end timing of the music data, that is, the end timing of the fluctuation time. When it is determined that the confirmation command indicating that the confirmation command has been received and it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received, that is, the special symbol change has not been completed even though the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. When it is determined, the music is configured to be played in a loop. As a result, when the change of the special symbol is not completed due to a defect, it is possible to suppress the situation where only the reproduction of the music is terminated first, and it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort. ..

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 179. It should be noted that the points changed with respect to the first control example will be described, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted for the same control.

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 2 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the variation display setting process 2 (S2663), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 145: S2603) is used for the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653) with respect to the variation display setting process (FIG. 145: S2213) in the first control example. The difference is that the processing of the voice setting processing (S2651) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 177, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), which is one process in the variation display setting process 2 (S2663) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S2653).

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), the content of the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, and if the switching flag 223aa is set to ON, (from vertical scroll to horizontal). Timing of switching from scrolling or horizontal scrolling to vertical scrolling) The process for outputting the command required for the switching setting is executed.

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S2653), first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2701), the acquired value of the effect counter 223j, and the type of the extracted variation pattern (variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command). ) And the variation pattern 2 table 202aa determines the variation pattern (S2751). After that, it is determined whether the switching flag 223aa is on, and if the switching flag 223aa is on (S2752: Yes), the display switching command and the audio switching command are set (S2753). Here, if the current setting is vertical scrolling, a display switching command and an audio switching command for instructing to change to horizontal scrolling are set respectively. On the other hand, if the current setting is horizontal scrolling, a display switching command and an audio switching command for instructing to change to vertical scrolling are set respectively. If it is determined in the process of S2752 that the switching flag 223aa is off (S2752: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the voice setting process (S2651), which is one of the processes in the variable display setting process 2 (S2663), will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of this voice setting process (S2651). In this voice setting process (S2651), a process of determining the type of BGM to be output during the fluctuation of the special symbol and determining the stop sound type of the special symbol according to the determined BGM type is executed.

In the voice setting process (FIG. 178: S2651), the value of the voice effect counter 223ab is acquired (S3701). The BGM type is determined from the BGM type selection table 222aa (see FIG. 174 (a)) based on the acquired value of the voice effect counter 223ab and the hit / fail judgment result (the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) (see FIG. 174 (a)). S3702). The voice BGM command corresponding to the selected BGM type is set (S3703). The stop timing of each symbol sequence is extracted (analyzed) from the current fluctuation pattern (S3704). Based on the determined BGM stop type and each symbol row stop timing, the stop sound type is determined from the stop sound selection table 222ab (see FIG. 174 (b)) (S3705). A voice stop sound type command corresponding to the determined stop sound type is set (S3706). A voice command necessary for other effects and the like is set (S3707), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since the BGM type is determined based on the hit / fail judgment result, it is possible to predict the hit / miss judgment result at an early stage by the output BGM and to have an expectation for a hit.

In this control example, the BGM type of the special symbol that fluctuates based on the winning / failing determination result is determined by lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of stage (background) data in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed is used. It may be set, the background may be determined by lottery, and the BGM corresponding to the background may be selected. In such a configuration, for example, a morning background and a night background are set, a BGM with a fast tempo is output for the morning background, and a BGM with a slow tempo is output for the night background. By configuring the above, it is possible to output a BGM with an impression that matches the background even if the BGM is the same.

In this control example, the same BGM is configured to be set at different tempos, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different BGMs are configured to be output at different tempos, and the stop sound is set according to the tempo. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, a plurality of BGMs are set and switched to be output during the fluctuation of 1, and the stop sound is selected and output according to the tempo of the BGM output at the stop timing of the symbol. It may be configured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2257) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2257). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S2257), the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the frame button 22 is operated (whether it is in standby (standby) or the specific effect is being executed (W reach display mode). (Middle)) executes the process of switching and setting the settings for switching between vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 179: S2257), first, it is determined whether an operation for the frame button 22 is detected (whether the frame button 22 is operated (pressed)) (S3801). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3801: Yes), it is determined whether the state of the pachinko machine 10 is in standby (standby) (S3802). When it is determined that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is waiting (S3802: Yes), the switching flag 223aa is set to ON (S3803), and this process is terminated.

Here, when the switching flag 223aa is set to ON, the vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling settings are switched and changed when a new change of the special symbol is started from the standby state. As a result, when the player plays the game, the game can be played in the scroll direction according to the player's preference.

On the other hand, in the process of S3802, when it is determined that the device is not on standby (S3802: No), it is determined whether the specific effect is being executed (S3804). Here, the specific effect indicates an effect period in which the special symbol is displayed in the W reach display mode in the variation pattern that becomes the W reach. The specific effect is not limited to W reach, and may be another effect.

In the process of S3804, if it is determined that the specific effect is being executed (S3804: Yes), if the current setting is vertical scrolling, a display switching command for instructing to change to horizontal scrolling. , Voice switching commands are set respectively (S3805). On the other hand, if the current setting is horizontal scrolling, a display switching command and an audio switching command for instructing to change to vertical scrolling are set respectively. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific effect is not being executed (S3804: No), the other frame button process is executed (S3705), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3801 that the frame button 22 is not operated (S3801: No), this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device 1140 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 180, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 1140 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 1140 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type flash memory 234d, whereby the NOR type flash memory. Is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, so when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately becomes the first of the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 1140 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 1140 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 1140 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 1140 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released. , Of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 180) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 180) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 1140. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type flash memory 234d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can do.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 181, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described. However, all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 180. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 192 (b)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 161 is drawn. The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 182) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 182) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 1140 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 1140 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and a voice lamp control device was instructed by the main control device 110 to start the variation effect. When the variation pattern command for display is received, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at the time of turning on the power can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a). FIG. 182 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then a display image setting process (S6351) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187.

In the display image setting process (S6351), when a switching command is received by the command determination process (S6302), a process for transmitting the image information of the variable display layer 1 is executed. The details of the display image setting process (S6351) will be described later with reference to FIG. 188.

After executing the display image setting process (S6351), the display setting process (S6303) is then executed. In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the rear image after the change is sent to the image controller 237. Set a transfer instruction to transfer the image data of the above to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 166 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 1140 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is supported. The stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. First, FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 183, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (S6451). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S6451: Yes), the invalid flag 233k is set to ON (S6452), and the process returns to S6401.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display switching command (S6451: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404). Then, if there is a variable pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (a). FIG. 184 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 183. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). FIG. 184 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A to F, front / rear off reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. Is set to (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (a). FIG. 185 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (b). FIG. 185 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 183. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (a). FIG. 187 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). .. Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to on, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. ..

Further, in the task processing (S6304), when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag set by S7102 is specified. From, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7102, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 183. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (b). FIG. 187 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process (S6303), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined and the error is determined. The process is executed so that the warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 183. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 184 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 184 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 184 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the details of the above-mentioned display image setting process (S6351), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing this display image setting process (S6351).

In the display image setting process (S6351), first, it is determined whether the invalid flag (not shown) is set to ON (S7151). This invalid flag is set to ON in the process of S6452 when it is determined in the command determination process (S6302) that the display switching command has been received from the voice lamp control device 113. If it is determined in the processing of S7151 that the invalid flag is set to ON (S7151: Yes), the image information of the side-scrolling display data among the variable display data set in the display data table buffer is Is rewritten as transparent information (S7152), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the invalid flag is off (S7151: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 189, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are used for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 189. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404). Next, the process proceeds to S7405.

In the process of S7405, the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7505, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 189. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and each sprite is specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 1140.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the definite display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. First, FIG. 192 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (b). FIG. 192 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 182 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 182 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 183 to 187) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) (see S7501: No in FIG. 192 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 1140 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 1140. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIGS. 192 (a) and S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (see FIGS. 189 and S6303) executed earlier. The information described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S7710), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the transfer destination (normally) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S7713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 1140, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, it is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 1140, will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (see FIG. 166) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to obtain the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 182 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio output device 226 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the voice command set by the voice lamp control device 113 is output to the voice output device 226 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2202 in FIG. 141), and the voice output device 226 is used. Is configured to output voice data corresponding to the received voice command.

In this way, various display commands and voices output to the display control device 1140 by the voice lamp control device 113 that can receive commands for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110. By setting various voice commands to be output to the output device 226, a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (effect display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). (Visual display mode) and directed sound mode (auditory voice mode) output from the speaker via the voice output device 226) can be centrally set. Therefore, when a plurality of effect modes are executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is not limited to this. Anything may be used as long as it performs an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory effect mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It may be configured to suggest and notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. As described above, by appropriately combining a plurality of types of effect modes to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes to be executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

First, with reference to FIG. 195 (a), the main process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S9001). The details of this command determination process (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 196, but when various voice commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 are received, the received voice commands are made to correspond to the received voice commands. The process for outputting the audio is executed. After the processing of S9001, the audio setting processing for executing the reproduction of the audio data and the update of the value of the pointer for the music is executed (S9002). The details of this voice setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 198.

When the processing of S9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (S9003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are turned on (S9005), and the power-off processing is executed (S9006). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S9007), and then the process is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S9004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S9004: No), the process returns to the process of S9001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S9004: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (b). FIG. 195 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 195 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S9101), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing is performed according to the read commands.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a command determination process (S9001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 195 (a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (S9001). In this command determination process (S9001), control according to the type of various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the command determination process (S9001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S9201), and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (S9201: No), the command The judgment process is finished and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (S9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S9202), and then the unprocessed stored in the command buffer area is set. For all the commands of, the type of the command is analyzed (S9203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice stop sound command that outputs a voice (stop on) at the timing of stopping each third symbol (S9204), and the voice stop is performed. When it was determined that there was a sound command (S9204: Yes), the voice file (stop sound data group) corresponding to the stop sound notified by the command was read from the voice file storage area 302a of the ROM 302 and read. The audio file (stop sound data group) is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9205). Next, a value corresponding to the timing at which the stop sound is reproduced is set in the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the stop sound data is set in the music timer 303d (S9206).

When the processing of S9206 is completed, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207), and the voice synthesis is performed. The reproduction of the stop sound data is set in the CN (channel) 2 of the unit 306 (S9208), and the process proceeds to the process of S9209.

On the other hand, in the process of S9204, when it is determined that the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include the voice stop sound command (S9204: No), or the above-mentioned process of S9208 is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a voice BGM command among the commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S9209). If it is determined in the processing of S9209 that there is a BGM command for voice (S9209: Yes), the voice file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the received BGM command for voice is read from the voice file storage area 302a. Then, the read audio file (music data group) is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9210).

When the processing of S9210 is completed, the reproduction speed corresponding to the tempo of the BGM indicated by the received BGM command for voice is set (S9211). Next, "00H" is set for the value of the music pointer 303b, and the timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the BGM data is set in the music timer 303d (S9212). Next, the BGM correction process (S9213) is executed.

Here, in this control example, even when the same BGM is reproduced, the tempo of the reproduced BGM can be made different. Specifically, the audio file storage area 302a corresponds to a music having a standard tempo (for example, BPM (beat per minute) 80, that is, a tempo in which a quarter note executes 80 beats per minute). The recorded audio data is stored, and the audio data indicating the standard tempo music read from the audio file storage area 302a is the tempo corresponding to the tempo information (tempo information) included in the BGM command for the music received this time. It is configured to change the playback speed of the audio data so as to be.

In this way, by configuring the audio file stored in the storage means (audio file storage area 302a) so that different tempos can be set by varying the playback speed, audio with different tempos for the same music. It is possible to eliminate the need to store the file in the storage means (audio file storage area 302a).

Here, with reference to FIG. 197, a BGM correction process (S9213), which is one process in the command determination process (S9001) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. In the BGM correction process (S9213), when the output periods of the BGM and the stop sound overlap, a process of creating a corrected audio file is executed. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the contents of the BGM correction process (S9213).

In the BGM correction process (S9213), first, the audio file of the stop sound data stored in the music data group storage area 303a is read out (S9301). The stop sound data read in the process of S9301 is stored in the process of S9205 of the command determination process (S9001 of FIG. 196). Next, the audio output period (the period during which the stop sound is reproduced) is extracted from the read audio file (S9302), and the audio output period of the extracted stop sound data and the audio output period of the BGM data are compared (S9303). .. Next, in the process of S9303, as a result of comparing the stop sound data and the BGM data, it is determined whether or not there is an overlapping period in which the audio output periods overlap (S9304). When it is determined that there is an overlapping period between the stop sound and the BGM (S9304: Yes), a corrected audio file in which the BGM data corresponding to the overlapping period is corrected to mute is created (S9305), and the music data group storage area is created. The BGM sound file stored in 303a is rewritten to the corrected sound file created in the process of S9305 (S9306), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9304, if it is determined that there is no overlapping period in the audio output period of the stop sound data and the BGM data (S9304: No), it is not necessary to create a corrected audio file, so this process is terminated as it is. ..

As described above, in this control example, the BGM (music, tempo) corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the stop sound corresponding to the set BGM mode is set. It is configured in. As a result, even if the tempo of the BGM is different, the stop sound corresponding to the tempo can be reproduced. If the timing of stepping on the beat of the set BGM (timing of striking the beat) and the stop timing of the third symbol executed in response to the special symbol fluctuation do not match, the playback period is selected as the type of stop sound. Is configured to set a long stop sound and set a stop sound for beating at both the set timing of hitting the BGM beat and the stop timing of the third symbol. With this configuration, even if the tempo of the BGM is different, the stop sound corresponding to both the set tempo of the BGM and the stop timing of the third symbol can be reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode in which the sound and the display that do not give a sense of discomfort to the player can be set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, the audio output device 226 uses the audio file of the stop sound reproduced at the stop timing of the third symbol and the audio file of the BGM reproduced in response to the special symbol variation. It is configured so that it can be set separately, and when the audio files set for each are reproduced, the BGM audio is set to mute at the place where the audio reproduction timings overlap.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the BGM sound and the stop sound sound are output at the same time and the volume is partially increased. Further, even when the timing of striking the beat of the BGM and the timing of striking the beat of the stop sound are slightly different (for example, 0.05 seconds), the sound can be reproduced without giving the player a sense of discomfort. ..

Returning to FIG. 196, the explanation will be continued. After executing the BGM correction process (S9213), the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9214). Playback of BGM data is set in CN1 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (S9215), and the process returns to S9201.

On the other hand, in the process of S9209, when it is determined that the voice BGM command has not been received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S9209: No), it is determined whether or not there is a voice confirmation command (S9216). If it is determined that there is a voice confirmation command (S9216: Yes), the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON (S9217), and the process returns to S9201.

On the other hand, in the process of S9216, when it is determined that there is no voice confirmation command (S9216: No), it is determined whether or not there is a voice switching command (S9218). If it is determined that there is an audio switching command (S9218: Yes), the audio file data is switched and set (S9219), and the process returns to S9201. On the other hand, in the process of S9218, when it is determined that the voice switching command has not been received (S9218: No), the process corresponding to the other command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S9214). , The process is returned to S9201. In the process of S9214, if the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command instructing the reproduction of the sound effect, the reproduction of the sound effect of the type specified by the command is set. If it is a command instructing the reproduction of the warning sound, the reproduction of the warning sound of the type specified by the command is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the details of the audio setting process (S9002) executed in the main process (see FIG. 195 (a)) by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing this voice setting process (S9002).

In this audio setting process (see FIG. 198), first, it is determined whether or not the BGM is being played (S9401), and if it is determined that the BGM is not being played (S9401: No), a single sound effect is produced. This process is terminated as it is because it means that the sound or warning sound is being played or the sound is not output, and there is no possibility of switching to other sound data during the sound playback.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9401 that the BGM is being reproduced (S9401: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the music data being reproduced (S9402). That is, when it is determined whether or not the value of the music timer 303d has become 0 and it is determined that it is not the playback end timing of the music data (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has not become 0) (S9402: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S9402 that the end timing of the data for the music being played has come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has become 0) (S9402: Yes), it is for the music. In the data group storage area 303a, the process for setting the reproduction of the music data next to the music data for which the reproduction has ended this time is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON (S9403). If it is determined that the confirmation flag 303e is on (S9403: Yes), the confirmation flag 303e is set to off (S9404), and the process proceeds to S9406. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 303e is not on (S9403: No), the value of the music pointer 303b is updated to 00H (S9405).

That is, normally, the value of the music timer 303d corresponding to the BGM is set according to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, and the BGM is also configured to stop at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. However, when the voice lamp control device 113 cannot receive the stop command for indicating the variable stop of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 due to the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10, the confirmation flag 303e is set to ON. It is configured to play the BGM from the beginning without doing anything. This suppresses the problem that only the BGM stops first when the fluctuation of the special symbol has not stopped (when the command to indicate that the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped cannot be received). Can be done.

Next, in the process of S9406, it is determined whether or not the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value (data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c) corresponding to the current music data group (S9406). ).

If it is determined in the processing of S9406 that the value of the music pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9406: No), 1 is added to the value of the music pointer 303b. And update (S9407), and the process shifts to S9409. On the other hand, in the process of S9406, when it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9406: Yes), the value of the music pointer 303b is set to ". It is updated to "01H" (S9408), and the process is shifted to S9409. By updating the value of the music pointer 303b by the process of S9408, the music can be reproduced in a predetermined order.

<About another example of the second control example>
Next, another example of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 199. This alternative example differs from the above-mentioned second control example in that the variable display device unit 80 used in the above-mentioned first control example is provided in place of the third symbol display device 81. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in this alternative example is a combination of the configuration of the first control example and the configuration of the second control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this alternative example, the rotation speed of the inner reel is changed according to the set tempo of the BGM with respect to the operation control of the inner reel 811 described in the first control example described above. .. In this way, by varying the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 according to the tempo of the BGM to be reproduced, it is possible to execute a realistic effect depending on the sound and the rotation state of the inner reel 811. Specifically, the faster the tempo of the BGM, the faster the rotation speed of the inner reel 811.

Here, with reference to FIG. 199, the contents of the voice setting process 3 (S2671) executed in the present alternative example will be described. The voice setting process 3 (S2671) is a BGM determined from the BGM type selection table 222aa with respect to the voice setting process (see S2651 in FIG. 178) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the second control example described above. When the tempo (BPM) of the type is determined (S3751) and the determined tempo (BPM) of the BGM is determined to be 120 (S3751: Yes), a high speed is set as the reel rotation speed (S3753) and determined. When it is determined that the tempo (BPM) of the BGM is not 120 (that is, 80) (S3751: No), the difference is that the reel rotation speed is set to a low speed (S3752). Since they are the same except for the above, they are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With this configuration, in order to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol to the player, the drive control is made so that the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 corresponds to the BGM determined by using the BGM type selection table 222aa. Because it can be done, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this alternative example described above, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 is configured to be variable according to the set BGM, but the operation contents other than the inner reel 811 are varied according to the set BGM. It may be configured as.

The operation at the start of rotation of the inner reel 811 so that the timing at which the player grasps the tempo of the BGM executed this time and the timing at which the player grasps the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 executed this time are the same. It is good to configure it to execute control. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player grasps the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 and grasps the result of the lottery this time before the BGM is reproduced.

Further, in this alternative example, the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 is changed according to the set tempo of the BGM, but other operation control may be executed for the inner reel 811. Well, for example, depending on the type and tempo of the BGM, the rotation of the inner reel 811 is temporarily stopped, the rotation speed is temporarily increased or decreased, or the rotation direction is temporarily changed. May be. With this configuration, it is possible to achieve an effect with a sense of unity with the set BGM by using not only the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 but also the rotation mode.

Further, in this alternative example, a configuration is used in which the rotation speed of the inner reel 811 of the variable display device unit 80 used in the above-mentioned first control example is changed according to the set tempo of the BGM. In addition, for example, the variable display speed of the 7-segment display unit 1600 or the variable display speed of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be varied.

Further, in this alternative example, the fluctuation speed (rotation speed of the inner reel 811) of the third symbol (the symbol that is variablely displayed to show the lottery result of the special symbol) is changed according to the tempo of the set BGM. However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to stop the predetermined stop symbol of the third symbol by changing the fluctuation speed of the third symbol.

Therefore, for the above-mentioned problem, for example, it is preferable to set the stop display mode of the third symbol based on the information in which the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is changed. As a result, since the stop symbol corresponding to the set fluctuation speed of the third symbol can be displayed, it is possible to execute the fluctuation display that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. Further, as another countermeasure, when the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed by the combination of the plurality of third symbols displayed as stopped by stopping the plurality of third symbols, the timing of stopping each third symbol is set. It may be configured to be determined in correspondence with the set fluctuation speed of the third symbol. Further, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation is set to a low speed, and the fluctuation of the third symbol is continued for a predetermined period at the low fluctuation speed to stop the third symbol in a predetermined stop display mode. It may be configured as follows.

In the first control example described above, a plurality of display means (inner reel 811, outer reel 821, 7-segment display unit 1600) capable of variablely displaying identification information (third symbol) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol are provided. The display areas (areas visible to the player) of the plurality of display means are arranged so as to overlap each other, and various display modes are set by switching the operation mode of each display means. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various variable display modes, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the first control example, a display means (inner reel 811, outer reel 821) using a medium on which the third symbol is printed in advance and a display means (7-segment display unit 1600) using seven segments are used. Although it is used, any other configuration may be used as long as it is a display means capable of displaying the third symbol to the player, and for example, it is configured by the liquid crystal display used in the second control example described above. The third symbol display device 81 may be used as one of the display means, or a specific display is performed by irradiating a transparent acrylic plate with a stamp for indicating a specific display mode with light from the side surface. A display means using a light guide plate for making the aspect visible to the player, or a display means using an organic EL may be used as one of the display means. Further, as in the second control example described above, a plurality of image layers may be created for one liquid crystal display, and the image layers to be actually displayed may be switched.

Further, in the above-mentioned first control example, since the display means for executing the variable display of the third symbol is switched according to the set gaming state, the executed variable display mode is grasped. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the currently set game state. Not limited to this, a variable display mode may be set so as to make it difficult for the player to understand the currently set gaming state.

In the first control example described above, a double reel structure in which reel-type display means are overlapped is used, and the outer reel (outer reel 821) of the double reel structure (the side closer to the player's viewpoint) is used. , The reel (inner reel 811) provided inside the double reel structure forms a visible area (first area) and a difficult-to-see area (second area, third area), and is inside. When the variation display of the third symbol is executed using the reel 811, the outer reel 821 is variably operated to the first region, and when the variation display of the third symbol is executed using the outer reel 821, the variation display of the third symbol is executed. It is configured to execute using the second region and the third region of the outer reel 821.

Thereby, a plurality of variable display modes can be easily set by using the double reel structure. Further, in this control example, since both reels having a double reel structure are configured to set the variable display mode of the third symbol, more variable display modes can be set, and the effect is produced. Can be enhanced.

In this control example, in addition to the reel display by the double reel structure described above, the player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol by the 7-segment display using the segment display device 600. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol in a wider variety of display modes, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. In addition, in this control example, the display method of the symbol (third symbol) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is different depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example displays the lottery result of the special symbol according to the reel stop mode, unlike the conventional gaming machine that displays the lottery result of the special symbol using the liquid crystal screen. It is configured in. In such a gaming machine, information other than the lottery result of a special symbol using a liquid crystal screen like a conventional gaming machine, for example, a continuous production in which the expectation of winning a big hit increases as the game continues (for example, a pseudo-continuous production). Since there is no display area for notifying the player of the information indicating the number of times the game has been executed, there is a problem that it is difficult to clearly inform the player of the process for the continuous production. On the other hand, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is operated to change the display area that the player can see, so that the player is notified of the process for the continuous effect (the number of times the continuous effect is executed). It is composed. As a result, even in the pachinko machine 10 that does not have a liquid crystal display device, the process of continuous production can be easily recognized by the player.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which the player is notified of the process of continuous production by changing the display area of the reel display, but other configurations are used to inform the player of the process of continuous production. It may be configured to notify. Specifically, the color of the reel display (the color of the backlight that illuminates the reel display surface) can be changed, or the sound effect during reel operation can be changed according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed. It may be configured.

Further, in this control example, when the above-mentioned continuous effect is executed in the pachinko machine 10, the display area of the reel display is gradually narrowed according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed. With this configuration, the narrower the display area of the reel display for the player, the higher the expectation of the big hit, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine. ..

Further, by operating the displacement member 670 to narrow the display area of the reel display, the number of symbols stopped and displayed in the display area (the number of effective lines for displaying the combination of symbols for showing the lottery result of the special symbol). ) Is reduced, so that it is easy for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol.

In the first control example, the time (variable time) from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result is configured according to the set gaming state. Specifically, in the game state (time saving state, probability variation state) in which the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed, a short variable time is likely to be set in order to increase the number of lottery of the special symbol executed per unit time, which is special. In the gaming state (normal state) in which it is difficult to execute the lottery of symbols, it is configured so that a long fluctuation time can be easily set in order to reduce the period during which the lottery of special symbols is not performed (the period during which the special symbols are not changed). is doing.

In this control example configured in this way, the speed at which the third symbol displayed in the display area is changed in the gaming state (normal state) in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be set is slow (for example, 0.2 seconds) reel display. To execute 7-segment display with a high speed (for example, 0.05 seconds) to change the symbol displayed in the display area in the game state (probability change state, time reduction state) in which a short fluctuation time is easily set. It is composed. As a result, even when a plurality of display methods having different variable speeds of the third symbol are used, the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is surely stopped and displayed after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time. Can be made to.

In this control example, it is as if a plurality of lottery results are displayed during the dynamic display period (during the variable display period) in which the display symbol for showing the result of one lottery of the special symbol is dynamically displayed. It is configured to execute the pseudo-variable effect shown in.

In this pseudo-variation effect, the re-variation effect of stopping the display symbol (temporarily stop display) and then starting the variation again is executed a plurality of times during one dynamic display period. As the number of times this re-variation effect is executed increases, the possibility of winning the jackpot increases.

Here, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using the liquid crystal display device, for example, the number of re-variation effects (pseudo-continuous number) executed during the pseudo-variation effect can be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device. Although it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example does not have a liquid crystal display device, and the number of re-variation effects executed during the pseudo-variation effect for the player. There was a problem that it was difficult to inform (the number of pseudo-reams) in an easy-to-understand manner.

Therefore, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is changed each time the re-variation effect is executed, so that the player is notified of the number of times the re-variation effect is executed. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in this control example, the displacement member 670 is configured to be variable so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 800 is narrowed each time the revariation effect is executed, and each time the revariation effect is executed. , The number of effective lines in the display area is reduced. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the effective lines to be watched by the player, so it is possible to prevent the process of stopping and displaying the combination of display symbols corresponding to the jackpot from being overlooked. ..

In this control example, the above-mentioned pseudo-variation effect, that is, the effect of changing the effective symbol sequence in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed is executed by using the period during which one special symbol change is executed. Although it is configured, as another configuration, it may be configured to execute an effect of varying the effective symbol sequence across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations.

In this case, for example, based on the winning information command set in the look-ahead process (see S513 in FIG. 132) executed by the main control device 110 described later with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol after the next change is displayed. It is preferable to determine the lottery result in advance and set the effect (continuous effect) so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations based on the pre-determination result. With this configuration, it is possible to stop and display the lottery result of the special symbol multiple times during the period when the continuous effect is being executed, so that the special symbol to be executed is executed for the player at what timing. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the continuous production has been executed in response to the variable display of.

Further, in this control example, a configuration is used in which the pseudo-variation effect is executed so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually decreases, but the player can change the effective lines of the third symbol. It may be configured to provide a new variable display effect, and for example, it may be configured to execute a pseudo variable display effect so that the number of effective lines of the third symbol gradually increases.

In this control example, when the pseudo-variation effect is executed, the higher the number of re-variations (the longer the set fluctuation time), the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot. However, the possibility is not limited to this, and for example, when the reach is displayed with the number of pseudo stops of the third symbol being a predetermined number during the pseudo-variation effect, there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won. It may be configured in. As a result, during the period from the execution of the pseudo-variation effect to the end of the pseudo-variation effect, it is possible to make the player always have a feeling of expectation regarding the jackpot while playing the game.

Further, in this control example, a new effective line is formed by combining the display symbol printed on the inner reel 811 and the light emitting means (lightning bolt LED671) arranged in the variable display device unit 80. However, in addition to this, for example, when a specific display symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific position while a movable accessory for decoration is located at a specific position, a new effective line is formed. It may be configured. In addition, the display symbol may be stopped and displayed first, and then a new effective line may be formed when the light emitting means (lightning bolt LED671) emits light. In this way, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by forming a new effective line by combining the display symbol that can be variablely displayed and the element other than the display symbol so as to satisfy a predetermined condition. At the time of this, not only the variable display mode of the display pattern but also the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and the movable mode of the decorative movable accessory are to be watched, so that the player is prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. can do.

In this control example, when the number of remaining time reductions is less than 5, the player is configured to be notified of the number of remaining time reductions using the 7-segment display. As a result, the period until the end of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player (the time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state) can be notified in advance, so that the time saving state suddenly ends and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress giving.

In addition, in this control example, during the variable display period of the special symbol, the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is first stopped and displayed (see FIG. 110 (a)), and then the remaining time reduction number is displayed. It is configured to be done. Then, a display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is set so that the display symbol showing the same number as the number displayed as the remaining time reduction count is not displayed in the 7-segment display for the remaining time reduction count. It is composed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the display mode of the display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol different from the display mode of the remaining time reduction number indicating the remaining time reduction number, so that the player can have the remaining time reduction. The number of times can be reliably notified.

Further, in this control example, when it is not necessary to display the remaining time reduction number display indicating the remaining time reduction number after the display symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, the special symbol jackpot is won. In that case, since the display symbol is set regardless of the numerical value of the number of remaining time reductions to be displayed next, the mode of the display symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won should be set without limitation. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to set the display mode of the display symbol that is stopped and displayed according to the privilege (the size of the number of prize balls and the game state set after the end of the big hit game) given by the winning big hit.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the middle 7-segment display unit 1600b is configured to display the number of remaining time reductions, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the left 7 is used. The seg display unit 1600a or the right 7-segment display unit 1600c may be used to display the number of remaining time reductions. In this case, for example, when the left 7-segment display unit 1600a, which is first stopped and displayed, is configured to display the number of remaining time reductions, the game is played with the number of remaining time reductions displayed next being grasped in advance. By doing so, when the same numerical value as the number of remaining time reductions to be displayed next is stopped and displayed as a display symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the left 7-segment display unit 1600a, the lottery result this time is a big hit. It is possible to grasp in advance that it is. Further, the 7-segment display unit 1600 on which the number of remaining time reductions is displayed may be appropriately changed.

Further, although details will be described later, in this control example, the variation display of the special symbol and the remaining time reduction number display are configured to be displayed within one variation display period (including the symbol confirmation time). , It is configured to execute the display of the remaining time reduction number of times for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation time of the set special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the set variation time of the special symbol is 2 seconds, the variation display of the special symbol of 1.5 seconds is performed regardless of whether or not the remaining time reduction number display is executed, and then 0.5 seconds. The remaining time reduction count display is executed, but if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 1 second, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction count display is executed, and if the remaining time reduction count display is not executed, 1 second. When the special symbol variation is executed while the remaining time reduction number display is executed, the shortened variation of 0.5 seconds is executed as the special symbol variation, and then the remaining time reduction number display of 0.5 seconds is executed. Is configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to execute both the variation display of the special symbol and the display of the number of remaining hours within the variation display period of one special symbol.

In this control example, as described above, the configuration is such that the variation display of the special symbol and the display of the number of remaining hours are both executed within the variation display period of one special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute the remaining time reduction number display so as to straddle the special symbol fluctuation. In this case, for example, the special symbol fluctuation display for a certain period of time is executed regardless of the set fluctuation time, and the remaining time, which is the difference between the period in which the fluctuation display is executed and the set fluctuation time, is shortened. It is good to set it as the time to execute the number display. As a result, the variable display mode of the special symbol can be made constant, the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the pattern of the variable display mode can be simplified. Can be reduced.

In addition, the display lower limit time for executing the remaining time reduction number display is set, and the remaining time that is the difference between the period in which the variation display of the special symbol is executed and the set variation time is a predetermined time (for example, 0). If it is shorter than .5 seconds), it is preferable to configure it so that the remaining time reduction number display is executed over the period during which the next special symbol change is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player surely grasp the remaining time reduction number of times. However, in this case, since the change of the special symbol is started while the remaining time reduction number display is being executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the new special symbol change has been started. There is a problem. Therefore, the player is notified that the special symbol change has started by blinking the area not used for displaying the remaining time reduction number (in the example of FIG. 111B, the left light emitting area 822a of the left inner reel 811a). Or, by changing the emission color of the display mode of the remaining time reduction display mode (display mode imitating "4" in FIG. 111 (b)), the player is notified that the special symbol change has started. It is good to configure it to. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a new special symbol change has been started while displaying the remaining time reduction number of times.

When executing the above-mentioned process, it is preferable to specifically provide the following configuration in the voice lamp control device 113. First, the fluctuation time extraction means for extracting the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation from the information included in the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the fluctuation of the third symbol within the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation. The third symbol variation display time for executing the display and the third symbol variation display time set by the setting means for setting the remaining time reduction display time for executing the remaining time reduction display time, and the variation time extraction means are extracted. A calculation means for calculating the difference of the fluctuation pattern (variation time), a lower limit determination means for determining whether the time calculated by the calculation means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit time (for example, 1 second), and a lower limit determination means. When it is determined that the time is less than or equal to the lower limit fluctuation time, the continuation flag for indicating that the remaining time reduction number display does not end within the current fluctuation pattern period is set to on.

Then, this continuation flag is configured to be set to off at the timing when the remaining time reduction count display ends, and the continuation flag is set to on, that is, the remaining time reduction count display is being executed. When a new variation pattern is set, it may be configured to set a variation start display mode for indicating that the new symbol variation is executed during the display of the remaining time reduction number of times.

Furthermore, the setting means is configured to set a plurality of different times as the time for executing the remaining time reduction number display, and even if the shortest time among the plurality of different times is set, the remaining time reduction number display is the current variation pattern period. It may be configured to set the continuation flag to on when it is determined that it does not end within. Further, when the time saving state is set, the third symbol variation display time set by the setting means is configured to be different depending on whether the remaining time saving number display is executed or not, and the remaining time saving is shortened. When the number of times display is executed, it may be configured so that the third symbol variation display time, which is shorter than the case where the number display is not executed, can be easily set.

Further, in this control example, the period in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (symbol variation period) and the period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period) are included in the description within the fluctuation time of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol variation period of the special symbol and the symbol determination period may be controlled separately. In this case, for example, when the remaining time reduction number display period is set in advance so as to be the same as the symbol confirmation period and the third symbol variation display time longer than the symbol variation period is set, or when the remaining time reduction number display period is set. Is set in advance so that it is longer than the symbol confirmation period, and if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number display cannot be executed during the symbol variation period, it is shown that it does not end within the current variation pattern period. May be configured to turn on the continuation flag of.

In this control example, when the variation display (variation display by 7 segments) using the 7-segment display unit 1600 is executed, the symbol display mode for showing the third symbol is configured to be variable display. Not limited to this, the display mode different from that of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the display mode in which only one segment of the seven segments is lit) is varied and displayed. It may be configured in. With this configuration, when the 7-segment display unit 1600 is repeatedly turned on and off at high speed during the variable display of the third symbol, the game states that the specific third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a person is misunderstood.

Further, as the variable display using the 7-segment display unit 1600, the player visually recognizes the high-speed variable display period in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the individual symbol display modes that are variablely displayed, and the individual symbol display modes that are variablely displayed. An easy low-speed fluctuation display period is set, and the high-speed fluctuation display period is configured to variably display a display mode different from the third symbol, and the low-speed fluctuation display period is configured to variably display the symbol display mode showing the third symbol. You may. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third symbol from suddenly stopping while suppressing the misunderstanding that the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the afterimage of light during high-speed fluctuation. ..

In the second control example described above, the tempo (BPM (beat per minute)) of the variable sound (BGM) output during the variable display of the special symbol (during the variable display of the third symbol) is configured to be variable. It is configured to change the stop sound of the third symbol according to the tempo of the fluctuating sound (BGM) to be reproduced.

In this way, by variably setting the stop sound of the third symbol corresponding to the BGM played at different tempos, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the fluctuating sound and the stop sound of the third symbol, and the effect is produced. Can be enhanced.

In the second control example described above, even if the BGM is the same, by changing the output tempo, the player can feel that various BGMs are being output, and the game gets tired early. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, by changing the tempo of the BGM, even if the fluctuation display (dynamic display) is performed with the same fluctuation pattern, different fluctuation patterns are executed depending on the tempo of the BGM output according to the fluctuation display. It can be reminiscent, and the variation mode of the special symbol can be felt in various ways.

Further, even when the tempo of the BGM is changed and output, the stop sound corresponding to the tempo change is selected and output, so that it is possible to suppress the problem that the BGM and the stop sound do not match. Also, even when the tempo of BGM is flexibly changed and played by lottery etc., the stop sound is set so that it matches the reference tempo by converting the stop sound according to the change in the tempo and outputting it. If it is set, it can be easily configured to output a matching stop sound.

Further, in this control example, since the lottery ratio of the tempo of the BGM selected according to the lottery result is changed and set, the BGM of the tempo that is easy to be selected when it is a hit is output, and the player is determined to win or fail. You can expect the result to be a hit at an early stage.

In the second control example described above, the visual display mode and the auditory voice mode described above are used as a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. , It suffices as long as it performs an effect for showing the player a lottery result of a special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory effect mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It may be configured to suggest and notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. As described above, by appropriately combining a plurality of types of effect modes to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes to be executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. for example,
Once a jackpot is hit, it is called a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. In addition to pachinko machines, there are other pachinko machines, sparrow balls, slot machines, etc.
It may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a gaming machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and it is caused by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
After a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed, and the player is given a predetermined game value on condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is specific. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game", and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol change is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever.
For example, due to the operation of the stop button or after a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. A special game is generated, and a large amount of balls are paid out to the player in the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball at the entry port and being formed so as to be displaceable, the guide member is A pair of projecting portions are provided so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball that is projected from the guide surface and rolls on the guide surface, and the pair of projecting portions is such that the game ball is formed along the guide surface. The gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is arranged at a different position in a direction orthogonal to the guided direction.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with an entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball at the entry port and being formed so as to be displaceable. ing. As the guide member, for example, a pair of wing members having a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entry port, arranged with the ball entry port interposed therebetween, and pivotally supported on the base end side are exemplified. In this case, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 20
Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 03-164598 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface of one wing member and a second groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface of the other wing member. According to such a technique, the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, so that the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions.
Even when the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surface of one wing member and the guide surface of the other wing member, the game balls are guided (rolled) in different directions from each other (one is on the glass plate side and the other is on the other side). It can be biased toward the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the entrance. However, the above-mentioned conventional technique has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. In addition, a game ball that has entered from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass through from the other side of the guide member. There was a problem that the interest was spoiled.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the guide member includes a pair of projecting portions formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball projecting from the guide surface and rolling on the guide surface, and the pair of protrusions thereof. Since the installation part is arranged at a different position along the guide surface in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface abuts on the protrusion part. By making the ball play ball, the game ball can be reliably deflected. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entry port.

Further, by arranging the pair of projecting portions at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the game ball that has entered from one side of the guide member is projected. It can be brought into contact with the portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered from one side of the guide member from passing through the guide member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by allowing the game ball to enter the entrance.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members arranged so as to sandwich the ball entry port and whose base end side is rotatably supported by a shaft, and the pair of wing members are close to or separated from each other on the tip side. By being rotated in the direction of causing the ball to pass, a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass or an open state in which the game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of projecting portions project from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members. A direction in which the protruding portion of one of the pair of wing members and the protruding portion of the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. The gaming machine A2, which is characterized in that it is arranged at different positions.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members arranged so as to sandwich the entrance and whose base end side is rotatably supported by a shaft, and a pair of protrusions. The installation portion is projected from each guide surface of the pair of wing members, and the protrusion portion in one wing member of the pair of wing members and the protrusion portion in the other wing member are formed along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided, the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surface are brought into contact with the projecting portion to ensure the game balls. Can be biased towards. as a result,
The ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entry port, and the ball can be prevented from being clogged.

Further, the projecting portion of one wing member and the projecting portion of the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (direction from the tip end side to the base end side of the wing member). When a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member reaches the guide surface of the other wing member by being arranged at a different position in the direction of the other wing member, the game ball is placed on the other wing member. It can be brought into contact with the projecting portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by allowing the game ball to enter the entrance.

The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the protruding portion is projected from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the projecting portion is projected from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member, so that the projecting portion is guided to the guide surface. It is possible to secure a rollable area before the game ball comes into contact with the projecting portion. Therefore, the decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed by that amount, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entry port.

In addition, since the projecting portion is projected from the projecting surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member, the path of the game ball that abuts on the projecting portion and is deviated is the entry port. It is possible to suppress the return to the path before the deviation before reaching the front (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the guide surface to the ball entrance while the game ball is in a deviated state.

In the gaming machines A2 or A3, a first region continuous from the tip end side to the proximal end side of the wing member is formed on the guide surface, and the gaming ball guided through the first region is not abutted. The projecting portion is formed in a size, and the first region of the guide surface in one of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface in the other wing member are described above. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the gaming balls are arranged at different positions along the guide surface in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming balls are guided.

According to the gaming machine A4, in the gaming machine A2 or A3, a first region continuous from the tip end side to the proximal end side of the wing member is formed on the guide surface, and the gaming ball guided through the first region is not formed. Since the projecting portion is formed with a size that serves as a contact, when the gaming ball that has entered the guide surface rolls in the first region, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the rolling speed of the gaming ball. The ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In this case, the first region of the guide surface in one of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface in the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. When the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) in the first region of the guide surface of one wing member and the first region of the guide surface of the other wing member because they are arranged at different positions in the direction of the wing. However, each of these game balls can be deflected in different directions from each other, and can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the base member is provided to rotatably support the wing member, and the base member is provided with a regulating portion that abuts on the wing member and regulates the rotation of the wing member. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A5, in any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member that rotatably supports the wing member is provided, and the base member regulates the rotation of the wing member by abutting on the wing member. Since the regulating portion is provided and the protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the projecting portion is a portion projecting from the wing member (guide surface), the portion where the wing member has relatively high rigidity can be used as a stopper for abutting the regulating portion of the base member. By that amount, damage to the wing member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A5, the side surface of the projecting portion is formed substantially flush with the side surface on the proximal end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the side surface thereof is substantially flush with the side surface on the proximal end side of the wing member. The gaming machine A6, wherein the side surface of the projecting portion to be formed is in contact with at least the regulating portion of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the side surface of the projecting portion is formed substantially flush with the side surface on the proximal end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the proximal end side of the wing member is formed. Since the side surface of the projecting portion formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base member is in contact with at least the regulating portion of the base member, the portion far from the rotation axis (the side surface of the projecting portion) is the regulating portion of the base member. Because it can be brought into contact with
The reaction force input from the regulation part to the blade member can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. Further, for example, as compared with the case where the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion is brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member, the regulating portion of the base member can be separated from the ball entry port, and the flow to the ball entry port can be separated. You can secure a space to become a road. In addition to the side surface of the projecting portion, the side surface on the base end side of the wing member may also be in contact with the regulating portion of the base member. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced to further suppress the damage of the wing member.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the intervening wall located between the facing portions of the protruding portions is provided in the closed state, and the pair of wing members have the protruding portions that are not formed in the direction of rotation axis. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the facing distance between the guide surfaces in the region is made larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the facing spacing of the projecting portion is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

Here, the pair of wing members are arranged at positions where the facing intervals of the guide surfaces in the closed state are larger than the diameter of the game balls so as not to sandwich the game balls. In this case, when the projecting portion is projected from the guide surface, the pair of wing members are further separated by the height of the projecting portion so that the game ball is not sandwiched between the projecting portions. The need arises, and the space required for arranging the pair of wing members increases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, an intervening wall located between the facing portions of the projecting portions is provided in the closed state, and the pair of wing members have a rotation shaft. In the direction view, the facing distance between the guide surfaces in the region where the protruding portion is not formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the protruding parts is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be suppressed.

That is, even if the pair of wing members start to close (even if the transition to the closed state is started) while the game ball is being guided (rolled) on the guide surface, an intervening wall is formed between the facing portions of the projecting portions. By locating the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the projecting portions by ejecting the game ball from the opposite space between the projecting portions.
The game ball discharged from the facing space of the projecting portion by the intervening wall is located between the facing surfaces of the guide surfaces in the region where the projecting portion is not formed, and the facing interval at such a position is the game ball. Since it is made larger than the diameter of, the game ball will not be pinched. As a result, the facing distance between the projecting portions can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of wing members can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for the arrangement of the conventional product in which the projecting portion is not projected on the guide surface.

The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the gravity direction and is located above the lower end of the entry port in the gravity direction. Gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the gravity direction and above the lower end of the entrance of the ball in the gravity direction in the open state. Since it is located, the game ball guided by the guide surface can be thrown to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall, the ball can be entered into the ball entry port.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members is arranged at the position where the closed state is formed and the timing at which the other wing member is arranged at the position where the closed state is formed are arranged. The gaming machine A9 characterized in that the timing is different from the timing at which it is played.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the wing members of the pair of wing members is arranged at the position forming the closed state and the other wing member are set. Since the timing at which the pachinko balls are arranged at the positions forming the closed state is different, it is difficult to sandwich the game ball between the pair of wing members (guide surfaces), and the facing distance between the pair of wing members can be narrowed accordingly. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1, the guide member is in a posture in which the guide surface faces the entrance, and is in a closed position that prevents the game ball from entering the entrance, and in a posture with the guide surface as the upper surface. The guide surface of the guide member is rotatably formed between the ball and the open position that allows the game ball that overhangs the front side of the ball entry port and rolls on the guide surface to enter the ball entry port. It is formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entry port, and the pair of projecting portions are arranged at positions sandwiching the ball entry port in front view. A10 is characterized in that the game machine A10 is arranged at a different position in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

In the game machine A1, the guide member is in a closed position in which the guide member is immersed below the entry port to prevent the game ball from entering the entry port, and the guide member is in a posture with the guide surface as the upper surface. It is formed so that it can be slidably displaced from the open position that allows the game ball that overhangs the front side of the ball mouth and rolls on the guide surface to enter the ball entrance, and the guide surface of the guide member is in front. It is formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the entry ball opening, and the pair of projecting portions are arranged at positions sandwiching the entry ball opening in front view. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the game machines are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

According to the gaming machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the guide member has a guide surface having a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entrance. Formed,
The pair of projecting portions are arranged at positions sandwiching the entrance in front view, and are positioned differently in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). Since it is arranged, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface is brought into contact with the projecting portion, so that the game ball can be reliably deflected. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entry port.

Further, one projecting portion and the other projecting portion are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When a game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of projecting portions. Therefore, one side in the width direction to the guide surface of the guide member (
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered from the other side) from passing through the guide surface of the guide member and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface of the guide member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by allowing the game ball to enter the entrance.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
An entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members arranged across the entry opening, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the pair of wing members to open or close them. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wing members are arranged at an allowable position to allow the gaming ball to enter the ball entry port, and the pair of wings are arranged by the driving force of the driving means. In a gaming machine provided with a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting the entry of a game ball into the entrance when the wing member is closed, the pair of wing members is closed or the pair B1 is a gaming machine B1 characterized in that the restricting means is formed so as to be able to maintain the restricting means in a state where the wing member of the slingshot is open from the outside.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members arranged across the entry opening, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close. The driving means to make it
When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wing members are arranged at an allowable position to allow the game ball to enter the ball entrance, and the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means. And a gaming machine provided with a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entrance port (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this gaming machine, when a pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at an allowable position, so that the gaming ball that has passed between the pair of wing members can enter the ball. Can be entered into. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at the regulated position. Therefore, when the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. It is possible to regulate the entry of a ball.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so that the displacement is not regulated.
For example, since the pair of wing members can be forcibly released from the outside and then the regulating means can be displaced from the regulated position to the allowable position, the effect of restricting the illegal entry of the game ball into the entrance is effective. There was a problem that it was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the arrangement of the regulating means can be maintained at the regulated position when the pair of wing members is closed or the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance.

It should be noted that the regulated position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the entrance is sufficient if the game ball can be stopped at a predetermined position. That is, when the ball entry port and the passage connected to the ball entry port and through which the game ball flowing in from the ball entry port passes, the regulated position (the position where the game ball is stopped) by the regulating means is larger than the ball entry port. It may be upstream or downstream from the entrance (that is, in the middle of the path that flows in from the entrance and passes through the passage). In the latter case, the regulated position by the regulating means may be upstream of the detecting means (detection sensor) arranged in the middle of the passage for detecting the passage of the game ball, and the detecting means may be upstream. It may be downstream from.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism is displaced by sliding displacement between the open slide position and the closed slide position due to the driving force of the driving means. The slide transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position by the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position to open the pair of wing members, and the slide transmission member is closed by the slide displacement to the closed slide position. The regulation includes a rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotation position and closes the pair of wing members, the restricting means is arranged on the slide transmission member, and the slide transmission member is slidly displaced to the open slide position. When the means is arranged in an allowable position and the slide transmission member is slide-displaced to the closed slide position, the restricting means is arranged in the restricted position, and the slide transmission member is arranged in the closed slide position. When the rotation transmission member is arranged at the open rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, so that the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is restricted. The game machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, when the rotation transmission member is arranged in the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is arranged in the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are arranged. By engaging with, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is regulated, so that it is easy to regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the ball entry port.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members are illegally forcibly released from the outside, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position with the slide transmission member arranged at the closed slide position. In such a state, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other to regulate the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position, so that the regulation means can be maintained at the regulation position (the regulation means is permissible). It is possible to prevent unauthorized forced displacement from the outside to the position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside and the game ball is passed between the pair of wing members, the ball is restricted from entering the entrance by the regulating means. can.

In the game machine B2, a sliding groove is extended to one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and a sliding protrusion is projected from the other, and the sliding protrusion is slid along the sliding groove. As a result, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted to rotate the rotation transmission member, and the sliding projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove to open the slide transmission member. The game machine B3 characterized in that the slide displacement to the slide position is regulated.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, a sliding groove is extended to one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and a sliding protrusion is projected from the other, and the sliding protrusion slides. By sliding along the moving groove, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted and the rotation transmission member is rotated, and the sliding projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove to transmit the slide. Since the slide displacement of the member to the open slide position is regulated, it is possible to make it difficult to lift the regulation while trying to reduce the size.

That is, it is possible to form a means for regulating the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position by using the sliding groove and the sliding protrusion for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the rotation transmission member and rotating the slide transmission member. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the sliding protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, it is possible to make it difficult for unauthorized access to the engaging portion from the outside.
It can be difficult to release the regulation (engagement).

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism is displaced by sliding displacement between the open slide position and the closed slide position due to the driving force of the driving means. The slide transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position by the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position to open the pair of wing members, and the slide transmission member is closed by the slide displacement to the closed slide position. When the rotation transmission member is provided which is rotated to a rotation position so that the pair of wing members can be closed at least, the restricting means is arranged on the rotation transmission member, and the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position. When the restricting means is arranged in an allowable position and the rotation transmitting member is rotated to a closed rotation position, the restricting means is arranged in the restricted position, the slide transmitting member is arranged in the closed slide position, and the rotation is performed. When the transmission member is arranged in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other to restrict the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. Amusement machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, in a state where the slide transmission member is arranged in the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is arranged in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member By engaging the ball, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted, so that it is easy to regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance.

That is, from a state in which the pair of wing members are closed, for example, the pair of wing members is illegally forcibly released from the outside, or the rotation transmission member is directly operated to rotate the rotation transmission member to the open position. Even if you try to make it, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged, so that
Since the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted, the restricting means can be maintained at the restricted position (that is, the restricting means can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, it is possible to regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance by a regulatory means.

In the game machine B4, a protrusion protruding from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member and an engaging portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member so as to be engageable with the protrusion. The gaming machine B5 is provided, wherein the protruding portion is projected along the direction of slide displacement of the slide transmission member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, a protrusion protruding from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member and the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member so as to be engaged with the protrusion. Since the protrusion is projected along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide transmission member, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is used to engage in the protrusion and the engagement portion. And the disengagement of the engagement can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

The engaging portion may be a surface (slide transmission member or the other outer surface of the rotation transmission member) to which the protrusion can be contacted, and a hole or recess (slide transmission member or rotation transmission) into which the protrusion can be inserted. It may be a hole drilled in one of the members or a recess recessed). That is, it suffices as long as the protrusion can be brought into contact with the engaging portion to regulate the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. In this case, it is preferable that the engaging portion is a hole or a recess. Since the protruding portion is inserted into the engaging portion, the space required for arranging the protruding portion can be suppressed to reduce the size, and the protruding portion is externally inserted by being inserted into the engaging portion. This is because it can be shielded from the surface, and unauthorized access to the protrusion from the outside can be difficult.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member is rotated toward an open side contact portion that abuts and opens by contacting the pair of wing members when rotated toward an open rotation position, and toward a closed rotation position. The gaming machine B6 is provided with a closing side contact portion that abuts and closes the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member has an open side contact portion that abuts and opens a pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. Since it is provided with a closing side contact portion that abuts and closes the pair of wing members when rotated toward the closing rotation position, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members from being illegally forcibly released from the outside. Unauthorized access to the rotation transmission member or slide transmission member from the outside can be difficult.

That is, when the wing member is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closed-side contact portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing member and tries to rotate the rotation transmission member toward the open rotation position.
In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be regulated by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member, so that the displacement of the wing member is abutted on the closed side of the rotation transmission member. It can be regulated by the department. That is, it is possible to regulate that the wing member is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members from being illegally forcibly released from the outside, and it is possible to make it difficult for the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member to be illegally accessed from the outside.

The gaming machine B4 or B5 includes an urging means for urging the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmission member comes into contact with the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. The gaming machine is provided with an open-side contact portion for opening, and when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward a closed rotation position, the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means. B
7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4 or B5, a urging means for urging a pair of wing members in the closing direction is provided, and when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the open rotation position. The pachinko machine is provided with an open side contact portion that abuts and opens the pair of wing members, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means. When the pair of wing members is illegally forcibly released from the outside, the pair of wing members are not brought into contact with the rotation transmission member, and it is possible to prevent the external force due to the forced opening from being applied to the rotation transmission member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member from being damaged.

As an urging means, a spring that urges a pair of wing members in the closing direction by an elastic restoring force (
(Torsion springs and coil springs), magnets that urge a pair of wing members in the closing direction by an attractive force, and the like are exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the pachinko / pachislot machine B1 to B7 is provided with a detecting means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the pachinko / pachislot means has the regulated position downstream from the detecting means. A gaming machine B8 characterized by regulating a gaming ball at a position where it can be detected by a detecting means.
..

According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the regulating means is said to have a regulated position downstream of the detecting means. At the same time, the gaming ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the detecting means. Therefore, for example, when the wing member is forcibly opened and the gaming ball is illegally flowed in from the entrance, the detecting means detects the gaming ball. It is possible to continue the state. Therefore, it is possible to detect that the game ball has been illegally flowed in by determining whether the detection by the detection means has been continued for a predetermined time.

<Concept of the invention using the decorative pattern display device 800 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a rotatably formed first reel and a second reel rotatably arranged and rotatably formed inside the first reel, the first reel is a cylinder. A first outer peripheral wall formed in a shape and a first side wall protruding radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall are provided, and the second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape and has an outer surface thereof. A second outer peripheral wall facing the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval, and the second outer peripheral wall projecting radially inward from one axial side of the second outer peripheral wall, and the outer surface thereof is the inner surface of the first side wall. A game characterized in that a second side wall facing each other at a predetermined interval is provided, and an upright portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall toward the other. Machine C1.

Here, a first reel rotatably formed and a second reel rotatably arranged and rotatably formed inside the first reel are provided (that is, a double reel structure). A gaming machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230693). Further, a technique is also known in which a rotating brush is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and the rotating member is driven by the rotation of the reel to remove dust adhering to the display surface of the reel for cleaning. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-28241).

However, the double reel structure has a problem that cleaning is difficult. That is,
In the double reel structure, the space for arranging the above-mentioned rotating brush cannot be secured between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel), so that the inner peripheral surface and the inner side of the outer reel cannot be secured. The outer peripheral surface of the reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel has a first outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape and a first outer peripheral wall.
It is provided with a first side wall that projects radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall, the second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the outer surface thereof is separated from the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall by a predetermined interval. A second outer peripheral wall facing each other and a second side wall protruding radially inward from one axial side of the second outer peripheral wall and having its outer surface facing the inner surface of the first side wall at predetermined intervals. Since the erecting portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall toward the other, the erecting portion is provided between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Wind pressure is generated by being displaced in the circumferential direction, and the air pressure can be used to flow air between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. Thereby, dust can be removed by the flow of air, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be cleaned. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape in the axial direction and have a surface continuous in the circumferential direction.

Here, when an opening is formed in at least one of the first side wall or the second side wall, or when a part in the circumferential direction is partially divided, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the erecting portion in the circumferential direction escapes from the opening portion and the divided portion, so that the wind pressure weakens, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall are correspondingly reduced. It becomes difficult to flow the air between them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape in the axial direction and have a surface continuous in the circumferential direction. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the vertical portion between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall in the circumferential direction can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of air between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall by that amount. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the erecting portion between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall in the circumferential direction is used to utilize the wind pressure generated by the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. The air between the outer surface and the outer surface can be easily flowed.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, the first reel is provided with a first support wall rotatably supported at the center and supports the first side wall, and the second reel is rotatably shafted at the center. The gaming machine C3 is provided with a second support wall that is supported and supports the second side wall, and an opening is formed in at least one of the first support wall and the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the support wall supporting the first side wall or the second support wall supporting the second side wall. Through the opening, the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside, or the air is blown from the outside between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Can be inhaled. That is, the flow resistance of air can be reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be easily flowed (outflow or inflow) by that amount. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the erecting portion between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall in the circumferential direction is used to utilize the wind pressure generated by the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. The air between the outer surface and the outer surface can be easily flowed.

In the gaming machine C3, when the erecting portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel The gaming machine C4, characterized in that at least the opening is formed in the first support wall or the second support wall of the above.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the first reel or Since at least an opening is formed in the other first support wall or the second support wall of the second reel, it is possible to easily exert the effect of reducing the flow resistance by exhausting or sucking air through the opening. .. That is, when rotating one of the first reel and the second reel on which the upright portion is erected, the other of the openings is stopped so that the air through the opening is stopped. flow(
The resistance of exhaust or intake) can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machine is characterized in that the upright portion is erected at different positions in the radial direction on each of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. C5
..

In the gaming machine C5, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the inner surface of the first side wall and the second
Since the erecting portion is erected at different positions in the radial direction from the outer surface of the side wall, the inner surface and the first of the first side wall are rotated regardless of whether the first reel or the second reel is rotated. The wind pressure can be generated by displacing the standing portion in the circumferential direction between the two side walls and the outer surface. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall in the effect of rotating the first reel or the second reel.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed with light transmission, and a plurality of symbols are formed on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. The gaming machine C6 is arranged along the circumferential direction, and the upright portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed with light transmission, and the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel is formed. Since a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction, the player can visually recognize the fluctuation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the second reel via the first reel. In this case, the upright portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the upright portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, which has a higher number of rotations than the first reel. , The opportunity to clean the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased in the effect of rotating the first reel or the second reel.

<Concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
A substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and a transmitting member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are provided, the transmitting member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light emitting means are formed of the transmitting member. In a gaming machine arranged along a curve, the gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Here, a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and a transmitting member for transmitting light emitted from the light emitting means are provided, and the transmitting member is formed to be curved, and the plurality of light emitting means are curved to the transmitting member. There are known gaming machines arranged along the same line (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106672). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged so as to be evenly spaced in the front view of the transmissive member. That is, they are evenly spaced along the direction of the line segment (chord) connecting both ends of the curved line (arc) formed by the plurality of light emitting means. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means is biased because the distance between the light emitting means and the adjacent light emitting means is narrowed in a part of the plurality of light emitting means. Therefore, heat is concentrated on some of the light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between each light emitting means and the adjacent light emitting means can be kept constant, and the heat generated by the light emitting means can be distributed. Can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to suppress the concentration of heat on some of the light emitting means and improve the life of each light emitting means.

The gaming machine D1 includes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of division screens that are partitioned corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means. 2. The gaming machine D2, characterized in that the division widths of the transparent members of the plurality of ward screens in the front view are set to be substantially the same.

Here, when a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curvature of the transmitting member, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at irregular intervals in the front view of the transmitting member. The Rukoto. That is, in the front view of the transmissive member, a region where the distance between the light emitting means is narrow and a region where the distance between the light emitting means is wide is formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, a reflecting member for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member is provided, and the reflecting member corresponds to a plurality of light emitting means. Since the partition widths in the front view of the transmissive members of the plurality of ward screens are set to be substantially the same, the amount of light of each ward screen visually recognized in the front view of the transmissive members is abbreviated. Can be the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D2, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, so that, for example, the light emitting surface has a circular shape as compared with the case where the light emitting surface has a circular shape. Since diffusivity can be ensured (light can be emitted at a wider angle), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform on one screen.

The light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encloses the LED chip. Therefore, the front view rectangular shape of the light emitting surface means that the front view shape of the encapsulating resin (the front view shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin) is rectangular.

In the gaming machine D3, at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface is oriented along the tangential direction in the curved shape of the transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged so that one side of the light emitting surface is oriented along the tangential direction in the curved shape of the transmissive member. The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curvature of the transmitting member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmitting member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the section screen is formed as a curved surface facing the back surface of the transmissive member and recessed on a side away from the back surface of the transmissive member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is the transmissive surface. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the member faces the opposite side of the ward screen.

According to the gaming machine D5, in any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the ward screen is formed as a curved surface facing the back surface of the transmissive member and dented on the side away from the back surface of the transmissive member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. Faces between the transmissive member and the ward screen, so that the substrate can be arranged in a posture orthogonal to the transmissive member. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the unit composed of the transmissive member, the substrate and the reflective member. In this case, since the ward screen is arranged so as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the light emitting means from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected on the ward screen is transferred to the back surface of the transmitting member. It can be uniformly incident. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmitting member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D5, the reflective member is provided with a continuous surface that is connected to the ward screen and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the continuous surface is convex toward the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that it is formed as a curved surface.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the reflective member is connected to the ward screen and has a continuous surface facing the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the connected surface is the light emitting means. Since it is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the light emitting surface of the above, the light reflected by the continuous surface can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the transmitting member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transmitting member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

<Concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
A rotating cylinder that is rotatably formed and a plurality of the rotating cylinders arranged side by side at predetermined intervals, and a decorative member that is arranged along the plurality of rotating cylinders and has at least a part of light transmission. , A substrate is provided on the back surface side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and the substrate is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member.

Here, a pachinko machine that is rotatably formed and a plurality of slingshots are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals, and a pachinko machine that is arranged along between the plurality of slingshots and at least a part thereof has light transmission. A decorative member and a substrate arranged on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted are provided, and the substrate is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. A gaming machine to be installed is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-5927). According to this gaming machine
Not only can the space between the cylinders be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern is formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light of the light emitting means transmitted through the decorative member, and the design of the decorative member is displayed. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the substrate is arranged in such a posture that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently applied to the back surface of the decorative member. The pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means cannot be sufficiently enlarged. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of production is insufficient. On the other hand, if the decorative member (region excluding the symbol) is enlarged while the symbol formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means is small, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating cylinder is hindered.

On the other hand, the gaming machine E1 includes a reflective member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member, so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. Even when the substrate is disposed, the range of irradiation of the back surface of the decorative member by the light emitted from the light emitting means can be widened. Therefore, the design formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means can be enlarged by that amount, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the area excluding the symbol can be made smaller by the amount that the symbol formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means can be made larger, it is possible to form a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating cylinder.

In the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder, and is formed by extending the outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder in front view. The featured gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder and extends the outer edge to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder in the front view. Since it is formed by pulling it out, it is possible to easily shield (difficult to visually recognize) the axial end surface of the rotating cylinder from the player. Further, since the design of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means can be made closer to the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder, the decorative member and the rotating cylinder can be combined with each other. It can be easy to form a feeling.

In the gaming machine E2, the reflective member connects a surface on the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and a back surface of the decorative member so that a region on the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and a design on the decorative member are formed. A gaming machine E3 that surrounds a region to be formed, and the back surface of the reflective member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end face of the rotating cylinder toward the substrate from the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the reflective member is a region in which the light emitting means on the substrate is mounted by connecting the surface on the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member. And the area where the pattern is formed in the decorative member, and the back surface of the reflective member
Since it is inclined in a direction away from the axial end face of the cylinder as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate, the back surface of the decorative member is secured while ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means. Can be brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder, and the rotating cylinder can be inserted into the back side of the back surface of the decorative member (the rotating cylinder is brought close to the substrate). As a result, the axial end surface of the rotating cylinder can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player, and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating cylinder can be easily formed.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the light emitting means is mounted on both one side surface and the other side surface of the substrate.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the light emitting means is mounted on both one side surface and the other side surface of the substrate, so that the light emitting means is mounted on one side surface. Different patterns can be independently formed (displayed) on the decorative member depending on the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the other side surface.

In this case, the number of substrates arranged between the rotating cylinders arranged side by side can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the substrate can be suppressed, the rotating cylinder can be inserted into the back side of the back surface of the decorative member (the rotating cylinder is brought close to the substrate) by that amount. As a result, the axial end surface of the rotating cylinder can be easily shielded (difficult to be visually recognized) from the player, and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating cylinder can be easily formed.

<Concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
A gaming machine provided with a first displacement member and a second displacement member that are arranged facing each other and are displaceable in the directions of proximity or separation, and are displaceable in the same direction with the facing sides in contact with each other. In, the base member and the first displacement member and the second displacement member on the base member.
A first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that support the displacement members in a displaceable manner are provided, and the support mode of the first support mechanism is biased to one side of the facing side of the first displacement member, and the first displacement member is provided. The second displacement member is on the opposite side to the other side of the second displacement member that is in contact with one side of the opposite side.
A gaming machine F1 characterized in that the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the facing side of the displacement member.

Here, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged so as to face each other and are displaceable in the directions of proximity or separation, and are displaceable in the same direction with the facing sides in contact with each other.
A gaming machine provided with a displacement member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-106844).
.. According to such a gaming machine, an object (for example, an object) located on the back surface side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where the facing sides abut with each other. , The liquid crystal display device and the effect member) are shielded, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in a direction away from each other, so that the shield is released according to the displacement and the object can be visually recognized. It is possible to perform the production to be done. Further, by displacementing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) with the facing sides in contact with each other, the shielding of the object is maintained. , It is also possible to perform an effect before releasing the shield (an effect that focuses on the operation of releasing the shield).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to bring the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other due to the dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members, and between the facing sides. There was a problem that a gap might be formed in the. When a gap is formed between the opposite sides, the player can see the object on the back side through the gap, and the effect of the effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member and the base member are provided with a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that support the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a displaceable manner, respectively.
The support mode of the first support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member, which is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the second displacement member which is in contact with one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member. Since the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the facing side of the second displacement member on the side, the first is in a state where the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other. The support mode of the support mechanism and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be displaced to opposite sides (the side rotated by 180 ° with the center of one side and the other side of the opposite sides as the center of rotation). As a result, the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as an embodiment in which the support state is displaced to one side, for example, the rigidity of the constituent members (dimensions, number of arrangements, materials, etc.) of the constituent members differs between one side and the other side, and one side and the other. The driving force transmitted on the side (for example, size, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) is different, and the connected state of the constituent members on one side and the other side (for example, the number of connected parts, the connected part) Things with different fluttering amount, etc., ease of displacement to the other side on one side and the other side (the urging force received from the urging means, gravity, etc.)
Examples include those with different displacements (resistance during sliding and rotation), and those with a combination of these.

Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side by the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism have their own high rigidity side (low side) as the other's low rigidity side (high side). ) Can be met. Therefore, in a state where the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (advances) the other on the highly rigid side and at the same time. On the side with low rigidity, it is possible to form a state of accepting (retracting) the other party. As a result, the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means for generating a driving force, a pair of first connecting members for connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and a pair of the first connecting members. The driving force of the first driving means is transmitted to the first, and the first driving means has a different configuration from each other.
The second support mechanism includes a one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member, and the second support mechanism is a pair of a second driving means for generating a driving force and a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member. Parts and
A gaming machine characterized in that a driving force of the second driving means is transmitted to the pair of second connecting members, and a second first-side transmitting member and a second other-side transmitting member having different configurations are provided. F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means for generating a driving force and a pair of first connecting members for connecting the first displacement member to the base member. The second support mechanism is provided with a first side transmission member and a first other side transmission member having different configurations while transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the pair of first connecting members. The driving force of the second driving means is transmitted to the second driving means that generates the driving force, the pair of second connecting members that connect the second displacement member to the base member, and the pair of the second connecting members, and each other. Since the second first-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member having different configurations are provided, it is possible to easily bring the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other, and there is a gap between the facing sides. It can be suppressed from being formed.

That is, in a state where the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism has, for example, a side having a large driving force or a transmission timing of the driving force. It is possible to form a state in which the opponent is pushed (advanced) on the front side and the opponent is accepted (backward) on the side where the driving force is small or the transmission timing of the driving force is on the rear side. as a result,
The facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

Here, as an embodiment in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second first-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) have different configurations, for example, the rigidity (configuration) of the constituent members is used. Examples include those with different member dimensions, number of arrangements, materials, etc., those with different connected states (for example, number of connected parts, amount of rattling of connected parts, etc.), and those that combine these. Will be done. That is, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing are different due to the difference in these configurations, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are biased to one side, respectively.

In the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length as each other, one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is the base member. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that it is rotatably supported on the same axis.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length as each other, and one end side thereof is the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Since it is connected to the member and the other end side is pivotally supported coaxially with the base member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction while abutting the opposite sides thereof. At that time, even when the displacement of the support mode is used, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the facing sides are in contact with each other.

In the gaming machine F3, an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material is disposed on at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member face each other. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state in a state of being in contact with the first connecting member.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material is disposed on at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member, and the first displacement member. And in the state where the second displacement members are in contact with each other, the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state. When the second displacement member is reciprocated in the same direction while abutting the facing sides thereof, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the facing sides are in contact with each other even when the displacement of the support mode is used.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is the first to generate a driving force.
A driving means, a pair of first connecting members that are driven by the first driving means and connect the first displacement member to the base member, and a pair of first connecting members that are subjected to different urging forces. (1) A one-side urging member and a first other-side urging member are provided, and the second support mechanism is driven by a second driving means for generating a driving force and the second driving means, and the second displacement. It is provided with a pair of second connecting members that connect the members to the base member, and a second side urging member and a second other side urging member that apply different urging forces to the pair of second connecting members. The gaming machine F5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means for generating the driving force and the first driving means thereof, and the first one.
It is provided with a pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement members to the base member, and a first side urging member and a first other side urging member that apply different urging forces to the pair of first connecting members. Second
The support mechanism includes a second driving means that generates a driving force, a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second driving means and connect the second displacement member to the base member, and a pair of second connecting members thereof. Since the second first side urging member and the second other side urging member that apply different urging forces to the members are provided, the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the facing sides can be easily brought into close contact with each other. It is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the two.

That is, in a state where the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (advances) the other, for example, on the side where the urging force is large. ), The side with less urging force can form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

The first side urging member and the first other side urging member may have the same configuration.
That is, the positions on which the urging forces are applied may be different from each other, or the amount of elastic deformation may be different from each other, so that the urging forces applied to the pair of first connecting members may be different. The same applies to the second side urging member and the second other side urging member.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is the first to generate a driving force.
An urging force is applied to a driving means, a pair of first connecting members driven by the first driving means and connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and one of the pair of the first connecting members. The second support mechanism is driven by a second driving means that generates a driving force and the second driving means, and connects the second displacement member to the base member. A gaming machine F6 comprising a pair of second connecting members and a second urging member that applies a urging force to one of the pair of second connecting members.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means for generating the driving force and the first driving means thereof, and the first one.
A pair of first connecting members for connecting the displacement members to the base member and a first urging member for applying an urging force to one of the pair of first connecting members are provided, and the second support mechanism has a driving force. Is attached to one of a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and a pair of the second connecting members. Since the second urging member for applying the force is provided, the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

That is, in a state where the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes the other, for example, on the side where the urging force is applied ( Along with (advancing), it is possible to form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent on the side where the urging force is not applied. As a result, the facing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the facing sides can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3 or F4, one leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, which is formed as a torsion spring, and the first displacement member is connected to the second.
The first torsion spring is provided to apply an urging force in the direction of approaching the displacement member, and the first connecting member is rotated in the direction of bringing the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member. It is characterized in that at least one of the connecting position between one leg of the torsion spring and the first connecting member or the connecting position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion. Game machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3 or F4, one leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, which is formed as a torsion spring.
Since it is provided with a first torsion spring that applies an urging force in the direction of bringing the displacement member closer to the second displacement member, when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction closer to the second displacement member, the first connecting member is provided. The driving force of the first driving means required for rotating the first torsion spring can be assisted by the urging force of the first torsion spring. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position separated from the second displacement member to the contact position in contact with the second displacement member, the displacement can be smoothly started. can.

In this case, as the first connecting member is rotated in the direction in which the first displacement member is brought closer to the second displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or the first torsion spring. Since at least one of the connecting positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied becomes longer, so that the first displacement member is closer to the second displacement member. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the direction of making it. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member brought close to the second displacement member is stopped, the displacement can be reliably stopped, so that damage due to a collision can be suppressed. In addition, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other.
When the displacement member is reciprocally displaced in the same direction, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement can be increased and the effect of effect can be improved.

In the game machine F7, a direction formed as a torsion spring in which one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member. A second torsion spring is provided to impart an urging force to the second torsion spring, and one leg of the second torsion spring is rotated as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction in which the second displacement member is brought closer to the first displacement member. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that at least one of the connection position between the second connecting member and the second connecting member or the connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

According to the gaming machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as that of the first torsion spring in the gaming machine F7. In particular, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the facing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed in both cases, which is particularly effective. Become. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are placed at the same height (arranged at the position in the direction of gravity), and the position where they abut is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity, and the two are separated from each other. The configuration of the gaming machine F8 is particularly effective when the position to be moved (retracted position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity.

In the gaming machine F7, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, since the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member by the displacement upward in the gravity direction, the first displacement member moves downward in the gravity direction. The more it is located, the stronger the urging force in the direction of displacement of the first displacement member in the direction of gravity (that is, the more the first displacement member is located in the upper direction of gravity, the stronger the urging force in the direction of displacement of the first displacement member in the direction of gravity). Can weaken the force of the.).

Therefore, when the first displacement member is displaced (ascended) from the stopped state in the upward direction in the direction of gravity, the displacement (ascending) can be smoothly started and the ascended first displacement member is stopped. In some cases, the displacement can be stopped reliably not only by the action of gravity but also by the weakening of the urging force. As a result, damage due to collision with the second displacement member can be suppressed.
On the other hand, when the first displacement member displaced (descended) downward in the direction of gravity is stopped, the urging force is strengthened to counteract the action of gravity that tries to continue the descent. be able to. As a result, the first displacement member can be reliably stopped.

In the game machine F9, a direction formed as a torsion spring, in which one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member to separate the second displacement member from the first displacement member. The second torsion spring is provided, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member. As the second connecting member is rotated in the direction of approaching the second connecting member, the second connecting member is rotated.
It is characterized in that at least one of the connecting position between one leg of the torsion spring and the second connecting member or the connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion. Game machine F10.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F9, it is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member to form a second displacement member. 1 Provided with a second torsion spring that applies urging force in the direction away from the displacement member, and a second
Since the displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, when the second displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the first displacement member, that is, the second displacement member is displaced in the direction of gravity. When it is necessary to displace (raise) against the above, the driving force of the second driving means required to rotate the first connecting member can be assisted by the urging force of the second torsion spring.
Therefore, the displacement can be smoothly performed.

In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in the direction in which the second displacement member is brought closer to the first displacement member, the connecting position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by the amount that the distance from the winding portion to the action position of the force becomes longer. It is possible to weaken the urging force in the direction of making (the direction of raising upward in the direction of gravity). Therefore,
For example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the facing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement. Can be enhanced, and the effect of production can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Independent drum in front of the drum)
When the determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, the identification information is composed of a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols, and the gaming machine is the symbol. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing a row and a switching means for switching an operation content dynamically displaced by the dynamic displacement means.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (design) for showing the jackpot lottery result is printed in order to execute an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A gaming machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel type display device, a belt type display device) capable of executing a variable display for rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Issue). The above-mentioned gaming machine notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot by actually operating the medium on which the pattern is printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, the variable display can be executed only in a predetermined display mode (display mode that only displays the printed pattern), and the variation of the effect display becomes scarce, so that the player can play the game. There was a problem of getting bored early. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines with improved play interest by diversifying variations of variable display.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the operation content in which the symbol sequence is dynamically displaced is switched by the switching means, it is possible to switch various effects by the dynamic displacement of the symbol sequence, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It has the effect of suppressing the problems that occur.

In the gaming machine G1, the identification information is composed of a first symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and a second symbol row that can be arranged on the front side or the rear surface side of the first symbol row. The dynamic displacement means displaces the direction in which the first symbol array is dynamically displaced and the direction in which the second symbol array is dynamically displaced in different directions. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the operation content is switched by switching the visual recognition state between the first symbol row and the second symbol row.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the visual recognition state can be switched by the switching means, so that the player can switch between the first symbol row and the second symbol row for visual recognition. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by showing dynamic displacement that displaces in different directions.

In the gaming machine G1, the first symbol row is arranged on the rear surface side of the second symbol row, and the second symbol row has a transmissive portion that makes the first symbol row visible. The gaming machine G3 is formed, and the switching means is characterized in that the operation content visible to the player is changed by changing the position of the second symbol row.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, by changing the position of the visible transmissive portion, the visual state of the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be changed, and various displays can be obtained. Has the effect of being able to do.

In either the gaming machine G2 or G3, a plurality of the first symbol rows are arranged, and the determination result is notified by the combination of the symbols of each symbol row when the plurality of symbol rows are stopped. The second symbol row is configured by one symbol row, and the determination result is notified by one symbol when the symbol row is stopped. A gaming machine G4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the number of symbol rows differs between the first symbol row and the second symbol row, so that the player is provided with different notification modes of the determination result. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic H group> (Drum in normal time, 7-segment in short time)
A determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, a dynamic displacement means for dynamically displacing the identification information displayed on the display means, and the like. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a plurality of different gaming states are displayed. A game state setting means that can be set, and a dynamic displacement mode determining means that determines a mode that is dynamically displaced by the dynamic displacement means in response to the game state set by the game state setting means. The identification information is composed of a plurality of different symbols, and the determination result is shown by combining the plurality of different symbols, and the dynamic displacement means is the first by the gaming state setting means. When one game state is set, the plurality of different symbols are displaced in a predetermined order to be dynamically displaced, and when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, among the plurality of different symbols, one symbol is configured to be dynamically displaced by being displaced from one symbol to another arbitrary symbol.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (design) for showing the jackpot lottery result is printed in order to execute an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A gaming machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel type display device, a belt type display device) capable of executing a variable display for rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Issue). The above-mentioned gaming machine notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot by actually operating the medium on which the pattern is printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, since only the variable display according to the order of the printed symbols can be executed, the player can easily predict the result of the game (identification information (symbol) to be stopped and displayed), and the player can use it. There was a problem of getting bored of the game early. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine H1, since the displacement content of the symbol is produced so as to be different depending on the gaming state, it is possible to switch between the case where the next displaced symbol type can be predicted and the effect where the prediction is difficult. However, it has the effect of suppressing the problem of getting bored of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine H1, the identification information is composed of a symbol sequence in which the plurality of different symbols are arranged and a display symbol in which some of the plurality of different symbols are lit and displayed. The displacement means is characterized in that, in the first gaming state, the symbol train is dynamically displaced, and in the second gaming state, the display symbol is dynamically displaced by lighting control. Gaming machine H2 to play.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the symbol sequence is dynamically displaced in the first gaming state, and the display symbol is dynamically displaced by lighting control in the second gaming state. In the second gaming state, the dynamic displacement can be performed in a short time, and there is an effect that the effect can be produced in a short time.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the first gaming state is set, the dynamic displacement mode determining means has a longer dynamic period than when the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that it is configured so that the dynamic displacement mode can be easily determined.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, in the first gaming state, a longer dynamic period than the second period is likely to be determined. Therefore, the long dynamic display period is used. It has the effect of notifying the player of the dynamic displacement of the symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature I group> (Variable display area size)
An effect executing means capable of executing the effect, an effect means having an effect execution area in which the effect is executed by the effect execution means, and a privilege advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed are given. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means, the gaming machine has a variable means for varying the effect execution area, and a variable control means for changing the effect execution area by the variable means in response to the effect to be executed. The gaming machine I1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (design) for showing the lottery result of the big hit is printed in order to execute an effect display for showing the lottery result of the big hit on the game board surface. For example, a gaming machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel type display device, a belt type display device) capable of executing a variable display for rotating a reel or a belt has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Gazette). The above-mentioned gaming machine was able to make the player interested in the variable display, but since the device is actually driven and controlled to execute the variable display, the liquid crystal display device is used. There is a problem that it is difficult to change the effect mode of the variable display as compared with the conventional gaming machine used, and it is not possible to improve the interest of the game. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine I1, since the effect execution area is variable according to the effect to be executed, the effect being executed can be determined also by the effect execution area, and the effect being executed is made easy to understand. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine I1 has an effect period determining means for determining an effect execution period executed by the effect execution means, and the effect execution means has a plurality of continuous effects within the effect execution period determined by the effect period determination means. The game machine is configured to be able to execute a continuous effect in which the effect to be performed is executed, and the variable control means is characterized in that the effect execution area is changed according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed. I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, the effect execution area is changed according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed, so that the number of times the continuous effect is executed can be identified by the effect execution area. It has the effect of being able to play easy-to-understand games.

The gaming machine I1 or I2 has a determination means capable of executing a determination, and the effect executing means dynamically displays a combination of a plurality of symbol sequences in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged, and then displays the stop display. It is configured so that the determination result by the determination means can be shown by the combination of the symbol strings stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the effective line corresponds to the change of the effect execution area by the variable means. The gaming machine I3, which is characterized in that it is set by increasing or decreasing.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines I1 or I2, the effective lines increase or decrease according to the effects executed by the effect executing means, so that the players are expected to have various hits. It has the effect of being able to have it and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic J group> (Direction to create an effective line)
When the determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, the identification information is configured to be capable of showing the determination result by combining a plurality of symbols. After dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols, a dynamic display means capable of stopping and displaying the plurality of symbols in a combination for showing the determination result on a predetermined effective line and a specific condition are satisfied. In this case, the gaming machine J1 is characterized by having an effective line setting means capable of setting a specific effective line different from the effective line.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in order to execute an effect display for showing a big hit lottery result on a game board surface, a plurality of identification information (designs) for showing a big hit lottery result are printed. A display device (for example, a reel type display device, a belt type display device) capable of executing a variable display for rotating a medium (for example, a reel or a belt) is provided, and a plurality of identification information (for example, a plurality of identification information stopped and displayed at a specific display position) are provided. A gaming machine that notifies a player of a jackpot lottery result by a combination of symbols) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the specific display position where the identification information (design) is stopped and displayed is fixed to show the lottery result of the jackpot, the result of the game (identification information to be stopped and displayed) is fixed to the player. There was a problem that the pattern)) was easily predicted and the player got tired of the game at an early stage. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine J1, when a specific condition is satisfied, a specific effective line different from the predetermined effective line is set by the effective line setting means. Therefore, a specific determination result is set for the predetermined effective line. In addition to displaying a symbol for indicating, it is possible to expect that a specific condition is satisfied, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine J1 has a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol in addition to the plurality of symbols, and the effective line setting means includes the symbol display means and a part of the symbols among the plurality of symbols. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that when a specific combination is obtained as a result of combining the above, a specific effective line is set as the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, specific conditions are satisfied by the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, so that the person is interested in other than the symbols displayed on the predetermined effective line. It has the effect of suppressing the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine J2, the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is configured to start dynamic display when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed among the plurality of symbols. A gaming machine J3 characterized by being there.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2, the dynamic display is started when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the stopping display of the specific symbol is expected to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the symbol displaying means is configured to dynamically display a symbol by switching between a lighting state and an extinguishing state.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, the symbols displayed on the symbol display means are dynamically displayed by switching between the lit state and the extinguished state, so that the symbols are rotated multiple times in a short time. It has the effect of being able to display the target.

<Characteristic K group> (7-segment display with reduced time display)
When the determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, a game capable of setting a specific gaming state in which a determination by the determination means is likely to be executed until a specific condition is satisfied. It is characterized by having a state setting means and a notification means for notifying a player of information corresponding to a remaining period until the specific condition is satisfied by using at least a part of the identification information. Game machine K1 to play.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a display means (7-segment) for executing lighting control and extinguishing control for seven segments in order to execute an effect display for showing a big hit lottery result on the game board surface. A gaming machine equipped with a display device) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-11180). Further, in a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal display, a function that enables a player to set a favorable gaming state (for example, a time saving state) for a predetermined period of time and displays the remaining period during which the time saving state can be set on the liquid crystal display. A gaming machine having (for example, a function of displaying the number of remaining hours) has also been proposed. By the way, since the gaming machine equipped with the above-mentioned 7-segment display device can only notify the player of information using the seven segments, the gaming machine equipped with the conventional liquid crystal display can be compared to the gaming machine. Since the amount of information that can be notified decreases, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to notify the player of the above-mentioned remaining time reduction number of times. Further, if a dedicated display means for executing the display of the number of remaining hours is provided, there is a problem that the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine increases. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machine is to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game by making it possible to notify the number of remaining time reductions by using a 7-segment display device that executes an effect display for showing the result of a big hit lottery. And.

The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the display means has a 7-segment display unit, and the identification information is composed of a symbol displayed by the 7-segment display unit.

In the gaming machines K1 or K2, after the identification information is dynamically displayed, a dynamic display means for causing the identification information to be stopped and displayed in a manner for showing the determination result, and a period for causing the dynamic display means to dynamically display the identification information. The gaming machine K3 is characterized by having a dynamic display period determining means for determining the above.

In the gaming machine K3, a regulation for setting a regulation period for restricting the dynamic display of the identification information between the time when the identification information is stopped and displayed and the time when the dynamic display of the identification information is started next time. A gaming machine K4 characterized by having a period setting means.

In the gaming machine K3, after the temporary stop display is performed in the mode for showing the determination result by the identification information in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the above-mentioned aspect from the aspect showing the determination result. The gaming machine K5, characterized in that it is displayed by switching to an aspect showing information.

<Characteristic L group> A determination means capable of performing a determination in which the number of effective lines is changed by rotating the shutter, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a specific display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege-giving means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for showing the determination result is displayed, the identification information is obtained by combining a plurality of symbols. It is configured so that the determination result can be shown, and after the plurality of symbols are dynamically displayed, the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination for showing the determination result on a predetermined effective line. The gaming machine L1 characterized by having a dynamic display means capable of capable.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a medium on which identification information (design) for showing the jackpot lottery result is printed in order to execute an effect display for showing the jackpot lottery result on the game board surface. A gaming machine provided with a display device (for example, a reel type display device, a belt type display device) capable of executing a variable display for rotating (for example, a reel or a belt) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-144675). Issue). The above-mentioned gaming machine notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot by actually operating the medium on which the pattern is printed, so that the player can be interested in the variable display. However, the variable display can be executed only in a predetermined display mode (display mode that only displays the printed pattern), and the variation of the effect display becomes scarce, so that the player can play the game. There was a problem of getting bored early. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machines to provide gaming machines with improved play interest by diversifying variations of variable display.

According to the gaming machine L1, after dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols, a plurality of symbols can be stopped and displayed in a combination for showing a determination result on a predetermined effective line, so that the player is interested in the effective line. It is possible to have it, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine L1 has a variable member capable of changing the size of the display area of the display means, and by changing the variable member, the size of the display area is changed, which is effective. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the line can be increased or decreased.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the effective line is increased or decreased by changing the variable member. Therefore, by changing the variable member, the degree of expectation for a specific determination result is changed. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic M group> (BGM (stop sound) when the symbol is stopped is defined as BGM (stop sound) with good sharpness)
The above-mentioned gaming machine having a determination means capable of executing a determination and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result. Dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. Means, at least an audio output means capable of outputting audio during a period in which the dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information, and an audio type for setting the type of audio output by the audio output means. The voice type setting means has a setting means, and the voice type setting means sets the voice type according to the stop timing of the identification information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means. A gaming machine M1 characterized by being a machine to play.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines use a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the surface of the game board to perform an effect display for showing a lottery result of a big hit, and also support the effect display. There was something that played the sound that was made to play. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed that enables a player to set a desired voice by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced voice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). .. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing to stop and display a part of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the jackpot) and the timing to emphasize and output the reproduced voice (timing to beat the beat) are different. There was a problem that it would end up. In this way, if the emphasis timing of the effect display and the emphasis timing of the sound are different, it becomes difficult to clearly inform the player of the timing to be watched among the effects to be executed, which is visual. There is a problem that the production (effect display) and the auditory production (audio output) cannot be executed as a production with a sense of unity. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine M1, since the type of voice can be set according to the stop timing of the identification information, it is possible to output the voice according to the stop timing of the identification information, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. It has the effect of being able to be set.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display means enables a plurality of symbol sequences formed from a plurality of identification information to be dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display mode setting means differs from the plurality of the symbol sequences. The dynamic display mode for stopping and displaying at the timing is set, and the voice type setting means is characterized in that the same voice type is set at each timing for stopping and displaying the plurality of symbol strings. The gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, the same type of voice can be output according to a plurality of stop timings set by the dynamic display mode setting means, so that the identification information can be dynamically displayed during the period of one. It has the effect of being able to provide a sensational effect.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the voice output means can output a second voice different from the voice set by the voice type setting means, and the voice set by the voice type setting means and the voice set by the voice type setting means. The second voice has an output timing discriminating means for discriminating the timing at which the second voice is output, and a correction means for correcting the output mode of the second voice based on the discriminating result of the output timing discriminating means. The gaming machine M3 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine M3, the output mode of the second voice can be corrected based on the determination result of the output timing between the voice output based on the stop timing of the identification information and the second voice, so that the identification information There is an effect that the voice output based on the stop timing of is given priority over other voices.

In the gaming machine M3, when the output timing of the voice and the output timing of the second voice overlap within a predetermined period by the output timing determining means, the correction means outputs the second voice. A gaming machine M4 characterized by being prohibited.

According to the gaming machine M4, when the voice output at the stop timing of the identification information overlaps with the other voice, the output of the other voice is prohibited, so that the voice is output at the stop timing of the identification information. There is an effect that the sound to be played can be easily heard by the player.

When the gaming machine M4 has a volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume of the voice output by the voice output means or the second voice, and prohibits the output of the second voice by the correction means. Is a gaming machine M5 characterized in that the volume of the second voice is adjusted to mute by a volume adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine M5, it is possible to give priority to the player to hear the first voice only by adjusting the volume corresponding to the second voice, so that there is an effect that the processing of the correction means can be simplified. be.

In any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the gaming machine M6 is characterized in that the second voice is a musical piece that is continuously output at least during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the music is output as the second voice during the dynamic display period of the identification information, so that the effect of enhancing the effect can be enhanced. There is.

In the gaming machine M6, the output timing determining means discriminates between the timing at which the voice is output and the timing of the beat of the music.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M6, the timing of outputting the voice and the timing of the beat of the music are determined by the output timing determining means, so that the voice output from the voice output means is appropriate. There is an effect that it can be discriminated and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the voice type setting means has the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means when the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result. The gaming machine M8 is characterized in that it sets a type of the voice output at a timing different from the stop timing of the identification information included in the above.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, the sound output timing is intentionally determined from the stop timing of the identification information. Since it can be shifted, it is possible to notify the player of the game result which is advantageous for the player with a strange effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game.

<Characteristic N group> (Drum scroll speed is changed by BGM with different tempo)
The above-mentioned gaming machine having a determination means capable of executing a determination and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result. Dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. Means, at least an audio output means capable of outputting audio during a period in which the dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information, and an audio type for setting the type of audio output by the audio output means. It has a setting means and a voice type discriminating means for discriminating the voice type set by the voice type setting means, and the dynamic display mode setting means is based on the discriminating result of the voice type discriminating means. , The gaming machine N1 characterized in that the dynamic display mode of the identification information is set differently.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines use a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the surface of the game board to perform an effect display for showing a lottery result of a big hit, and also support the effect display. There was something that played the sound that was made to play. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed that enables a player to set a desired voice by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced voice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). .. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing to stop and display a part of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the jackpot) and the timing to emphasize and output the reproduced voice (timing to beat the beat) are different. There was a problem that it would end up. In this way, if the emphasis timing of the effect display and the emphasis timing of the sound are different, it becomes difficult to clearly inform the player of the timing to be watched among the effects to be executed, which is visual. There is a problem that the production (production display) and the auditory production (audio output) cannot be executed as a production with a sense of unity. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, since the dynamic display mode can be changed based on the discrimination result of the voice type discriminating means, a dynamic display mode that does not give a sense of discomfort to the voice output by the voice output means is set. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the game machine N1, the voice type setting means is configured so that at least a first voice type and a second voice type having a faster tempo than the first voice type can be set as the voice type. The game machine N2 is characterized in that the dynamic display mode setting means sets the dynamic display speed of the identification information differently according to the tempo of the voice type set by the voice type setting means. ..

According to the gaming machine N2, since the dynamic display speed can be changed according to the tempo of the sound output from the sound output means, there is a sense of unity between the output sound and the set dynamic display mode. It has the effect of being able to make it and enhance the effect of production.

The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine N1 or N2, the voice type setting means sets the voice type based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine N3, since the player can predict the determination result of the determination means depending on the output voice type, the player can be interested in the mode of the output voice. effective. Further, since the dynamic display mode is set according to the voice type set based on the determination result of the determination means, there is an effect that the determination result of the determination means can be easily predicted.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, a stop display mode setting means for setting the stop display mode of the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is provided, and the dynamic display mode setting means determines the voice type. The first dynamic display mode set based on the determination result of the means and the second dynamic display for causing the identification information dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode. The gaming machine N4, characterized in that the aspect and at least are set.

According to the gaming machine N4, even if the dynamic display mode is set according to the set voice type, the identification information can be reliably stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the stop display mode setting means. , There is an effect that the determination result of the determination means can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine N4, the dynamic display mode setting means sets the dynamic display speed of the second dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display speed set as the first dynamic display mode. The gaming machine N5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine N5, even if the dynamic display speed is set according to the set voice type, the identification information can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode set by the stop display mode setting means. There is an effect that the determination result of the means can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic O group> (Derivation of control that makes the BGM (stop sound) when the symbol is stopped a sharp BGM (stop sound))
The above-mentioned gaming machine having a determination means capable of executing a determination and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result. Dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. Means, at least an audio output means capable of outputting audio during a period in which the dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information, and an audio type for setting the type of audio output by the audio output means. The voice type setting means has a setting means, and the voice type setting means sets the voice type according to the information included in the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means. A game machine O1 characterized by.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines use a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the surface of the game board to perform an effect display for showing a lottery result of a big hit, and also support the effect display. There was something that played the sound that was made to play. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed that enables a player to set a desired voice by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced voice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). .. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing to stop and display a part of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the jackpot) and the timing to emphasize and output the reproduced sound (timing to beat the beat) are different. There was a problem that it would end up. In this way, if the emphasis timing of the effect display and the emphasis timing of the sound are different, it becomes difficult to clearly inform the player of the timing to be watched among the effects to be executed, which is visual. There is a problem that the production (production display) and the auditory production (audio output) cannot be executed as a production with a sense of unity. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine O1, since the type of sound can be set according to the set dynamic display mode, it is possible to output the sound according to the dynamic display mode, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. Has the effect of being able to set.

<Characteristic P group> (By making the tempo of the song the same, the BGM at the time of stopping the symbol is adjusted, and the stop sound is set according to the tempo of the song and the timing of stopping the symbol)
The game machine having the determination means capable of executing the determination and the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the determination result executed by the determination means is a predetermined determination result. Dynamic display mode setting for setting a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means. Means, at least an audio output means capable of outputting audio during a period in which the dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information, and an audio type for setting the type of audio output by the audio output means. The timing at which the setting means, the voice type discriminating means for discriminating the voice type set by the voice type setting means, and the dynamic display mode set by the dynamic display mode setting means satisfy a predetermined display mode. A device having a specific voice setting means for setting a specific voice output by the voice output means based on a timing discriminating means for discriminating the above, a discriminating result of the timing discriminating means, and a discriminating result of the voice type discriminating means. The gaming machine P1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines use a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) provided on the surface of the game board to perform an effect display for showing a lottery result of a big hit, and also support the effect display. There was something that played the sound that was made to play. Further, a gaming machine has been proposed that enables a player to set a desired voice by providing a function that allows the player to adjust the volume of the reproduced voice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73432). .. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, although it is possible to adjust the volume of the reproduced sound, it is not possible to adjust the output timing of the reproduced sound. The timing to be emphasized (for example, the timing to stop and display a part of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the jackpot) and the timing to emphasize and output the reproduced voice (timing to beat the beat) are different. There was a problem that it would end up. In this way, if the emphasis timing of the effect display and the emphasis timing of the sound are different, it becomes difficult to clearly inform the player of the timing to be watched among the effects to be executed, which is visual. There is a problem that the production (production display) and the auditory production (audio output) cannot be executed as a production with a sense of unity. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine having further improved the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine P1, the specific voice can be set based on the discrimination result of the timing discriminating means and the discriminating result of the voice type discriminating means, so that the dynamic display of the identification information and the output voice of the voice can be set. It is possible to set a specific sound corresponding to any of them, and there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine P1, the dynamic display means enables a plurality of symbol sequences formed from a plurality of identification information to be dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display mode setting means differs from the plurality of the symbol sequences. A game characterized in that a dynamic display mode for displaying a stop display at a timing is set, and the timing determination means determines the timing at which the symbol sequence is stopped as a timing satisfying the predetermined display condition. Machine P2.

According to the gaming machine P2, since the specific voice can be set according to the timing at which each symbol row is stopped, the specific voice suitable for the dynamic display mode to be executed can be set, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine P2, the voice type setting means sets any one voice type from a plurality of voice types having different beat timings of the output voice, and the voice type determining means is said. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it determines the timing of beats of a voice type set by a voice type setting means.

According to the gaming machine P3, the specific voice can be set according to the timing of the beat of the voice output from the voice output means.

In the gaming machine P3, the specific voice setting means sets a beat corresponding to the timing determined by the timing determination means and the timing of the beat of the voice type determined by the voice type determination means. The gaming machine P4, which is characterized by setting.

According to the gaming machine P4, a beat corresponding to the stop timing of each symbol sequence and the timing of the beat of the voice is set as the specific voice, so that the output specific voice gives a sense of unity between the dynamic display mode and the voice. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The game machine P4 has a specific voice storage means for storing a plurality of the specific voices in advance, and the specific voice setting means uses the specific voice corresponding to the voice type set by the voice type setting means as the specific voice. The gaming machine P5, which is read from a storage means and set.

According to the gaming machine P5, by storing the specific voice corresponding to the voice type in the specific voice storage means in advance, there is an effect that the process for setting the specific voice can be simplified.

In the gaming machine P5, the gaming machine P6 is characterized in that the specific voice storage means stores a plurality of specific voices having different beat intervals of the specific voices.

According to the gaming machine P6, since the specific voice can be set according to the interval between the stop timing of the symbol sequence and the timing of the beat of the voice, there is an effect that the characteristic voice can be easily set.

The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P5 or P6, a plurality of specific voices having different lengths of output periods are stored in the specific voice storage means.

According to the gaming machine P7, by making the length of the period in which the specific sound is output different, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific sound is output for an unnecessarily long period.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the gaming board, the success or failure of the game is determined, and an effect for suggesting and notifying the player of the determination result is executed. However, if the result of the hit / fail determination is a hit, there is a case where a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game as a production for suggesting the result of the pass / fail judgment.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has an effect executing means capable of executing an effect, an effect means having an effect execution area in which the effect is executed by the effect execution means, and a specific effect. It has a privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when it is executed, a variable means that changes the effect execution area, and the effect execution area corresponding to the effect to be executed. It has a variable control means that is variable by the variable means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 has an effect period determining means for determining an effect execution period executed by the effect execution means in the game machine described in the technical idea 1, and the effect execution means has the effect period. The variable control means is configured to be able to execute a continuous effect in which a plurality of continuous effects are executed within the effect execution period determined by the determination means, and the variable control means executes the effect according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed. The area is variable.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 has a determination means capable of executing the determination in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and the effect executing means has a plurality of symbol sequences in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged. After being dynamically displayed in combination, it is configured to be stopped and displayed so that the determination result by the determination means can be shown by the combination of the symbol rows stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the effective line is the said. It is set in an increase / decrease corresponding to the variation of the effect execution area by the variable means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the effect execution means capable of executing the effect, the effect means having the effect execution area in which the effect by the effect execution means is executed, and the case where the specific effect is executed. In addition, the variable means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, the variable means for varying the effect execution area, and the variable means for the effect execution area corresponding to the effect to be executed. It has a variable control means that is variable.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the effect execution means has an effect period determining means for determining the effect execution period executed by the effect execution means, and the effect execution means has a plurality of continuous effects within the effect execution period determined by the effect period determination means. The continuous effect to be executed is configured to be executable, and the variable control means changes the effect execution area according to the number of times the continuous effect is executed.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, the effect executing means has a determination means capable of executing the determination, and the effect executing means dynamically displays a combination of a plurality of symbol rows in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged, displays the stop, and displays the stop on the effective line. It is configured so that the determination result by the determination means can be shown by the combination of the respective symbol rows, and the effective line is set in an increase / decrease corresponding to the change of the effect execution area by the variable means. Is to be done.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
80 Variable display device unit (display means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
S305 Judgment means S2211 Dynamic display means

Claims (1)

Judgment means that can execute judgment and
A display means for displaying identification information for showing a judgment result by the judgment means, and a display means for displaying the identification information.
In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the display means displays identification information for indicating the specific determination result.
A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in a predetermined operation pattern,
A variable means that can be changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state,
It has a variable control means capable of executing variable control for changing the variable means based on a predetermined variable pattern.
The gaming machine is
As an effect pattern for showing the determination result of the determination means, the operation pattern of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means. It is possible to determine an effect pattern including, based on at least the determination result of 1 of the determination means.
It is possible to make the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means more difficult to see when the variable means is in the second state than when the variable means is in the first state.
The variable control means can change the variable means in a variable manner included in the effect pattern even when the identification information is not dynamically displayed .
The variable means is composed of a plurality of variable members, and in a state where at least one variable member is variable to the first state, at least one of the other variable members is variable to the second state. Is made possible
The gaming machine is characterized in that when it is the specific determination result, it is easier to determine an effect pattern in which the variable means is variable than when it is other than the specific determination result .

Images